Home

IBM 4247 Printer Maintenance Information

1. E RS164 De C87 DJe RA13 ad al RS41 RSI115 Jar 4 RS168 9 eln sla Ble u37 5 U20 8E 2 r1 RS40 e ij RS180 RS167 j Q le 3i 6 7 sq a deci Us Je 1 LA ei va o S ae e 8 puse a 2 e 2 efe F v q J 3 P 3 4 Korsq Bcaeq 97 CRS g x g ar uggan GA 3 gt g Boo RS112 of dUI00 BA C70 uso Rs208 folelo 2 2 P RS22 By B ce U34 ie rs720 mS 9E BE RS222 9 Y ts b RS223 5 eg 2e Els BK CRIZ C29 ms205 RETO cosce RS 18 T qx c94 RS103 Rs66el_ eco CO rum U28 le uw Em TOT C124 2 F mee RS256 f RS102 C161 4 7 ir lo D of ces UL CR52 Kq rs109 oat iia e TTE a bk CR45 Sle ole S Ss SB ps Sge S5 x e x x xe x O x e x ae xj amp U C108 o 36 RSS U26 U33 U32 z ra STS E o RS195 C RS197 RST98 MS ENTM eal sels ala a ss P LL ss K ges Ex Esa EE lz e Z x amp S ase sss SB S SB lass SS ERSST 34 x 9 x x x x o xl E IOR xls I C167 2 R
2. Flat Work Surface Approximately A Dg 76 mm 3 inches Approximately 51 mm 2 inches For Forms in Rear Pull or Push Pull Flat Work Surface Appendix B Supplies Forms Paths amp Environmental Considerations 539 Forms Stack Input and Output Locations Depending on which paper path you are using see the diagrams on the following pages for ways to stack input and output forms for your printer For satisfactory stacking results the distance from the printer table to the floor should be 736 to 762 mm 29 to 30 in and the distance between the shelf and the floor should be 381 mm 15 in IBM offers an optional printer stand that is specially designed for the 4247 Printer If you are using the printer stand see the diagrams on page For more information on this printer stand contact your Marketing Representative Note For successful forms parking the input forms stack MUST always be lower than the printer Appendix B Supplies Forms Paths amp Environmental Considerations 540 Forms Paths Front Push Forms Path 76mm 3 0 in gt Input 51 mm 2 inches y c o amp EH NE
3. i Drive Gear In Standby il Position For Front Installation eb Figure 80 Tractor In Standby Position Front Tractor shown installed in front position with drive gear not engaged right end cover removed for clarity Figure 81 on page 328 shows a tractor assembly installed in the rear push or pull position with the gear in the drive position The drive gear is driven by the idler gear The idler gear is driven PY a series of p on the left side of the printer The printer gears determine the direction the paper is fed See for rear pull gear rotation See Figure 71 on page 317 for rear push gear rotation Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 327 Motor dI e Drive Gear In Drive m Position For Rear Installation mt mM Idler Gear imm Printer Selector Gear Figure 81 Tractor In Drive Position Rear Tractor shown installed in rear position with drive gear engaged right end cover removed for clarity Figure 82 on page 329 shows the drive gear in standby The tractor assembly is put in standby when paper is being fed from a front tractor manual sheet feed or the automatic sheet feeder
4. Note This printer does not support the following types of forms Greater than 8 part forms Greater than 40 Ib paper Greater than 0 64 mm 0 025 in total forms thickness Less than 15 Ib paper Less than 0 08 mm 0 003 in paper thickness Other Considerations for Forms Consider the following items unless Table 108 or Table 108 provides other direction BM recommends you test the Park function when you intend to run multiple part forms If you notice forms feed problems try using the Eject function If using the Eject function is ineffective disable the Park function and use the push pull forms path Appendix B Supplies Forms Paths amp Environmental Considerations 533 When your printer is loaded with different forms in the front push and the rear push tractors your job or the operator can select the desired source and alternate between the two paths The operator must tear off the forms to allow the printer to change paths e See Table 108 on page 535 for recommended paper weight and thickness f your printer is using the rear push path or for forms stacking convenience consider ordering and using the optional 4247 printer stand Consider the following when using the optional Automatic Sheet Feeder You cannot use rear pull or push pull with the optional Automatic Sheet Feeder installed You must remove the ASF stacker when loading the rear push forms path The 4247 Printer pri
5. AFTA Motor Figure 139 AFTA Motor Connector Model A00 Early Level Figure 140 AFTA Motor Connector Model A00 Late Level and Models 001 002 and 003 Models 001 and 003 have connectors A and B Model 002 has only connector B 4 Remove the 2 AFTA motor screws and remove the motor Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 408 AFTA Motor Screws Figure 141 AFTA Motor Screws Viewed From Left Side 5 If the platen pinch roller gear is blocking the AFTA indicator screw rotate the gear counterclockwise eo acta Nei Platen sees Screw Roller Gear Figure 142 Platen Pinch Roller Gear Viewed From Left Side 6 Remove the 2 AFTA indicator mounting screws and remove the indicator Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 409 AFTA Indicator Screws Figure 143 AFTA Indicator Screws Viewed From Left Side 7 Remove the retaining clip and the intermediate gear m Intermediate Gear Figure 144 Intermediate Gear Retaining Clip Viewed From Left Side 8 Remove the screw and the carriage shaft gear Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 410 Carriage Shaft Gear Screw Q Figure 145 Carriage Shaft Gear Screw Viewed From Left Side Replacement 1 Follow the removal steps in reverse order 2 f the carriage shaft has not been moved install the indicato
6. Line Description Action if failure 1 Skew test in draft mode The line should See FManual Sheet Feed Path Check print parallel to the edge of the paper lon page 317 2 Paper feed test Short lines printed at See Manual Sheet Feed Path Check the left and right margins in forward up on page feed More short lines are printed inside the first lines but in reverse feed The two sets of lines should align within 0 0 1 0 mm 0 0 0 039 in 3 Skew test in draft mode Each group of See FManual Sheet Feed Path Check the character E should print parallel to the edge of the paper Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 344 1 EEEEEE Ma R4 ol XXX USER TEST 3 EEEEEE EEEBEE EEEEEE Figure 95 T amp D18 Print Test Printout Model A00 and Models 001 002 and 003 printouts are the same except for the title line Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 345 Removals Replacements Overview This section describes the removal and installation of the printer parts and contains two levels of safety notices A Danger calls attention to a situation that is potentially lethal or extremely hazardous to people AN Caution calls attention to a situation that is potentially hazardous to people The electronic parts of this printer can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Use ESD protection devices and procedures including a static discharge wrist strap while working on the printer T
7. 736 762 mm 29 30 in Output Floor l Lower than Printer Shelf Shelf 381 mm co Output 381 mr s Floor Z Floor SS Appendix B Supplies Forms Paths amp Environmental Considerations 541 Rear Push Forms Path 76mm Output gt 43 0 in w n J Ls mm 2 0 in 736 762 mm 29 30 in Input Floor Y Output Input Lt Top of Stack Lower than Printer gnen 381 mm g l Output 15 in E Floor Input Floor Appendix B Supplies Forms Paths amp Environmental Considerations 542 Dual Push Forms Path 76mm 3 0 in 1 g yo E Ra e3 23 2 736 762 mm Input Input 29 30 in Output E Floor SS NT ju LI v Input Input Top of Stack Shelf Lower than Printer 381 mm g 15 in 8 Output Floor Input Input Floor Appendix B Supplies Forms Paths amp Environmental Considerations 543 Rear Pull or Push Pull Forms Path Output 76 mm 3 0 in gt ititstii 51 mm npu 2 inches n c 736 762 mm 29 30 in F
8. h Power off O the printer and remove all loop back connectors if installed i Single test mode description stops here 12 Automatic Test Mode ined TEST AND DIAGNOSTIC STARTUP SINGLE YES NO a Press the Start key to select NO You will be prompted by the display or the instructions in 04 to press keys or install paper b If an error is detected an error message will be displayed TDXX FRU X X PRESS A KEY c Fora DUE of error messages go to d If all the tests run OK the following message will be displayed e To exit the T amp D program power off O the printer and remove all loop back connectors if installed Chapter 2 Diagnostics 203 T amp D Descriptions 1 If an error message is displayed during the T amp D program note the error information TDXX FRU X X PRESS A KEY 2 Press any of the keys 3 The following message will be displayed COMMAND REPT SKIP INIT To repeat the last test press the Line Feed key to select REPT To skip to the next test press the Form Feed key to select SKIP To restart the T amp D program from the beginning press the Start key to select INIT For error code descriptions and repair action go to FT amp NOJS T amp D01 Microcode Hardware Match Test Display T amp D01 Microcode Test RUN TEST YES END NO If an error message is displayed go to The test completed suc
9. Reference Table 2 Models 001 002 and 003 Error Messages Table 18 Error Messages for Models 001 002 and 003 Message Description Action 001 END OF FORMS Forms do not load when Load Eject is pressed No forms movement 001 END OF FORMS Forms are visible between the printhead and the platen Forms path sensor cannot sense paper 002 FORMS JAMMED FRONT TRACTOR CLEAR JAM AND RELOAD FORMS Jam detected at the front tractor sensor 005 MARGIN ERROR ADJUST MARGIN OR LINE LENGTH Left margin incorrect Press Stop then Start Left margin value will be reset to 10 for current line only Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 136 Table 18 Error Messages for Models 001 002 and 003 continued Message Description Action 007 INCORRECT PRINT ORDER PRESS STOP THEN START Coax interface only Invalid order received from host Press Stop then Start 008 HOLD PRINT TIMEOUT PRESS STOP THEN START Coax interface only 011 CHECK LOAD BIN 1 2 or 3 False message Start key not pressed within 10 minutes of pressing Stop Paper begins to feed from any bin but stops Forms path sensor cannot sense paper Press Stop then Start 014 INVALID FORMS SELECT FORM NAME SELECT NEW DEVICE Message and form name alternate on the first line of the display Printer received a request for forms type not supported in current forms configu
10. E90APC13 S Jumper Installed No Jumper Installed Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 363 Attachment Card Guide Assembly with the Interposer Connector Model 003 Removal Attention The electronic parts of this printer can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Use ESD protection devices and procedures including a static discharge wrist strap while working on the printer A DANGER To prevent serious personal injury from electrical shock when connecting or disconnecting the interface cable set the printer power switch to O Off and unplug the power cord A DANGER Do not connect or disconnect any communication port teleport attachment connector or power cord during an electrical storm Power off O the printer and unplug the power cord from the printer Remove the Attachment Card See Put the rear cover in the service position See Remove 3 M3x6 and 1 M3x8 screws securing the Attachment Card Guide ssembiy ACGA to the printer base and support posts and remove 1 M3x4 screw securing the grounding strap to the frame using a long shaft magnetic P1 Phillips tip screwdriver e Ie Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 364 Attachment card Guide Assembly Interposer Connector x SS TE e90apc12 5 Grasp the rear of the ACGA near the right support post and gently lift up until the Assembly detaches fr
11. Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 328 Drive Gear In Standby Position For Rear En E Installation L Idler Gear n Printer Selector Gear Figure 82 Tractor In Standby Position Rear Tractor shown installed in rear position with drive gear not engaged right end cover removed for clarity Note If two tractor assemblies are installed for a push pull configuration then both tractor drive gears will be in the drive position when paper is being fed 1 Power off O the printer 2 Locate and remove from the forms path torn pieces of paper or other foreign material that can cause forms jams 3 Inspect the following parts for wear damage or binds Replace the tractor assembly if indicated e Belts and tractor pins e Doors and door springs e Supports e Latches e Drive and idler gears e Connector Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 329 Tractor Assembly Release Levers Connector Tractor Doors Belts and Pins Gear E Forms Jam Sensor Supports Tractor Locking Levers Figure 83 Tractor Assembly 8 Ensure that the drive gear is free to move left and right Repair as needed Ensure that the forms jam sensor
12. Figure 31 Ribbon Lift Motor Wiring ASF Stacker Motor Wiring The stacker motor is a stepper motor with a 15 step angle The motor is used to transfer the stacker vane RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams 255 Note Allow the stacker motor to cool before taking resistance measurements Table 39 Stacker Motor Resistance Pins Resistance Temperature 1 and 2 200 Ohm 10 25 C 77 F 3 and 4 200 Ohm 10 25 C 77 F Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams 256 4 4 ri ff a i 1 r tt VIEW FROM WIRING SIDE Figure 32 Stacker Motor Wiring Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams 257 Cable Diagrams Printhead Cable Wiring e 1 if 1 1 i 1 18 Wire Printhead 2 1 2 2 1 2 3 mil 3 3 it 3 4 gt I 4 4 UR 4 22 Pin 5 F 5 5 i 5 Connector 6 it 6 6 if 6 3 7 i 7 7 us 7 Pin 1 8 bd 8 8 it 8 9 j 9 9 9 Ribbon Lift jr n n i r se n 1 11 pa 11 9 mn i Connector 26 Pin Pin 1 12 W 12 up seu 12 14 12 Kup Connector 13 E a eg HE m NS Logic 14 1 M n m bs e 15 m 15 15 YT 15 Board ie i 18 16 T 16 17 f 17 17 ra 17 18 18 1 d1rF 18 9 Wire Printhead 19 1 t 19 19 1 t 19
13. E90AFF2 Figure 66 Rear Pull Path Overview Viewed From Left Side 4 Ensure that the rear tractor assembly is in the pull mode To put the tractor assembly in pull mode pull the two levers on the back and pivot the part that mounts to the printer until it detents approximately 45 degrees Ensure the rear tractor push pull selector is set correctly To set the rear tractor for the pull forms path pull the push pull selector toward the front of the 2 a until the gear shafts are compistely at the bottom of the slots in the selector See and Inspect the following parts for wear damage or binds Use knob PN 08H7271 if available to hand cycle the paper feed mechanism to observe the parts The knob installs on the left end of the platen shaft Install new parts as needed Upper feed roller gear Idler gear Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 312 Pull selector gear Tractor assembly gears Tractor Assembly Gears Cover Removed Upper Feed Roller Gear Push Pull Selector in Pull Position Up Pull Selector Idler Gear Gear Figure 67 Rear Pull Path Close up Viewed From Left Side Tractor Connector Not Shown 7 Ensure that the metal forms guide deflector is in the closed up position See Figure 57 on page 303 8 Use a lint free cloth to clean the jam sensor located on the tractor assembly 9 Return to the step that sent you here Push Pull Path Check 1 Locate and remov
14. Feature Resistors Feature Resistors as Shown in Table e90act05 Figure 3 Models 001 and 002 attachment card Feature Resistors Level 2 Short Card shows the location and orientation of the attachment card microcode module S1 on the Level 1 long attachment card shows the location and orientation of the attachment card microcode module on the Level 2 short attachment card The position of the corner cut and the beveled edge help you determine the orientation of the microcode module Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 52 A N A z 3 9 7 in P m Corner Bevel Cut Off e90act08 Figure 4 Models 001 and 002 Placement of S1 Microcode Module Long Card The length of this attachment card is approximately 248 mm 9 7 in Bevel Corner Cut Off e90act10 Figure 5 Models 001 and 002 Placement of S1 Microcode Module Short Card The length of this attachment card is approximately 182 mm 7 2 in Use Figure 2 on page 51 Figure 4l and Figure 7 on page 55 to verify that the Attachment card feature resistors and S1 module label match your host connection feature e S1 module is installed in the correct orientation The dotted line depicted on the S1 module in igure 3 on represents the orientation of the beveled edge On the Level 2 short
15. For LAN attachment card Model 003 1 Check that parallel configuration values are at factory defaults 2 Reseat the LAN card 3 Press and hold the test button on the LAN card until the network light flashes then release the test button 4 Remove the LAN card and perform the parallel port wrap test on the printer 5 f the parallel port wrap test passes replace the LAN card 6 If the parallel port wrap test fails replace the logic board Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 153 Symptom Probable Cause Action Test page prints with error messages Internal errors 1 NVRAM E1 or NVRAM E2 a Disconnect the power cable at the unit b Wait 10 seconds and reconnect c If the problem continues replace the NPS unit or LAN card 2 NVRAM E3 a Replace the NPS unit or LAN card 3 NVRAM E4 a Disconnect the power cable at the unit b Wait 10 seconds and reconnect c If the problem continues replace the NPS unit or LAN card 4 ETHER E6 ERROR E6 COMM E8 a Replace the NPS unit or LAN card 5 COMM E9 a Wrong token ring speed b Change the ring speed Power off the NPS unit and try again Table 19 Reference Table NPS 540 with no external power supply 1 Remove NPS from printer s parallel connector 2 Check for 5 V dc on pin 18 of the printer s parallel connector pin numbers shown on connector If 5 V dc is not present ensure the logic board jumper that enabl
16. Operator panel display is blank LEDs are off and keys do not operate 1 Ensure that the operator panel cable is connected correctly at both ends Operator panel display is dim board only See 2 _Install a new operator panel See Initialization incomplete Initialization is complete when the selected font and pitch are displayed the Online LED is on solid and the selected paper path LED is on solid with paper or flashing without paper Install a new logic board For Model A00 see page Bed Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 149 Description of Failure Action Buzzer sounds continuously Install a new logic board For Model A00 see page Printing stops or slow printing Printhead carriage only moves approximately 1 inch Printing starts to print 1 line then printer hangs Printhead crashes into left or right side frame or the margins shift Results of adjusting AFTA wheel vary on same paper weight Fanfold paper does not load or feed No paper movement Manual sheet feed paper does not load or feed No paper movement ASF paper does not load or feed No paper movement Fanfold paper jams Manual sheet feed jams ASF feed jams Fanfold paper print line skew Print line too high or low on one end of line Single sheet feed print line skew Print line too high or low on one end of line
17. Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 42 Table 6 MAP 0121 Attachment Models 001 002 or 003 continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 3 Are you here due to a 065 display message on Model 001 or 002 Go to step 5 on page 44 Message 066 indicates that the attachment card did not establish communication with the printer main logic board a Reseat the attachment card microcode module S1 Models 001 002 b Reseat the attachment main board cable c Inspect the attachment card module socket and the module looking for bent pins or a damaged socket Go to step Ho on page 44 Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 43 Table 6 MAP 0121 Attachment Models 001 002 or 003 continued Step Questions Actions Yes No The attachment card Message 203 indicates that the 4 5 5 fo Are er here due to a 200 display message on Model twinax or coax is attachment card did not establish 0037 incorrect for the base communication with the printer main code Install the other logic board type of card If thisis la Loosen the screws and reseat coax card it must be the attachment card installed with coax base b Replace the attachment card code San Wald erlia a Replace the interposer connector See TETTE 5 Check the attachment card cable connection at the Go to step 11 on page 47 Repair as needed coax twinax connector See l Chapter 4 Locations
18. 89 053 or 089 display message Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 89 Table 12 MAP 0160 Ribbon Feed and Ribbon Lift continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 2 Does the ribbon motor run continuously Install a new logic board For Model A00 see FLogid Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation Cor Model AOO see Pow Td For Mee 001 002 or 003 see eet 001 002 grona Go to step d 4 Pernon the eee service check See e ribbon Feed Is the service check OK Go to step H Repair as needed 5 Ensure that a ribbon is installed Run T amp D11 in single test mode to test ribbon feed and it For Model A00 see Does the ribbon feed OK Go to step 6 on page 91 Go to step I on page 91l Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 90 Table 12 MAP 0160 Ribbon Feed and Ribbon Lift continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 6 Did the ribbon lift OK Return to the step that sent you Go to step B on page 92 to this MAP 7 Power off O the printer Install a new logic board Install a new ribbon drive motor Disconnect the ribbon motor connector at the logic ror Model A00 see FLogid board Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Model AO00 see How Td measure 2 the resistance of the motor windings Is the resistance correct For Meda 001 002 or 00
19. 9 The next part of this test is forms path sensor tuning The rear forms path sensor is mounted on one of the platen pinch roller assemblies Because this sensor has two positions closed and open the printer tunes this sensor in each position During this part of the test the pinch rollers are closed and opened 10 The following message will display T amp D11 Pinch Roller Sensor Tune Ribbon SENSORS TUNED PRESS A KEY r Important The forms path sensors were tuned The tuning must be done with all paper removed If paper is installed remove the paper and repeat T amp D11 Return to the step that sent you here or for T amp D11 continue with the next step 11 Press any key and get this to display T amp D11 Pinch Roller Sensor Tune Ribbon TEST RUNNING TO STOP 12 The ribbon feed and the ribbon lift motors run continuously during this test This feeds the ribbon and raises and lowers the ribbon lift Press the Form Feed key to stop the test If either motor fails go to MAP 0160 H all page 99 13 Ifan error message is displayed go to 14 The test completed successfully if the display advances to the next test number T amp D12 AFTA Calibrate Test You must complete this test to Calibrate the microcode for the printhead and e Adjust the gap between the printhead needles and the platen Chapter 2 Diagnostics 210 Display T amp D12 YES NO END Calibrate the mic
20. Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 150 Description of Failure Action Ribbon life failures Ribbon feed or lift failure Loud noise during sensor tuning Fanfold stacking problems Forms damage at perforations of multiple part forms or heavy stock Guide 2 3 4 Forms damage 1 2 d Customer cannot remove the ASF electronics card cover 1 Using a flat bladed screwdriver pry off the electronics card cover 2 Using a file increase the width by approximately 3 mm 0 12 in across the short dimension of the slot in the electronics card This is the slot into which the bottom metal tab must fit Unable to select automatic sheet feeder path from operator panel Automatic sheet feeder ASF failure from 1 or more bins Paper feeds from the wrong ASF bin Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 151 Description of Failure Action ASF Stacker failure Fanfold paper enters the ASF stacker assembly ASF stacker Paper from the ASF or manual sheet feed tray fails to enter the Reference Table 6 LED and Test Page Problems NPS and LAN Attachment Card Symptom Probable Cause Action Power LED is not lighted on external NPS all models No power For NPS 540 p n 30H4054 with no external power supply see Table 19 For NPS 540 p n 30H4054 using an external power supply see Table 2d For NPS 640 p n 30H40
21. Lower feed roller assembly Paper bail Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 317 3 Ensure that the paper bail is in the lower detented position touching the feed roller assembly See Figure 54 4 Ensure that the metal forms guide deflector is in the open down position See Figure 57 on page 304 Roller Platen Pas amp ESL Roller Figure 72 Manual Sheet Feed Path Viewed From Left Side 5 Ensure that the metal forms guide deflector is in the open down position See Fig 6 Clean the pinch rollers and the lower feed rollers with isopropyl alcohol PN 2155966 Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 318 f AN CAUTION Isopropyl Alcohol is flammable Avoid sparks and open flame The pinch rollers are located under the carriage drive belt The onch rofets can be removed to access and clean the lower feed rollers See PP H A Return to the step that sent you here Automatic Sheet Feeder ASF Bins Service Check 1 2 d 4 Power off O the printer Ensure that the ASF cable is plugged into the stacker Ensure that paper bail is in the closed position See Ensure the platen pinch rollers are free Stacker Paper Platen Platen Pinch Roller Assembly Figure 73 Automatic Sheet Feeder Path Viewed From Left Side 5 Fan the paper in the paper bins Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 319 Ensure the ASF assembly is installed correctly The ASF assemb
22. Message Description Action 73 SW ERR 3XX 73 SW ERR 40X Firmware error detected during initialization of printhead drive Firmware error detected during initialization of ribbon motion sensor Power off and power on the printer If message remains see FMAP 0140 73 SW ERR 41X or 73 SW ERR 43X Firmware error detected during initialization of printhead home sensor Power off and power on the printer If message remains 1 Ensure no paper or debris is blocking the sensor 2 Ensure all logic board connectors are connected 89 RIBBON JAM CHECK RIBBON The ribbon motion sensor has detected an error 90 CLOSE COVER False message The cover open sensor has detected an error 96 COVER OPEN False Message The cover open sensor has detected an error 97 STACKER ERROR The printer has failed to sense that an ASF stacker is installed 1 Power off the printer 2 Ensure that the stacker is installed correctly Power on the printer See MAP 0170 ASF Stacker an Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 135 Table 17 Model A00 Error Messages continued Message Description Action JUMPER AND KEYS Manufacturing use only 1 Remove the jumper from the bottom of the operator panel 2 Install a new EMI filter assembly used Model AOO inetall 4 a new v operator panel cable Install a new logic board See o e
23. Model 003 Notes 1 This is the correct MAP for a Model 003 with parallel only or a Model 003 with a serial attachment card 2 Printing in hexadecimal code is available to aid service personnel and programmers for host program debug a Model A00 In the Program Configuration Setup scroll to HEX DUMP NO Change the NO to YES press the Pitch key and printing from that point on will be in hexadecimal code b Model 003 On the operator panel press the Hex Print key Refer to a 4247 User s Guide for instructions 3 A computer such as a laptop can be connected to the printer parallel port as input to help isolate some communications problems Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 33 r Model 003 with Serial Card When the Model 003 has a serial card installed it displays Parallel Attachment on the Operator s Panel When one cycles through the options found by pressing the Menu key the Configuration Menu should appear Table 3 Configuration Menu Parallel and Serial Configuration This is an indication that the printer recognizes the serial card When data is received on the serial port and printing begins the display will change to Serial Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 34 A DANGER To prevent serious personal injury from electrical shock when connecting or disconnecting the interface cable set the printer power switch to O Off and unplug the power cord AN DA
24. No No Yes Yes Latin 2 Host Epson FX Only CP437 CP1251 20 CPI NLQ Data Bits No Yes Courier 8 Gothic 7 SERIAL INTERFACE Table 60 Serial Interface Interface Types Baud Rate Buffer Size Serial No RS 232C 300 4800 256 RS 422A 600 9600 2K 1200 19200 12K 2400 38400 32K 64K Emulation Character Sets Print Language Native 4247 4202 Ill XL PG CP437 2381 PC2 Epson FX Italic Epson FX Only CP1251 Appendix A Printer Configuration 489 Table 60 Serial Interface continued Print Language Automatic CR on LF Automatic LF on CR USA No No Yes Yes Latin 2 CP437 CP1251 20 CPI NLQ Data Bits No Yes Courier 8 Gothic 7 Parity Pacing Protocol Connection Type None Odd DTR RS 232C Only Local Even XON XOFF Remote Mark Space Appendix A Printer Configuration 490 FUNCTIONS Table 67 Functions Front Tear Mode Rear Tear Mode Paper Overlay Norm Auto No Norm Auto No No Yes Sequence Alarm Automatic Load None FR RR ASF1 2 ASF123 Yes No Yes No Display Language English Italiano Francais Espanol Deutsh Portugues Dansk Nederlands SENSOR TUNE Table 62 Sensor Tune No Yes BIDIRECTIONAL ADJUSTMENT Appendix A Printer Configuration 491 Table 63 Bidirectional Adjustment 0 6 to 6 RESTOR
25. Replace the operator panel cable TD 6 FRUO X Parallel Interface Failure Replace the logic board TD 8 FRUOX Microcode Error TD 9 FRUO X Serial Attachment Failure 2 Replace the serial attachment card See TD 10 FRU 0 1 ASF Stacker Failure 1 Replace the logic board 2 Replace the stacker cable assembly Chapter 2 Diagnostics 191 Table 27 T amp D Error Messages and Action continued Error Message Description Action TD 12 FRU 0 X AFTA Failure js 2 TD 14 FRU 0 20 Thermal Sense Failure 1 2 3 Install new w printhead cables TD 19 FRU 1 X Operator Panel Failure 1 This error can occur if the cover is not opened or closed in less than 10 seconds Run T amp D19 again to verify the problem Chapter 2 Diagnostics 192 Table 27 T amp D Error Messages and Action continued Error Message Description Action TD FRU 3 11 TD FRU 3 12 Paper Sense Failure Ribbon Sense Failure 1 Clear paper jam operation If sensors are not operational Replace the logic board Replace the ribbon drive motor See page 40 2 Replace the logic board 3 Replace the sensor cable assembly Chapter 2 Diagnostics 193 Table 27 T amp D Error Messages and Action continued Error Message Description Action TD FRU 3 13 P
26. on page 325 24 Perform the main paper drive service check and the Go to step B5 on page 117 Repair as needed paper path service check indicated by the operator panel display or paper path LED Mal page 301l Are the service checks OK Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For meee Aco see Fow To Run Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 116 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 25 A paper presence sensor failure can cause a 02 or Run T amp D21 including performing Go to step 26 on page 118 099 forms jam message to display instead of a 01 a sensor tune and verify correct 11 001 or 011 end of forms message sensor operation If not OK Did the printer fail to detect end of forms Install a new logic board For f the printer is still failing after the logic board has been changed install a new sensor assembly cable Go to Sensor Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operator For e A00 see Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 117 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 26 A paper presence sensor failure can cause a 02 or Run T amp D21 including performing Go to step 27 on page 119 099 forms jam message to display after a Park or Eject a sensor tune and verify correct operation sensor oper
27. 1 If the FIXED 1 sample is dark the FIXED 2 sample is light gray and the FIXED 3 sample is very light with missing dots the gap and T amp D12 value are set correctly Gap Is Too Small 1 If the FIXED 1 sample is dark the FIXED 2 sample is also dark and the FIXED 3 sample is light gray you should create a FIXED 4 sample The FIXED 4 sample should appear light and exhibit some missing dots 2 Using T amp D12 increase the T amp D12 adjustment value 2 and STORE to increase the wheel position 0 5 3 Rerun the samples to verify satisfactory results After you are satisfied with the results go to Gap Check Gap Is Too Large Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 292 1 If the FIXED 1 sample is light the FIXED 2 sample is very light missing dots and the FIXED 3 sample is unreadable due to lightness the gap is too large 2 Using T amp D12 decrease the T amp D12 adjustment value 2 and STORE to decrease the wheel position 0 5 3 Rerun the samples to verify satisfactory results and go to After the print quality samples indicate that the printer now has achieved the proper darkness change you must verify a correct gap between the Printhead and the platen Carriage and the platen To verify the correct gaps follow these steps 1 Set the AFTA menu item to AFTA 0 2 Load a single sheet of 20 Ib 80 g m paper into the print area 3 Remove the forms from the forms path 4 Remove the ribbon cart
28. 4 FANFOLD FRONT PAPER PRESENCE E90AWD8 5 FANFOLD REAR PAPER PRESENCE MOAD MOAD MOAD MOAD MORA w Figure 35 Sensor Cable Assembly Wiring Tractor Assembly Cable Wiring Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams 260 16 i omm0000 7 10 9 15 16 REAR TRACTOR 1 ij ASSEMBLY VIEW FROM CONNECTOR PIN SIDE VIEW FROM 1 REAR OF PRINTER 1 gt lt 4 25 M FRONT TRACTOR 8 lt 3 FRONT 2 ASSEMBLY 4 gt lt 4 TRACTOR CONNECTOR ae 5 ASSEMBLY 7 gt 7 CONNECTOR VIEW FROM ee 5 FRONT OF 9 PRINTER 10 LOGIC BOARD lt 10 lt 9 ns E REAR E TRACTOR 13 gt 44 ASSEMBLY 14 gt s CONNECTOR i Figure 36 Tractor Assembly Cable Wiring Stacker Cable Wiring Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams 261 9 Ho VIEW FROM PIN SIDE 2 LOGIC BOARD za if tf Pad VIEW FROM PIN SIDE REAR OF STACKER ASSEMBLY o 4o han See toa nena vy YY YY PLS LN LOR LSI LN IRIE oo Figure 37 Stacker Cable Wiring Attachment Connectors Table 40 RS 232C Connector Pin Assignments 10 2 PRINTER Pin Signal Name Description 2 TXD Transmit Data 3 RXD Receive Data 4 RTS Request to Send 5 CTS Clear to Send 6 DSR Data Set Ready 7 SG Signal Ground 20 DTR Data Terminal Ready Chapter 3 Ci
29. Network problem 1 Have the customer ping the printer to verify communications 2 Have the customer verify host and print server configuration Including IP address gateway address and subnet mask 3 Have the customer check physical network cabling NPS Server or LAN card communicates with host but printer does not print Data stream problem 1 Have the customer check print job stream 2 Take a data trace of the attachment and contact support Note The term ping means to send a signal in anticipation of a return response The return response indicates that the printer and the host are communicating Reference Table 8 Power Supply Connector Pins and Voltages Table 22 Voltages Pin Voltage Range Pin 1 N A Pin 2 5 V dc 5 2 4 8 V dc Pin 3 5 V dc 4 8 45 2 V dc Pin 4 5 V dc 44 8 45 2 V dc Pin 5 5 V dc 4 8 45 2 V dc Pin 6 Ground Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 156 Table 22 Voltages continued Pin Voltage Range Pin 7 Ground Pin 8 Ground Pin 9 Ground Pin 10 Ground Pin 11 38 V dc 36 5 39 5 V dc Pin 12 38 V dc 36 5 39 5 V dc Pin 13 38 V dc 36 5 39 5 V dc Pin 14 N A Pin 15 See note Notes 1 Pin 15 is the idle control input signal from the logic board and will measure 0 V dc when the power supply is disconnected from the logic board 2 When connected to the logic board pin
30. Questions Actions Yes No 3 Is this a Model A00 Model A00 Messages Locate Models 001 002 amp 003 the Model A00 message in Messages Locate the Model Reference Table 1 Model ADD 001 002 or 003 message in the FBeference Table 2 Models an perform the jocemmeandad a action Note This table does not list all perform the recommended the messages that might appear action in the display such as Note This table does not list all informational messages that do the messages that might appear not indicate an error Refer to a in the display such as 4247 User s Guide for other informational messages that do messages If you cannot find not indicate an error Refer to a the message go to step 4247 User s Guide for other messages If you cannot find the message go to step 4 Is the problem no print Print the print test Go to step 5 on page 25 If this is a Model A00 see FHow If this is a Model 001 002 or 003 see How To Print the bage iad Find the mend of the failure in on page 146 and perform the aclion suggested Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 24 Table 1 MAP 0100 START OF CALL continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 5 Is the problem print quality Find the description of the Find the description of the failure in Reference Table 4 failure in FBeferencs Table i Print Qua allures on and perform the action suggested and perform the act
31. Screw M3x4 PP 08H7355 16 63H6000 1 Shaft Platen Pinch Roller 17 2 Bushing PP 08H7351 18 1 Clip Retaining PP 63H6001 19 08H7251 1 Cable Assembly Sensor 21 1 Screw PP 08H7355 22 1 Spacer PP 08H7353 23 1 Screw PP 08H7355 24 1 Plate Sensor PP 08H7352 25 1 Screw PP 08H7355 26 08H7284 5 Roller Assembly Platen Pinch Packaged 5 Per Pack 27 08H7285 1 Support Packaged 5 Per Pack 28 63H6272 1 Platen Assembly 29 08H7287 1 Belt Platen Packaged 5 Per Pack 30 2 Retainer Bearing PP 08H7352 931 1 Bearing PP 08H7351 32 6 Mount Rubber PP 08H7352 33 08H7288 1 Pulley Packaged 5 Per Pack 34 1 Screw M3x8 PP 08H7355 Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 468 Assembly 4 continued Asm Part Index Number Units Description 35 08H7289 1 Motor Paper Feed 36 2 Screw M3x10 PP 08H7355 97 1 Washer PP 63H6001 38 08H7297 1 Frame Part 39 4 Support Printhead Home Ribbon Motion Sensor PP 08H7353 40 1 Bushing Rubber PP 08H7352 41 4 Spacer PP 08H7352 42 4 Screw PP 08H7356 43 2 Screw PP 08H7356 44 1 Screw PP 08H7355 45 08H7298 1 Frame Part 46 08H7290 1 Roller Assembly Upper Feed 47 3 Washer Thrust PP 63H6001 48 1 Bushing PP 08H7351 49 1 Retainer Cable PP 08H7352 50 08H7291 4 Roller Lower Feed Roller
32. Test 217 Tests and Diagnostics Models A00 160 T amp D17 Tear Off Line Adjustment tools 481 Test 218 top cover interlock MAP 66 98 T amp D18 Single Sheet Feed Printout 221 tractor assembly T amp D19 Top Cover Interlock cable wiring 260 Test 222 service check 325 Index 566 Part Number 27P8450 on recycled paper containing 10 e Printed in the United States of America recovered post consumer fiber SA24 4400 05 1P P N 27P8450
33. 1995 2001 9 A DANGER Primary power is present on the power supply when the power cable is connected even when the power switch is set to O Off DANGER Do not connect or disconnect any communication port teleport attachment connector or power cord during an electrical storm AN CAUTION The printhead may be hot Wait for it to cool down Safety Information 10 AN CAUTION The ribbon motor may be hot Wait for it to cool down AN CAUTION The carriage motor may be hot Wait for it to cool down AN CAUTION The paper feed motor may be hot Wait for it to cool down General Safety Follow these rules to ensure general safety Upon arrival at the job site notice the location of functioning telephones in your area that may be used in an emergency Observe good housekeeping in the area of the machines during and after maintenance When lifting any object 1 Ensure you can stand safely without slipping 2 Distribute the weight of the object equally between your feet 3 Use a slow lifting force Never move suddenly or twist when you attempt to lift Safety Information 11 4 Lift by standing or by pushing up with your leg muscles this action removes the strain from the muscles in your back Do not attempt to lift any objects that weight more than 18 kg 39 7 Ib or objects that you think are too heavy for you Do not perform any action that causes hazards to the customer or that m
34. 20 1 r 20 20 i4 20 21 1 21 21 1 21 22 ei 22 22 it 22 p 23 it 23 24 7 24 Ris 22 PIN CABLE a B J Not 18 wire print head only not 26 i 26 Ribbon Lift pip Used used for 9 wire print head Connector 26 Pin i 26 PIN CABLE Connector Figure 33 Printhead Cable Wiring The 22 pin cable is for the 18 wire printhead only The 26 pin cable is for the 9 wire printhead only Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams 258 Operator Panel Cable Wiring VIEW FROM VIEW FROM PIN SIDE PIN SIDE OPERATOR PANEL LOGIC BOARD OONO ARON MENEM NENEN NENES ANININ IN IAN ANAN AN ONORA Gh a mm o Ww ped 2 0 AN A m 12 gt 13 1 14 gt lt 14 Figure 34 Operator Panel Cable Wiring Sensor Cable Assembly Wiring The sensor cable assembly is composed of five optical sensors The printhead home and ribbon motion sensors are interrupter sensors The three paper presence sensors are reflective type sensors Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams 259 VIEW FROM WIRING SIDE VIEW FROM E PIN SIDE E A K a I munanoanamau nunanununuu TM i 2 1 RIBBON 3 MOTION 3 2 PRINT HEAD 7 HAME LOGIC Xs A VIEW FROM WIRING SIDE BOARD 9 SINGLE SHEET 1 11 PRESENCE
35. 3 1 NP Mechanical Assembly 2 63H6062 2 Tie Wire 3 1 Block Mechanical PP 08H7353 4 2 Screw PP 08H7356 5 1 Block Mechanical PP 08H7353 6 1 Screw Manual Sheet Feed Tray PP 08H7356 7 08H7272 1 Shield Base Models A00 001 002 7 01P7683 1 Shield Base Model 003 8 08H7273 1 Base Assembly Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 465 Assembly 3 continued Asm Part Index Number Units Description 9 08H7276 1 Pad Acoustic 10 63H6375 1 Guide Plastic Paper Packaged 5 Per Pack 11 63H6004 1 Tray Manual Sheet Feed Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 466 Assembly ica Mechan Assembly 4 DETAIL K DETAIL J godegga Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 467 Assembly 4 continued Asm Part Index Number Units Description 4 1 NP Mechanical Assembly 2 NP Frame Right Side 3 NP Frame Left Side 4 NP Frame Part 5 63H6002 1 e Frame Manual Sheet Feed Tray 6 08H7277 1 Roller Assembly Lower Feed 24H7730 1 Lower Plastic Shield Assembly Includes 24H7729 Asm Index 4 51 8 1 Bushing PP 08H7351 9 1 Clip Retaining PP 63H6001 10 08H7279 1 Pulley Lower Feed Roller 11 3 Sensor Paper Presence Order Sensor Cable Assembly PN 08H7251 12 2 Sensor Printhead Home and Ribbon Motion Order Sensor Cable Assembly PN 08H7251 13 12 Screw PP 08H7356 14 1 Screw M3x6 PP 08H7355 15 4
36. Connector Locations Model A00 Early Level Chapter 4 Locations 271 Connector Locations Later Model A00 and Models 001 and 002 Coax Tractors Sensors Twinax d Stacker Operator Panel Power Supply Print Carriage Ribbof AFTA Carriage Head Motor Motor Fan Figure 45 Connector Locations Model A00 Late Level and Models 001 and 002 Models A00 and 001 have both printhead connectors A and B Model 002 has only printhead connector B Chapter 4 Locations 272 Connector Locations Model 003 em Operator CONSORS Attachment Stacker BC d Path Ribbon Motion Connector Tractors and Carriage Home PAS A B N ES Print Head Carriage Ribbon Driver AFTA Carriage and Ribbon Motor Motor Fan Lift Motor Power Supply Figure 46 Connector Locations Model 003 Network Print Server Attachment Pin 18 5 V Jumper Location and the Parallel Connector The NPS Ethernet 540 can be used without an external power supply only if 5 V dc is enabled supplied on pin 18 of the printer parallel attachment connector NPS devices p n 30H4082 30H4083 30H4055 cannot be powered by pin 18 and always require an external 12 V ac power supply There is no danger of damaging any NPS or other computer devices when 5 V dc is enabled on pin 18 The new logic
37. Do not connect or disconnect any communication port teleport attachment connector or power cord during an electrical storm Power off O the printer and unplug the power cord from the printer pS YS Board Fan Support Figure 110 Board Fan Support 6 Disconnect all cables from the logic board connectors Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 367 Notes a To remove printhead cables hold the cable just above the connector and pull the cable out of the connector These are not locking connectors b Some connectors have retaining clips c The sensor connector can be disconnected after the logic board is partially removed d Note the connector locations and cable paths to aid installation Each connector is a unique size ASF S Attachment Stacker Operator Path Ribbon Motion Panel Connector and Carriage Home Tractors Power Supply BES mt Print Head Carriage Ribbon Driver AFTA Carriage 5 and Ribbon Motor Motor Fan z Lift Motor amp Figure 111 Connector Locations 7 Remove the 6 mounting screws and 2 standoffs Note the type and location of each screw see Figure 112 There are 4 self tapping screws and 2 threaded M3x6 screws Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 368 A Threaded Screw 2 B Self tapping Screw 4 E90ACB5 Figu
38. Maximum Print Position MPP Maximum Page Length MPL 6 8 136 066 001 136 at 10 CPI 001 660 at 6 LPI 163 at 12 CPI 880 at 8 LPI 204 at 15 CPI 227 at 16 7 CPI 233 at 17 1 CPI Perforation Skipping Emulation Mode Print Language Appendix A Printer Configuration 520 Table 96 Parallel Configuration continued 000 000 065 4247 2381 Personal Printer 4202 Proprinter Ill XL Epson FX 437 PC i 1251 Oyrillic Windows Print Language Print Quality Print Quality 0 USA i 1251 Cyrillic Windows DP Quality DP Text Quality Near Letter Quality OCR A OCR B DP Quality Courier Gothic OCR A OCR B NLQ Typeface Character Set Printer Compatibility Courier Gothic PC1 PC2 Italics Epson Only See Sub Menu in able 97 Alarm Control Override Host Model 003 only Enabled Disabled Paper Source Characters Per Inch Lines Per Inch Maximum Page Length Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Appendix A Printer Configuration 521 Table 96 Parallel Configuration continued Parallel Interface Interface type sub menu of parallel interface Input Buffer Size sub menu of parallel interface PC Parallel 1284 Parallel 256 2K 12K 32K 64K Select In Signal AutoFeed XT Enabled Disable
39. Note If a key is not pressed in approximately 10 seconds an error message will be displayed If a time out error message occurs press the Micro key once then the Line Feed key to repeat T amp DO05 6 Continue to press the keys as each request is displayed If an error message is displayed go to FT 8 The test completed successfully if the display advances to the next test number T amp DO6 Parallel Attachment Test Note This test is not available on Model 003 when a LAN attachment card is installed It is available with all other configurations If you wish to perform a diagnostic verification of the parallel interface press the LAN attachment test printout button on the LAN attachment card The parallel loop back connector PN 08H7269 needs to be installed for this test Note If the loop back connector is not installed an error message will be displayed To bypass this message press any key then the Form Feed key to advance to the next test Display T amp D06 Parallel Attachment Test RUN TEST YES END NO Chapter 2 Diagnostics 206 If an error message is displayed go to The test completed successfully if the display advances to the next test number T amp DO8 Microcode Test Display T amp D08 Microcode Test RUN TEST YES END NO If an error message is displayed go to T amp The test completed successfully if the display advances to th next test number T amp DO9 Serial Attachment Te
40. Qo 2 D 2 3 D ME o y D J It is recommended that one perform the Quick procedure first if the eulie are not favorable proceed then to the Standard procedure Attention Do not attempt any adjustments loosen any screws or perform any steps until instructed to do so Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 282 Quick AFTA Service Check and Adjustment This quick AFTA Service Check can be used to verify the correct print gap on new printers and mechanisms NOT yet disassembled If a printer has been disassembled the E 86 should be used first to verify that all the hardware is mounted and working correctly The result of successful completion with this Quick procedure will be that when a 1 part paper is loaded 1 For either the AFTA 0 or FIXED 1 modes the AFTA Wheel will go to the SAME position 2 You will have verified good PQ along with good paper feeding and carriage motion 3 The Wheel position may NOT be on number 1 ME Quick AFTA Service d can replace these 3 AFTA Service Check sections Standard AFTA Service Check and Adjustment procedures see understand some problems Follow these steps to perform the Quick AFTA Salica Check 1 Check that the print head is mounted securely with the socket head screw star washer and thick flat washer Spares are available 5 sets with P N 02N7555 2 Check the print needles Clean the ink build up from the white surfaces ar
41. Removal 1 Remove the printer covers See Printer Covers on page 3471 2 Loosen the paper feed drive belt tension screws through the access holes in the frame Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 448 Access Holes for Tension Screws Lower Feed Roller Gear and C clip Figure 184 Paper Feed Drive Belt Tension Screws Remove the carriage motor drive belt from the motor pulley Remove the 4 carriage motor support bracket screws Separate the motor bracket from the fan bracket and set the motor out of the way Attention Do not damage the cables un E 3 Screws Figure 185 Paper Feed Motor Drive Belt Screws Close up Viewed From Right Side 5 Remove the nut from the front tractor connector housing Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 449 6 Remove the stop screw from the front tractor connector housing 7 Slide the cable and connector out of the housing Front Tractor Connector Housing Nut and Screw Figure 186 Carriage Motor Support Bracket Screws Viewed From Right Side 8 Loosen the paper feed belt tension lever screws and remove the paper feed belt Note the path of the belt to aid installation Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 450 Figure 187 Paper Feed Belt Tension Lever Screws Viewed From Right Side Replacement 1 Follow the removal steps in reverse order Attention Ensure that
42. Removals and Adjustments 337 Paper Bail Upper Plastic Shield Lower Plastic Shield Figure 92 Plastic Shields Viewed From Top 10 Return to the step that sent you here Print Quality Checks Fanfold Forms Printout 1 Print the T amp D14 fanfold aa test on 14 x 11 in white fanfold forms and using a new ribbon 2 f you are here die io problems with multiple part forms use the problem forms to print this print test 3 Use the information in to analyze the printout in Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 338 Table 49 Print Quality Tests and Actions Fanfold Line Description Action if failure 1 Skew test in draft mode The line should print parallel to the edge of paper The upper right corner may be patching in printhead mask 2 Skew test in NLQ mode The line should print parallel to the leading edge of paper Logic and microcode data Printhead wire test The 18 wire printhead Models A00 001 and 003 print wires are numbered 01A 09A and 01B 09B see The 9 wire printhead Model 002 print wires are numbered 01 09 see ES 94 an page 343 The wire numbers are printed under each group Look for light or missing dots The 18 wire printhead xxB line segments see eme amaro mro pe dentes lower than the xxA line segments Print the T amp D14 fanfold print test after completing each of the following steps Check the printhead
43. Repair as needed See Tractor Assembly Service Check If there is a second tractor it may be swapped for diagnostics The tractor assembly can be used for front push or for rear push and rear pull configurations To do this a drive gear in the tractor assembly is placed in one of two positions by a motor It is not necessary to remove the tractor end cover The next figure shows a tractor assembly installed in the front push position with the gear in the drive position The tractor assembly idler gear is not used in the front push position The printer front tractor drive gear is driven by the paper feed motor through a drive belt Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 325 Printer Front Tractor Drive Gear FP eee idit Gear d in Drive Gear In Drive l Position For Front Installation 3 DT Motor Figure 79 Tractor In Drive Position Front Tractor shown installed in front position with drive gear engaged right end cover removed for clarity Figure 80 an page 327 shows the drive gear in standby The tractor assembly is put in standby when paper is being fed from a rear tractor manual sheet feed or the automatic sheet feeder Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 326 Printer Front Tractor Drive Gear m Idler Gear
44. Replace the cable if indicated 6 If the cable is OK replace the printhead Chapter 2 Diagnostics 172 Running T amp D12 e Press the Micro key to run the test e Press the Micro key to skip the test Press the Load Form key to end the test If T amp D11 Sensor Tuning was not completed before beginning T amp D12 the following message displays PINCH XXXXX Where XXXXX OPEN or CLOSED SS PATH FF 1 Ensure the paper bail and a ribbon cartridge are installed 2 Mount 20 Ib 80 g m paper into the front tractor FF or manual sheet feed tray SS 3 Press the Load Form key to select FF or Press the Micro key to select SS 4 The printer will now load the paper and perform the AFTA operation The following 2 messages display sequentially AFTA X YES lt STORE gt NO Verifying AFTA Calibration Using T amp D12 To verify the calibration 1 Set the operator menu to AFTA 0 2 Load a single sheet of paper into the print area Note the wheel position Chapter 2 Diagnostics 173 Park the paper Set the operator menu to FIXED 1 Load a single sheet of paper into the print area Note the wheel position The wheel position should be the same for AFTA 0 and FIXED 1 within 0 25 The wheel should be pointing to 1 0 25 Verify printer operation by printing T amp D14 on single part forms using a good ribbon The print should appear dark T amp D13 Not Us
45. T amp D16 Bidirectional Adjustment Test STORE YES NO 8 If the bidirectional adjustment printout is correct press the Line Feed key to store the value 9 If the bidirectional adjustment printout is not correct press the Start key to view the next display T amp D16 Bidirectional Adjustment Test VERT ADJ 0 RUN 10 Press the Line Feed key once to shift thels to the left or the Start key to shift the Is to the right The value changes on the operator panel display 11 Press the Form Feed key to run the test 12 Go to T amp D16 step Z and repeat until the line of Is is centered in the line of Hs 13 lf an error a is displayed go to FT amp D ges and A 14 The test completed successfully if the display advances to the next test number T amp D17 Tear Off Line Adjustment Test This test allows you to adjust the tear off position from the operator panel The value set by this test becomes the tear off position when the configuration menu item Tear Adjustment is set to O at the operator panel 1 Display T amp D17 Tear Off Line Adjustment Test RUN TEST YES END NO 2 Press the Line Feed key If the following displays go to T amp D17 Tear Off Line Adjustment Test STORED PINCH XXXXX PRESS A KEY Chapter 2 Diagnostics 218 Return here after the sensors are tuned Continue with the next step when the printer displays T amp D17 Tear Off Line Adjustment
46. Table 34 Carriage Motor Resistance Pins Resistance Temperature 1 and 2 0 44 0 02 Ohm 25 C 77 F 4 5 3 and 4 0 44 0 02 Ohm 25 77 F 4 5 Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams 247 af 4 a aj 1 0000 VIEW FROM WIRING SIDE ti Ao N Figure 27 Carriage Motor Wiring Paper Feed Motor Wiring The paper feed motor is a stepper motor with a 1 8 step angle The motor connects directly to the logic board RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams 248 Note Allow the paper feed motor to cool before taking resistance measurements Table 35 Paper Feed Motor Resistance Pins Resistance Temperature 1 and 2 2 4 Ohm 10 25 C 77 F 3 and 4 2 4 Ohm 10 25 C 77 F Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams 249 Jol 4 ff o LI 5 E n a wf VIEW FROM WIRING SIDE Figure 28 Paper Feed Motor Wiring AFTA Motor Wiring The AFTA motor is a stepper motor with a 3 6 step angle The motor connects directly to the logic board RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams 250 Note Allow the AFTA motor to cool before taking resistance measurements Table 36 AFTA Motor Resistance Pins Resistan
47. Unidirectional Perforation Safety Disabled Jam Sensors Enabled Printer Adjustments Front AFTA o Front Tear Position o Front Left Margin Alignment 10 Front Paper Load Position o Rear AFTA o Rear Tear Position o Rear Left Margin Alignment io Rear Paper Load Position o ASF Bin 1 AFTA Q ASF Bin i Left Margin Alignment 10 ASF Bin 1 Paper Load Position 0 3GF Bin Z AFTA o ASF Bin Z Left Margin Alignment 10 ASF Bin Z Paper Load Position o ASF Bin 3 AFTA o ASF Bin 3 Left Margin Alignment 10 ASF Bin 3 Paper Load Position o Manual Feed AFTA o Manual Feed Left Margin Alignment io Manual Feed Paper Load Position o 000 English 0000000 0000000000000000 E90AX004 Figure 197 Coax Configuration Printout Part 2 of 2 Twinax Configuration Printout Sample Defaults Note This information applies only to 4247 Models 001 and 002 with Twinax attachment Appendix A Printer Configuration 502 Figure 198 and Figure 199 on page 04 show the factory default settings Printer Configuration Configuration Storage Poweren Custom Set Power On Paper Source Attachment Attachment Rear Tractor Use Rear Tractor Use Twinax Configuration Characters Per Inch Lines Per Inch Maximum Print Position Maximum Page Length Print Quality Print Language Printer Address Emulation Mode Alarm Control Override Host Paper Source Parallel Configuration C ters Per Inch n Per freh imum Print Position imum Page Length Emulation Mo
48. and is described in Line 4 and Line 11 of Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 290 Line 4 If any of the needles are not functioning or if the xxB line segments are not lower than the xxA line segments replace the printhead Line 11 If you notice ink smearing on a printout such as with T amp D14 Line 11 replace the printhead Note You cannot correct these conditions by changing the AFTA print gap 86 then the Print Darkness Check This procedure creates print samples at various increased gap settings to disclose if the character darkness is correct If the print darkness is not correct you will use T amp D12 to adjust the print gap and correct for character darkness 1 Ensure you have a new or nearly new ribbon cartridge loaded in the printer 2 With printer power on load white single part 20 Ib 80 g m paper 3 Save for later use in Analyzing Samples All Models any print samples you create during any of the following steps Creating Samples Model A00 1 Press the Menu key and then Micro until you see ADJUSTMENTS Press the Pitch key until you see FIXED AFTA 1 Press the Menu key and then press Pitch to get STORE CURRENT Press the Menu key again to exit and save 2 To print a sample at FIXED AFTA 1 press the Menu key until you see PRINT OUT NO Press the Pitch key to change to PRINT OUT YES and the sample will begin printing Identify this sample as Sample 1 3 Press the Menu key and then Micro
49. as needed inch rollers up and down P P Run T amp D 11 to perform a correct Check the parts at the left end of the platen The calibration of the rear path bellcrank must be positioned between the gear and the sensor washer See ste bs on page 12d P Run T amp D in automatic test mode Is the bellcrank installed correctly and functioning to verify correct printer operation correctly For Mode A00 see iow o Rur 15 Run T amp D 14 to find out the microcode levels in the Go to step I7 on page 112 Install the newest level printer The controller code levels must be at least at the levels indicated to have the latest path switch algorithms AO00 3 01 001 4 00 002 3 00 003 N A Is the code level at or above these minimums microcode Be sure you follow the directions in the Microcode Installation Instruction so that the user s configuration is not lost Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 111 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 16 Power off O the printer If the rear paper door does not stay open remove the door from the printer Remove the rear tractor from the printer To configure the tractor for rear push mode Place the tractor face down on a flat surface with the electrical connector tab on the right side pointing toward you Pull the bottom release levers toward you with your finger tips and push the movable edge of the tractor down to
50. c amp 5 mr 3 i Figure 12 Operator Panel Key Press Sequence If a key is not pressed in approximately 10 seconds an error message will display If a timeout error message occurs press the Micro key twice to repeat T amp DO05 6 Continue to press the keys as each request is dispia ed 7 f an error message is displayed go to T amp 8 The test completed successfully if the display dua to the next test number T amp DO06 Parallel Attachment Test Note The parallel loop back connector needs to be installed for this test If the loop back connector is not installed an error message will be displayed To bypass this message press the Micro 4 key twice to advance to the next test Display T amp D 06 USER If an error message is displayed go to 90 The test completed successfully if the display advances to the next m number T amp DO07 Not Used Press the Micro 4 key to bypass this message Chapter 2 Diagnostics 166 T amp DOS8 Microcode Test Display T amp D 08 USER If an error message is displayed go to 1 amp successfully if the display advances to the next test number T amp DO9 Serial Attachment Test The serial loop back connector needs to be installed for this test There are 2 serial loop back connectors The RS 232 connector is installed first When prompted by the display remove the RS 232 connect
51. defaults 500 power on configuration menu chart 485 power on configuration printout defaults 485 561 configuration continued program configuration menu chart 492 program configuration printout defaults 492 twinax attachment configuration menu chart 517 twinax configuration printout defaults 502 unlocking and locking printer configuration menu 499 Configuration Information Model A00 485 Configuration Information Models 001 002 and 003 499 Configuration Menus 484 Configuring the Printer 484 connector attachment 262 locations 271 Connectors 158 cooling fans carriage motor 416 power supply 401 cords power 481 covers remove install 347 439 service position 275 D Defining the Problem 20 Diagnosing Problems 20 Diagnostics 160 Diagnostics Model AOO 160 Diagnostics Models 001 002 and 003 197 E electric safety 13 EMI Filter remove install 377 Environmental Considerations 531 environmental requirements 546 error logs 198 error messages START MAP 23 T amp D Error Messages and Actions Model AOO 190 T amp D Error Messages and Actions Models 001 and 002 231 Error Messages Model A00 133 Error Messages Models 001 002 003 136 extractor microcode module selection 482 usage 374 382 F fanfold form printout about 338 Fanfold Form Printout Test T amp D14 Model A00 174 Fanfold Form Printout Test T amp D14 Models 001 and 002 214 fans cooling carriage motor 416 power supply 401 firmware P
52. ensure the plastic strip points down 4 Insert the left and right paper bail end caps and pivot the paper bail down into the side frames Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 424 Paper Bail Assembly Plastic Strip Figure 159 Installing Paper Bail While Noting Position of End Cap 5 Rotate the paper bail toward the back of the printer closing it as far as it will go A cent bail without tabs on the end caps must be installed in the closed position See Figure 157 onl 6 Reinstall the ribbon cartridge Manual Sheet Feed Tray Removal 1 Remove the printer covers See PPrinte 2 Loosen the right side screw and rotate the stop 3 Slide the tray assembly to the left to remove Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 425 Single Sheet Feed Tray Figure 160 Manual Sheet Feed Tray Replacement Follow the removal steps in reverse order Upper Feed Roller Shaft Assembly Removal 1 Put the covers in the service position See 2 Remove the paper bail assembly See EP 3 Move the Push Pull Selector down push mode Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 426 Push Pull Selector Figure 161 Push Pull Selector Viewed From Left Side 4 Remove the retaining clip from the left side of the feed roller shaft Upper Feed NS Roller Shaft Assembly Platen Figure 162 Upper Feed Roller Shaft Retaining Clip Viewed From Top Left
53. 003 9 9A 11 11A Coax ensues 18 Twinax 18A Twinax Model 002 15B 7 11 11A Coax 10 10A 12 12A Twinax 19 42a quinay ds Ms Twinak Model 001 e90apc10 9 Coax 196 10 Twinax Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 477 Assembly 8 continued Asm Part Index Number Units Description 8 4 63H6206 1 Board Logic 4247 A00 Level 4 6 90H0026 1 Board Logic 4247 002 Level 2 7 63H6208 1 Board Logic 4247 001 Level 3 8 38L 1210 1 Module Microcode 4247 A00 compatible with both A00 early and late levels 9 24H7734 1 Module Microcode 4247 001 Coax SCS 9A 24H7735 1 Module Microcode 4247 001 Coax IPDS 10 24H7732 1 Module Microcode 4247 001 Twinax SCS 10A 24H7733 1 Module Microcode 4247 001 Twinax IPDS 11 24H7754 1 Module Microcode 4247 002 Coax SCS 11A 24H7755 1 Module Microcode 4247 002 Coax IPDS 12 24H7752 1 Module Microcode 4247 002 Twinax SCS 12A 24H7753 1 Module Microcode 4247 002 Twinax IPDS 13 38L 1606 1 Card Attachment 4247 001 002 Coax SCS 13A 02N6102 1 Card Attachment 4247 001 002 Coax IPDS 14 38L 1605 1 Card Attachment 4247 001 002 Twinax SCS 14A 02N6101 1 Card Attachment 4247 001 002 Twinax IPDS 15A 1 Module Microcode U57 Model A00 15B 1 Module Microcode U57 Model 002 15C 1 Module Microcode U57 Model 001 16 365523 AR Extractor Microcode Module For 4247 A00 with level 1 logic boards
54. 15A 462 08H7093 2 9 464 01P7536 1 15B 462 08H7094 2 4 464 01P7574 8 18 478 08H7104 1 9A 461 01P7575 8 18A 478 08H7246 9 12 480 01P7576 8 19 478 08H7247 9 3 479 01P7577 8 19A 478 08H7248 6 24 474 01P7578 8 20 478 08H7248 9 4 479 01P7579 8 21 478 08H7249 9 1 479 01P7580 7 13 476 08H7250 6 25 474 01P7581 8 17 478 08H7250 9 2 479 01P7584 7 25 476 08H7251 4 19 468 01P7585 7 26 476 08H7251 9 5 479 01P7621 7 27 476 08H7252 7 3 476 01P7682 1 15C 462 08H7252 9 11 480 01P7683 3 7 465 08H7253 9 17 480 02N6101 8 14A 478 08H7257 7 13 476 02N6102 8 13A 478 08H7258 7 4 476 02N7006 6 13 474 08H7258 9 10 480 02N7555 10 23 481 08H7259 10 26 482 08H6952 2 5 464 08H7261 7 19 476 08H6955 2 3 463 08H7262 7 7 476 08H6999 1 9A 461 08H7264 7 1 476 08H7004 1 9A 461 08H7265 7 5 476 08H7014 1 9A 461 08H7267 9 1A 479 08H7019 1 9A 461 08H7268 10 25 482 08H7024 1 9A 461 08H7269 10 27 482 08H7029 1 9A 461 08H7270 10 28 482 Copyright IBM Corp 1995 2001 557 Part Asm Part Asm Number Index Page Number Index Page 08H7271 10 29 482 08H7320 6 9 474 08H7272 3 7 465 08H7320 9 9 480 08H7273 3 8 465 08H7324 6 16 474 08H7276 3 9 466 08H7324 9 8 479 08H7277 4 6 468 08H7325 6 19 474 08H7279 4 10 468 08H7326 6 20 474 08H7284 4 26 468 08H7328 6 21 474 08H7285 4 27 468 08H7329 6 3 474 08H7287 4 29 468 08H7330 5 50 472 08H7288 4 33 468 08H7337 1 3 461 08H7289 4 35 469 08H7338 1 7 461 08H7289 9 7 479 08H7339 1 14 462 08H7290 4 46 469 08H7343
55. 33 connectors parallel attachment 262 serial attachment 262 MAP 33 remove install parallel attachment 370 378 serial attachment card 390 attachment Models 001 and 002 about 41 O Copyright IBM Corp 1995 2001 attachment Models 001 and 002 continued attachment card microcode module location 269 identification coax attachment card 54 twinax attachment card 54 MAP 41 remove install coax attachment card 392 twinax attachment card 396 attachment network print server NPS MAP 59 Attachment Card Guide Assembly Removal amp Installation 364 Attachment Cards Model 003 Removal amp Installation 359 Base Code Compatibilities 157 belt Carriage drive adjustment 280 remove install 420 service check 279 paper feed drive adjustment 281 remove install 448 upper feed roller drive remove install 426 bidirectional printing adjustment about 294 bidirectional printing adjustment continued Bidirectional Adjustment Test T amp D16 Model AOO 178 Bidirectional Adjustment Test T amp D16 Models 001 and 002 217 C cable power 481 cable diagrams 258 carriage drive belt adjustment 280 remove install 420 service check 279 Carriage motor remove install 415 wiring 246 catalog parts 457 Circuit Diagrams 240 configuration changing a value in the power on configuration menu 486 changing a value in the printer configuration menu 504 changing a value in the program configuration menu 493 coax configuration printout
56. 4247 Printer Model AOO Quick Reference Guide SA24 4405 This guide shows the key functions of the Model A00 printer and the available configuration values and the process for setting them This book is shipped with the cdd Most of the information contained in this publication is located in k Models 001 and 002 Publications The following publications provide information on the Models 001 and 002 IBM 4247 Printer Models 001 002 User s Guide SA24 4408 This guide describes the operating procedures for Models 001 and 002 of the 4247 Printer It contains information on setup operating the printer maintaining the printer error recovery and programming information This document is shipped with Models 001 and 002 of the printer Printers with controller microcode version of 3 04 or higher for the Model 001 and 2 04 or higher for the Model 002 are shipped with a copy of the 4247 Printer Model 001 002 User s Guide Addendum no form number IBM 4247 Printer Models 001 002 with Twinaxial Attachment Quick Reference Guide SA24 4411 This guide shows the key functions of the Models 001 and 002 and the available configuration values and the process for setting them This reference is shipped with Models 001 and 002 of the printer Most of the information contained in this publication is located in Appendix A Copyright IBM Corp 1995 2001 17 IBM 4247 Printer Models 001 002 with Coaxial Attachment Quick Reference Guide SA24 4409 This gu
57. 8 10 478 63H6069 2 1 463 24H7733 8 10A 478 63H6205 5 14 471 24H7734 8 9 478 63H6206 8 4 478 24H7735 8 9A 478 63H6208 8 7 478 24H7752 8 12 478 63H6245 7 6 476 24H7753 8 12A 478 63H6272 4 28 468 24H7754 8 11 478 63H6274 5 18 471 24H7755 8 11A 478 63H6349 9 13 480 27P8217 8 478 63H6375 3 10 466 27P8218 8 478 63H6920 1 10A 461 27P9654 10 481 63H6921 1 10A 461 36L8880 10 11 481 63H6922 1 10A 461 38F8254 10 32 482 63H6923 1 10A 461 38L1210 8 8 478 63H6924 1 10A 461 Part Number Index 559 Part Asm Number Index Page 63H6925 1 10A 461 63H6926 1 10A 461 63H6927 1 10A 462 63H6928 1 10A 462 63H6929 1 10A 462 63H6930 1 10A 462 63H6934 1 10B 462 63H6984 1 10B 462 63H6985 1 10B 462 63H6986 1 10B 462 63H6987 1 10B 462 63H6988 1 10B 462 63H6989 1 10B 462 Part Asm Number Index Page 63H6990 1 10B 462 63H6991 1 10B 462 63H6992 1 10B 462 63H6993 1 10B 462 6952300 10 8 481 6952301 10 9 481 6952338 10 13 481 365523 10 30 482 7435523 8 16 478 90H0024 9 12 480 90H0025 9 3 479 90H0026 8 6 478 Part Number Index 560 Index A adjustments AFTA 282 bidirectional printing 294 carriage drive belt tension 280 Carriage support shaft 280 first line printing 294 listing of 279 paper feed drive belt tension 281 sensor 208 296 tear off line 295 Adjustments 275 279 AFTA adjustment 282 calibration 282 motor wiring 250 remove install 407 service check 286 ASF MAP 26 service check 319 attachment Model A00 about
58. A00 Also order item 9A 9A 1 OVERLAYS 9A 08H6999 1 English 9A 08H7004 1 Spanish 9A 63H6068 1 French 9A 08H7014 1 Italian 9A 08H7019 1 German 9A 08H7024 1 Dutch 9A 08H7029 1 Portuguese 9A 08H7104 1 Danish 10 24H7580 1 Panel Operator 4247 Models 001 002 and 003 Also order item 10A or 10B 10A 1 OVERLAYS With Coax Attachment Models 001 002 and 003 with LAN feature or Parallel only Model 003 10A 63H6920 1 English 10A 63H6921 1 Spanish 10A 63H6922 1 French 10A 63H6923 1 Italian 10A 63H6924 1 German 10A 63H6925 1 Dutch 10A 63H6926 1 Portuguese Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 461 Assembly 1 continued Asm Part Index Number WUhnits Description 10A 63H6927 1 Danish 10A 63H6928 1 Norwegian 10A 63H6929 1 Swedish 10A 63H6930 1 Finnish 10B 1 OVERLAYS With Twinax Attachment Models 001 002 and 003 10B 63H6984 1 English 10B 63H6985 1 Spanish 10B 63H6986 1 French 10B 63H6987 1 Italian 10B 63H6988 1 German 10B 63H6989 1 Dutch 10B 63H6990 1 Portuguese 10B 63H6991 1 Danish 10B 63H6992 1 Norwegian 10B 63H6993 1 Swedish 10B 63H6934 1 Finnish 11 63H6021 1 Cover Front Tractor 12 08H7348 1 Hinge Left Acoustic Cover Packaged 5 Per Pack 13 63H6009 1 Cover Acoustic 13A 63H6065 1 Kit Acoustic
59. C 80 F With Automatic Sheet Feeder Environment Requirement Temperature range 10 to 43 C 50 to 109 F Relative humidity range 8 to 80 Maximum wet bulb temperature 26 7 C 80 F Shipping Environment The following table shows the shipping environment requirements for the printer Environment Requirement Temperature range 40 to 60 C 40 to 140 F Relative humidity range 5 to 100 including condensation excluding rain Maximum wet bulb temperature 30 C 86 F Appendix B Supplies Forms Paths amp Environmental Considerations 547 Storage Environment The following table shows the storage environment requirements for the printer Environment Requirement Temperature range 0 to 60 C 32 to 140 F Relative humidity range 5 to 80 Maximum wet bulb temperature 30 C 86 F Note Ribbon performance and print quality may degrade when exposed to temperatures in excess of 41 C 105 F for an extended period of time Appendix B Supplies Forms Paths amp Environmental Considerations 548 Appendix C Flashing the Memory of the Model 003 Flashing the Memory of the Model 003 It is sometimes necessary to update or flash the Model 003 s memory This can be achieved by downloading the microcode from the IBM First Service System Il database on to your computers C drive The code can then be copied to a diskett
60. Cut Sheet Front Push Rear Pull Push Pull Rear Push Manual Feed Dimensions Width 76 2 to 431 8 mm 76 2 to 431 8 mm 114 3 to 444 5 mm 3 to 17 in 3 to 17 in 4 5 to 17 5 in Note 8 Length 76 2 to 609 6 mm 76 2 to 609 6 mm 101 6 to 609 6 mm 3 to 24 in 3 to 24 in 4 to 24 in Note 8 Single Part Weight 55 to 150 g m 55 to 80 g m 50 to 120 g m 15 to 40 Ib 15 to 21 Ib 13 3 to 32 Ib Thickness minimum 0 08 mm 0 08 mm 0 08 mm 0 003 in 0 003 in 0 003 in Appendix B Supplies Forms Paths amp Environmental Considerations 535 Table 108 Forms and Paper Specifications continued Paper Criteria Characteristics Forms Paths Continuous Forms Cut Sheet Front Push Rear Pull Push Pull Rear Push Manual Feed Multiple Part Maximum parts Original Copies uo 7 4 1 3 8 1 7 Overall Thickness 0 08 to 0 635 mm 0 003 to 0 025 in 0 08 to 0 35 mm 0 003 to 0 014 in 0 08 to 0 635 mm 0 003 to 0 025 in Weight of top part 55 to 150 g m 55 to 80 g m 55 to 150 g m 15 to 40 Ib 15 to 21 Ib 15 to 40 Ib Attached sheet individual 45 to 75 g m 45 to 75 g m 45 to 75 g m weight 12 to 20 Ib 12 to 20 Ib 12 to 20 Ib Carbon paper individual 14 to 35 g m 14 to 35 g m 14 to 35 g m weight 4 to 9 Ib 4 9 Ib 4 to 9 Ib See these notes for each forms path 1 2 3 5 6 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 Appe
61. D36 Adapter Board BCP Test This test checks the attachment card Biphase Communications Processor BCP Display T amp D36 Adapter Board BCP Test RUN TEST YES END NO Note The message TEST RUNNING will display during the test If an error message is displayed go to The test completed successfully if the display advances to the next test number T amp D37 Adapter Board Digital Test This test checks the attachment card Biphase Communications Processor BCP digital interfaces Chapter 2 Diagnostics 229 Display T amp D37 Adapter Board Digital Test RUN TEST YES END NO Note The message TEST RUNNING will display during the test If an error message is displayed go to 1 amp The test completed successfully if the display advances to the next test number T amp D38 Adapter Board Analog Test This test checks the attachment card Biphase Communications Processor BCP analog interfaces Note To avoid false errors the twinax interface must have the self terminating cable PN 38F8254 connected The coax interface must be disconnected from the attachment card 1 Display T amp D38 Adapter Board Analog Test RUN TEST YES END NO Note The message TEST RUNNING will display during the test 2 f an error message is displayed go to T6 The test completed successfully if the display advances to the end of diagnostics message Display 3 Power off O the
62. EABCDEP GHI JKLANOP GRS TUVRXYZC VI abcdafghijklancparatuvexyz 012 189487 06 7 70123456789 C T0 6BCDEF GHI JRLHNOPGRSTUNWY Y2C _ abcoef qhi j amp lnnapqrstuvexyz 0 18 abcdefghijklmnopgrstuvwxyz 4 X amp 012 1I B X amp 25 0128456789 c 2T8NBCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ M gi p i MCI IE Ue Cee Lee Le LEE EES CO pr ars HIR arene en ee Ren eg een eee ea Nee ee ia s BLA HHHHHHHHHHHEHHHHHHHEHBHHEHHHHBHHHH dHH HHHHPBHHBHHHHHHHH HHHHHHHHEEBBHCEHHHHHHHHHHHHHHEHHHEHHHHHHEEFHHE HEHHHHH HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHBHHHHEHEHHEEHEHEHE HHHH He HHHHHH HHHHBHEHHHEHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHEHHHEHHHHHEEHEHEHHHHH HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHEHHHHHHEHEHEHIHEHEHEHEHEHEHEHHHH HHHHHEHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHEHHHHEHEHHHHHHHEHHBHEHHH HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHEHEHHHEHPHEHEHEHEHHHH HHHHHHHHHPBHHHHEHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHEHEHEH HHHHHHHHHHHHEHHEHHHHHHHEHHCHHHHEHEHEHBHEHEHE HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHEHHHHHHHEHHH HHHHHHHUHHHHHHHHHHHHEHHHHHHBHHHHMWHHHHHIHHHHH HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHFEHFHEH HHHHHHHEHHHHVHHHHMH HHHHHHHHHHHBHERHHHHHHHHHHEHH HHHHHEHHHHHHHEHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHEFEHHHHHHHHEHEHHH HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHEHHHP HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHEHH HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHEHHHHHBHEHHHHHHHEEHHHEHETM HHHHHHHETRBA IE TE iE HIHA RH HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHEH HH HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHEHHHHHHHHHEHHHHHHHHHEHHCHHHHHEHHH HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHEHHHHPHHPHHHHHHHHCHHBHHHHHHHEHHHH oL eL gt EEEEEE du PP Pea Pene Hoa fs ee Du PAZ ey RUP Do Re fuf nus Neh I De Pe
63. In this mode the printhead will print NLQ by using 18 wires This is done by shifting one set of 9 wires 1B to 9B up relative to the fixed set of wires 1A to 9A and making one pass per line 2 To select this mode press the Line Feed key the display will advance to the next test 3 To select the next printing mode press the Start key The following message will display T amp D20 NLQ Printhead Mode Test NLQ 9 BIDIR YES NO 4 n this mode the printhead will print NLQ by using 9 wires and two passes per line in bidirectional mode 5 To select this mode press the Line Feed key the display will advance to the next test 6 To select the next printing mode press the Start key The following message will display T amp D20 NLQ Printhead Mode Test NLQ 9 UNIDIR YES NO 7 n this mode the printhead will print NLQ by using 9 wires and two passes per line in one direction 8 To select this mode press the Line Feed key the display will advance to the next test 9 f an error message is displayed go to T4 Chapter 2 Diagnostics 223 10 The test completed successfully if the display advances to the next test number T amp D21 Paper Path Sensor Test This test routine was added to the Test and Diagnostics beginning with the following microcode release levels e Model 001 coax controller code release level 3 06 Model 001 twinax controller code release level 3 04 e Model 002 either attachment contro
64. Manual Load Manual Feed Eject Mode Bar Code Print Direction Enabled Disabled Top of Form Automatic Top of Form Bidirectional Unidirectional Graphics Print Direction Perforation Safety Jam Sensors Bidirectional Unidirectional Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled PRINTER ADJUSTMENT Table 99 Printer Adjustment Front AFTA Front Tear Position Front Left Margin Alignment 0 5 to 3 0 id 10 Fixed 1 to 8 312 to 24 0 to 60 Front Paper Load Position Rear AFTA Rear Tear Position 0 24 to 288 0 0 5 to 3 312 to 24 Fixed 1 to 8 Rear Left Margin Alignment Rear Paper Load Position ASF Bin 1 AFTA Appendix A Printer Configuration 524 Table 99 Printer Adjustment continued 10 0 to 60 0 24 to 288 0 5 to 3 Fixed 1 to 8 ASF Bin 1 Left Margin Alignment 10 0 to 60 ASF Bin 1 Paper Load Position 0 24 to 576 ASF Bin 2 AFTA 0 5 to 3 Fixed 1 to 8 ASF Bin 2 Left Margin Alignment ASF Bin 2 Paper Load Position ASF Bin 3 AFTA 10 0 to 60 0 24 to 576 0 5 to 3 Fixed 1 to 8 ASF Bin 3 Left Margin Alignment ASF Bin 3 Paper Load Position Manual Feed AFTA 10 0 to 60 0 24 to 576 0 5 to 3 Fixed 1 to 8 Manual Feed Left Margin Alignment Manual Feed Paper Load Position 10 0 to 60 0 24 to 576 A
65. Microcode Error For Model 003 see H agid Replace the logic board See and 00 Dag 8 For Model 003 see ELagid TD 10 FRU 0 1 ASF Stacker 1 Failure 2 TD 12 FRUO X AFTA Failure 1 See Standard AFTA Senice Check 2nd TD 14 FRU 0 20 Thermal Sense Failure 3 install new printhead cables Chapter 2 Diagnostics 232 Table 28 T amp D Error Messages and Actions continued Error Message Description Action TD 19 FRU 1 X Operator Panel Failure 1 This error can occur if the cover is not opened or closed in less than 10 seconds Run T amp D19 again to verify the problem 2 TD FRU 3 11 Paper Sense 1 Failure 2 a Dag 3 Run T amp D 1 to verify sensor EO UD f a sensor is not operational a Replace the logic board See b TD FRU 3 12 Ribbon Sense 1 Replace the ribbon drive motor See l Ribbon Drivel Failure Matar an page 403 2 Replace the logic board See 3 TD FRU313 Printhead Home 1 Sense Failure 2 3 mE the sensor cable assembly See oe Sansal Chapter 2 Diagnostics 233 Table 28 T amp D Error Messages and Actions continued Error Message Description Action TD FRU 3 14 AFTA Failure 1 2 3 TD FRU 3 15 AFTA Failure ig 2 3 TD FRU 3 16 Front Tractor Sense Failure TD FRU 3 17 Rear Tractor Sense Failure 4 R
66. Model 002 The vvv is a 3 digit number that indicates the module code version number Return to step 114 on page 44 Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 58 MAP 0122 Network Print Server Attachment Symptom Explanation Suspected FRUs Causes Network Print Server NPS Communication failures Host and print server configuration Network print server Logic board includes parallel attachment LAN cable Note For NPS 540 part number 30H4054 units attached to 4247 printers without an external power supply the printer powers the unit through 5 V dc on pin of the printer parallel attachment connector NPS device part numbers 30H4082 30H4083 30H4055 cannot be powered by the printer and require an external 12 V ac power supply There is no danger of damaging any NPS or other computer devices attached to the 4247 when there is 5 V dc on the printer parallel interface pin 18 Powering the NPS with the external power supply and by 5 V dc on the parallel connector at the same time will not damage the NPS or printer logic board Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 59 AX DANGER To prevent serious personal injury from electrical shock when connecting or disconnecting the interface cable set the printer power switch to O Off and unplug the power cable An DANGER Do not connect or disconnect any communication port teleport attachment connector or power cord during an electrical sto
67. Movement continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 4 Disconnect the paper feed motor connector from the logic board See ood to measure the resistance of the motor windings Is the measurement correct for both windings Install a new logic board For Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation or Mode A00 see How Tal For Me 001 002 or 003 see Medes 001 002 gr OS Install a new paper drive motor automatic mode to verify correct ni printer operation For Model A00 see Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 65 MAP 0131 Paper Path Sensor Symptom Explanation Suspected FRUs Causes 01 END OF FORMS Paper sensor failure 001 END OF FORMS 11 LOAD BIN 1 2 or 3 Logic board 011 CHECK LOAD BIN 1 2 or 3 031 END OF FORMS TIMEOUT Sensor cable assembly Table 9 MAP 0131 Paper Path Sensor Step Questions Actions Yes No 1 Try to load forms from the failing forms path Go to step bl You are in the T MAP Return to Does the form load and is it visible between the printhead and the platen 2 Are you trying to load black back forms Go to step B Go to step A on page 67 5 Black back forms will not work in all forms paths and Black back forms will not work Go to step A on page 67 can cause false forms path sensor errors in the front push rear pull or ush pull forms paths Are you trying to lo
68. O Off 1 Put the covers in the service position See 2 Remove the following Power supply cover Power connector screw and clamp Note The clamp is not used on later machines Instead the screw fastens an extended tab on the power supply cover Main power switch from the base frame Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 400 Note Note position of switch down is off and up is on to aid installation Green yellow wire screw Fan connectors e Fan support Logic board connector Main Power Switch Logic Board Connector Connector Screw and Clamp artiage Board Fan MotorFan Connector Connector Figure 131 Power Supply 3 Remove the power supply mounting screws Note the type and location of each screw to aid installation Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 401 A Threaded Screw B Self tapping Screw Figure 132 Power Supply Screws 4 Lift the rear of the board and pull to remove Replacement Follow the removal steps in reverse order Note When installing the green yellow ground wire the second star washer must be located between the wire lug and the frame Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 402 Ribbon Drive Motor AN CAUTION The ribbon motor may be hot Wait for it to cool down deno Remove the printer covers See Printer Covers on page 347 Remove the ribbon See Ribbon on page 3 Disconnect
69. Paper Bail Metal Deflector Front Push Open Closed Manual Sheet Feed Open Closed Rear Push Open Closed ASF Open Closed Rear Pull Closed Removed Front Push Pull Closed Closed 4 The rear tractor push pull selector must be set correctly Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 303 Notice the push pull selector next to the gears on the left side of the printer Figure 58 Push Pull Selector Check the rear tractor push pull selector setting For push paths ensure that the push pull selector is completely growl et down and to the rear so that the upper and lower gears on the selector are positioned as shown in Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 304 Paths S H Push C 4 Figure 59 Push Pull Selector Set for Rear Push Path e90am196 OF For pull paths ensure that the push pull selector is completely pulled up and to the front so that the upper and lower gears on the selector are positioned as shown in Figure 60 on page 304 Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 305 Pull Paths e90am194 Figure 60 Push Pull Selector Set for Rear Pull Path 5 Inspect the following parts for wear damage or binds Hand cycle the paper feed mechanism Install new parts as needed Note Use one of the following methods to hand cycle the har
70. See Front Push Path Page Bid Rear Pull Path Page R11l Front Push Pull Path Page B13 Rear Push Path Page B15 Manual Sheet Path Page B17 ASF Page Bid ASF Stacker Page 22 Front Push Path Check Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 310 1 Locate and remove from the forms path torn pieces of paper or other foreign material that can cause forms jams 2 Inspect the following parts for wear damage or binds Use knob PN 08H7271 if available to hand cycle the paper feed mechanism to observe the parts The knob installs on the left end of the platen shaft Install new parts as needed Front tractor drive gear Tractors and feed pins Paper bail 3 Ensure that the metal forms guide deflector is in the open down position See 4 Ensure that the PET bail is in the lower detented position touching the upper feed roller assembly See 5 Use a lint free cloth to clean the jam sensor which is located on the tractor assembly e90aff1 Figure 65 Front Push Path Viewed From Left Side 6 Return to the step that sent you here Rear Pull Path Check Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 311 1 Locate and remove from the forms path torn pieces of paper or other foreign material that can cause forms jams 2 Ensure the rear tractor paper door is open or removed 3 Ensure that the paper bail is removed See Roller NC S N Tractor a vr Assembly MN Upper NS Feed Platen
71. Shaft Pinch Packaged 5 Per Pack b1 24H7729 1 Shield Lower Plastic Replaceable For use with 24H7730 Asm Index 4 7 51A 08H7355 2 Screw M3x4 Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 469 Assembly 5 Mechanical Assembly Il 20 Tag Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 470 Assembly 5 continued Asm Part Index Number Units Description 5 1 NP Mechanical Assembly 2 1 Clip Retaining PP 63H6001 3 08H7299 1 Bellcrank 4 08H7354 1 e Mask and Adhesive Printhead 5 1 Spring PP 08H7351 6 08H7300 1 Gear Packaged 10 Per Pack 7 1 Spacer PP 63H6001 8 08H7301 1 Gear Front Tractor Idler Packaged 10 Per Pack 9 1 Clip Retaining PP 63H6001 10 08H7311 1 Lever Paper Feed Belt Tension 11 08H7302 1 Idler Packaged 5 Per Pack 12 1 Clip Retaining PP 63H6001 13 2 Screw M4x6 PP 08H7355 14 63H6205 1 Carriage Assembly 15 08H7304 1 Belt Carriage Packaged 5 Per Pack 16 1 Belt Bracket PP 08H7353 17 1 Screw PP 08H7356 18 63H6274 1 Shaft Carriage Support includes eccentric bushing and screw old version is darker nickel plating new version is lighter chrome w eccentric bushing on right 18A 1 Eccentric Bushing Part of 63H6274 18B 1 Screw Part of 63H6274 19 4 Washer PP 63H6001 20 2 Screw M4x8 PP 08H7355 21 63H6063 1 Shaft Carriage 22 2 Retainer Carriage Shaft PP 08H7352 23 1 Bushing Carriag
72. Side 5 Slide the left bushing toward the center of the printer Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 427 Upper Feed Roller Shaft Assembly Figure 163 Upper Feed Roller Shaft Assembly Viewed From Top Left Side 6 Slide the feed roller shaft to the left out of the right opening and remove the upper feed roller drive belt Upper Feed Roller har ioe Assem Y Platen Belt Figure 164 Upper Feed Roller Drive Belt Viewed From Top Right Side Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 428 7 Pivot the right end of the feed roller shaft assembly to the rear for removal Attention Do not damage the gears Upper Feed Roller Shaft Assembly Figure 165 Upper Feed Roller Drive Belt Removal Viewed From Top Left Side 8 To remove the upper feed roller drive belt remove the platen assembly in the next procedure Replacement Follow the removal steps in reverse order Note Ensure that feed roller shaft drive belt is installed on the feed roller shaft Platen Assembly Removal 1 Remove the printer covers See Printer Covers on page 3471 2 Remove the upper feed roller E me See 3 Set the AFTA indicator on its highest setting to move the 4 Remove the retaining clip washer gear and spring See Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 429 5 Loosen the paper feed drive belt tension screws Belt Figure 166 Paper Feed Dr
73. Upper Feed Roller Gear Pull Selector Idler ear Gear Figure 69 Push Pull Path Close up Viewed From Left Side 7 Ensure that the metal forms guide deflector is in the closed up position See Figure 57 on page 303 8 Use a lint free cloth to clean the jam sensor located on the tractor assembly 9 Return to the step that sent you here Rear Push Path Check Le 2 Ps Inspect the bellcrank mechanism and gears on the left end of the platen for broken or worn teeth or parts See Locate and remove from the forms path torn pieces of paper or other foreign material that can cause forms jams Ensure the rear tractor paper door is open or removed Ensure that the bus bail is in the lower detented position touching the upper feed roller assembly See Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 315 Tractor Assembly Platen Figure 70 Rear Push Path Viewed From Left Side 5 Ensure that the rear tractor assembly is in the push mode To put the tractor assembly in push mode pull the two levers on the back and pivot the part that mounts to the printer until it detents Ensure the rear tractor push pull selector is set correctly To set the rear tractor for the push forms path push the push pull selector toward the rear of the printer until the gear shafts are completely at the top of the slots in the selector See and Inspect the following parts for wear damage or binds Use knob PN 08H72
74. V dc on pin 18 If the jumper is not installed correctly move it to the pins shown in the chart ids Logic Board Parallel Connector Figure 123 Model 001 002 Logic Board Jumper Location Viewed From Rear Note If after installing the logic board the NPS 540 power light is not lighted check for 5 V dc on pin 18 with a volt meter pin 18 is shown on connector Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 384 Table 52 Models 001 and 002 logic board jumper location to enable 5 V dc on pin 18 Install jumper between pins 2 and 3 1 and 2 4247 001 002 Logic Board Level Level 1 2 logic board Level 3 logic board 4 Run the T amp D program in automatic mee Ensure that T amp D11 T amp D12 T amp D15 T amp D16 and T amp D17 are adjosied if nacated 5 Use the printer configuration printout to verify configuration settings See IBM 4247 Printer Models 001 002 User s Guide Logic Board Component Inspection Reference Use the following circuit diagrams and Table 53 to identify damaged circuits Note Q1 Q2 and Q6 are vertically mounted U34 U35 and U36 are mounted to heat sinks Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 385 a o o
75. Y until you see ADJUSTMENTS Press the Pitch key until you see FIXED AFTA 2 Press the Menu key and then press Pitch to get STORE CURRENT Press the Menu key again to exit and save 4 To print a sample at FIXED AFTA 2 press the Menu key until you see PRINT OUT NO Press the Pitch key to change to PRINT OUT YES and the sample will begin printing Identify this sample as Sample 2 Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 291 5 Press the Menu key and then Micro Y until you see ADJUSTMENTS Press the Pitch key until you see FIXED AFTA 3 Press the Menu key and then press Pitch to get STORE CURRENT Press the Menu key again to exit and save 6 To print a sample at FIXED AFTA 3 press the Menu key until you see PRINT OUT NO Press the Pitch key to change to PRINT OUT YES and the sample will begin printing Identify this sample as Sample 3 Creating Samples Model 001 002 Press the Test key Scroll to Printer Adjustments and press Enter on Front AFTA Change to FIXED 1 press Enter then Start The pattern will print and stop Change to FIXED 2 press Enter then Start The pattern will print and stop Change to FIXED 3 press Enter then Start The pattern will print and stop If you do not see enough range on these samples change to FIXED 4 press Enter then Start The pattern will print and stop Wr am Co Ie Em Analyzing Samples All Models Inspect these FIXED gap samples for the change in print darkness Proper Darkness and Gap
76. a machine Power supply Fans Motors Safety Information 14 f an electrical accident occurs Use caution do not become a victim yourself Power off O the printer Send another person to get medical aid Pre Service Inspection The intent of this inspection guide is to assist you in identifying potentially unsafe conditions on these products Each machine as it was designed and built had required safety items installed to protect users and service personnel from injury This guide addresses only those items However good judgement should be used to identify potential safety hazards because of attachment of non IBM features or options not covered by this inspection guide If any unsafe conditions are present you must determine how serious the apparent hazard could be and whether you can continue without first correcting the problem The guide consists of a series of steps presented in a checklist Checklist 1 a Check exterior covers for damage loose broken or sharp edges b Check top main cover Interlock operation See T amp D19 Top Cover Interlock Test 2 Ensure that all safety labels are in place 3 Inspect the customer s power source receptacle See Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers 5229 8124 4 Ensure that any Safety EC s have been installed properly 5 Power off O the printer Disconnect the power cord Check the power cord for a Athird wire ground connector in
77. and remove the parallel cable Install the LAN card if needed Appendix C Flashing the Memory of the Model 003 555 8 Power on the printer After the first normal initialization an information message might appear 070 PRINTER BOARD CHANGED VERIFY CONFIGURATION SETTINGS Press the printer Stop key to silence the beeper and go to the Not Ready state This message means that a Printer Configuration parameter value has changed when the code was installed Print the 4247 Custom Set information using the Test key and Print Custom Sets utility Mark this printout as After Compare the Before and After printouts and re install the correct parameter values in each affected Custom Set using the Menu key 9 If more than one Custom Set was being used by the customer you should recall the last used Custom Set by using the Menu key and Configuration Storage with the Enter key When the Recalled message is displayed press the Start key to go to a Ready state The Custom Set that has been recalled and is being used by the printer is shown as lt X gt in the upper right corner of the display The parameter values in lt X gt can be printed using the Test key and the Printer Configuration utility Appendix C Flashing the Memory of the Model 003 556 Part Number Index Part Asm Part Asm Number Index Page Number Index Page 01P4764 1 19 462 08H7090 2 2 463 01P7164 6 12A 474 08H7091 2 10 464 01P7165 6 12 474 08H7092 2 7 464 01P75351 1
78. cloth to remove the chad Remove the tractor and wipe the upper and lower surfaces of the sensor with antistatic liquid IBM P N 2200118 If you judge the amount of chad to be excessive advise the customer to Frequently clean out the chad Ask the forms supplier to reduce the chad Run T amp D in automatic test mode to verify correct printer operation For Model A00 see Fow To Run Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 103 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 4 Check for worn tractor jam sensors Examine the plastic surfaces of the sensor for signs of wear Are the sensor surfaces OK Go to step 5 on page 105 Replace the tractor assembly Run T amp D in automatic test mode to verify correct printer operation For Moga A00 see Fou o Run Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 104 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 5 Look closely at the tractor sensor in dim light There is a small red LED visible in the sensor surface over which the forms pass You may need to cup your hand around the sensor to be able to see the LED This LED lights if the tractor is correctly plugged in and the electrical circuits are OK Is the red LED lighted Install a new logic board Run T amp D in automatic test mode to verify correct printer operation For
79. dh do RO RUE ME eek SAE DEERE 9 Safety Notices 2 ak oe eee Eee Se Ok eee ee EEE EP REO ee aye ee ee ee ee 9 tcn ucbe g APT TIT 11 Electrical Safety PED rTTTTTITTITITT 13 Pre Service Inspection Ru komo Row RO OR poA RUE EGRE E RO 3 RSS O3 4 ROS E RECO oe eases 15 Related Publications lees 17 Model ADO Publications uunc cunds ck en OE Su DOR eRe Eo xo 7x x RO SS RE ax X9 RES 39 x SE a 17 Models 001 and 002 Publications u x 93x X ox ok ox PX 4486488 mex eed eee 3 x Ew ox cu 17 Model 003 Publications u ok euo m REO eRe GR m de ERD a Xs Fox eR d 18 Common Publications us ume mom ROW 8 o3e3ec kB Geo Bo wow SS EER GSES RS ASE Ee Ree ES 18 Preface Whats New in the Model 003 2 0 2 eee lll 19 Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 0 2000 llle s 20 Maintenance Analysis Procedures MAPS oll sss s 20 Defining The Prop uuu ee qs X Sok RR A we on o BR we we Rk m e Re Gom Do ee dde Ee 20 MAP 0100 START OF CALL 2 24 xem x Roe OE e 8e UR SEE om Romo B m ek Rex EE Ox SS 23 MAP 0110 Automatic Sheet Feeder 2 ce ens 26 MAP 0120 Parallel or Serial Attachment Model A00 and Model 003 lll ll 33 MAP 0121 Parallel with Twinax or Coax Attachments Models 001 002 or 003 aa a a 41 Attachment Card Procedure T 3 v 43 a a a a a a a a ow 50 Attachment Card Procedure 2 a a a a a a 56 MAP 0122 Network Print Server Attachment a a
80. display is correct use the Printer Configuration Test 5 Press the Cancel Print key to exit test mode Coax Configuration Printout Sample Defaults Note This information applies only to 4247 Models 001 and 002 with coax attachment and Model 003 with the coax attachment card and coax base code Figure 196 on page 501l and Figure 197 on page 502 show the factory default settings Appendix A Printer Configuration 500 Printer Configuration lt A gt Configuration Storage Power On Custom Set Power On Paper Source Attachment Attachment Rear Tractor Use Rear Tractor Use Coax Configuration Characters Per Inch Lines Per Inch 3 ie Double Space mum Print Position mum Page Length nulation Mode Print Quality Print Language Mono Dual Case Print Text Direction Media Size Priority Printer Compatibility Screen Buffer Size 1 CR at MPP 1 2 NL at MPP 1 FF followed by data FF last in order Null Suppression FF position Auto at EDB Auto at GILG end Suppress timeout riy Print Complete 12 Auto before OFLC Programmed Symbols Bar Code Mode Graphics Mode Alarm Control Override Host Paper Source Programmed Symbols Plane Selection Full Page on Skip Suppress PS Print Direction 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 id Parallel Configuration Characters Per Inch Lines Per Inch Maximum Print Position Maximum Page Length Emulation Mode Print Language Print Quality NLG Typeface Charac
81. displays the message ATTACHMENT CARD IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THE PRINTER BASE CODE The problem is that you do not have a coax attachment card installed with the coax base code Install either an appropriate attachment card or coax base code If the operator panel displays the message WAITING CODE DOWNLOAD You have accidentally pressed the Start and Cancel keys instead of the Stop and Test keys 10 To run all the tests sequentially go to Automatic Test Mode step 12 on page 203 To run specific tests go to the Single Test Mode in the next step 11 Single Test Mode Note This program allows forward scrolling only TEST AND DIAGNOSTIC STARTUP SINGLE YES NO a Press the Line Feed key to select YES The following message will be displayed T amp DXX Microcode Test RUN TEST YES END NO b To scroll to the desired test press the Start NO key Chapter 2 Diagnostics 202 C To run the currently displayed test press the Line Feed YES key For a description of each test go to FT amp here If an error is detected an audible alarm will sound All LEDs will flash except for the power LED which will remain lighted An error message will be displayed TDXX FRU X X PRESS A KEY e Fora of error messages go to f To end the T amp D program press the Form Feed END key g The following message will be displayed 04 or return to the step that sent you
82. forms guide deflector position or an incorrect paper bail position can cause forms feed failures The metal forms guide deflector is closed in the up position and open when it is in the down position Metal Forms Guide Deflector Closed PULL Position WM etal Forms Guide Deflect or Open PUSH Position 9 for the position of the metal forms guide deflector and the paper bail for each paper path Go to step B on page 108 Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 107 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 8 Continued from step yi Go to step B Repair as needed The paper bail is removed from the printer when the Run T amp D in automatic mode to rear pull forms path is used verify correct printer operation A T For Moge AOO see Hon To Runl When the paper bail is installed ensure that it is 2 installed as shown LEVEL 1 BAIL NO TAB LEVEL 2 BAIL WITH TAB When closed the bail end caps are Tab touches even with frame at this point frame Meme Ed Continue with step B Bd on page 120 Are the paper bail and paper guide metal deflector positioned correctly 9 Is the rear tractor present Go to step kd Go to step 17 on page 112 10 ls the wire forms guide installed on the printer and Go to step Ht on page 1091 Install or replace the wire forms in good condition guide Its functio
83. gaps is obtained See l While holding the eccentric bushing with pliers to prevent it from moving firmly tighten the right side support shaft screw Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 280 Carriage Support Shaft Bushing Eccentric Carriage Support Bushing Shaft e90aloce Figure 52 Carriage Support Shaft Paper Feed Belt Service Check 1 Power off O the printer 2 Remove the printer covers See 3 Use a push pull scale IBM P N 460870 or equaled to push on the lever to verify that the tension on the belt is between 0 55 and 0 75 kg 1 2 1 6 Ib Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 281 Front Screw e90apm3 Figure 53 Paper Feed Belt Tension Lever Viewed From Right Side Adjustment 1 Loosen the 2 screws that mount the tension lever 2 Use the push pull scale to push on the lever to tension the belt to 0 55 to 0 75 kg 1 2 1 6 Ib 3 Tighten the front screw first then the rear screw Automatic Forms Thickness Adjustment AFTA The Automatic Forms Thickness Adjustment AFTA allows the printer to maintain a consistent distance between the printhead and the face of the forms Maintaining this distance or gap allows the printer to produce correct print darkness properly feed forms and sustain printhead drive operation There are two service check and rap Procedures one may use with AFTA There is a procedure that is relatively short and simple to D
84. good condition Use a meter to measure the third wire ground continuity for 0 1 ohm or less between the external ground pin and frame ground The power connector ground wire is fastened with a screw and star washer near the power supply Repair as needed Safety Information 15 b A second star washer must be between frame ground and the wire lug c The power cord should be the appropriate type shipped for the 4247 printer d Insulation must not be frayed nor worn Remove the covers See Printer Covers on page 3471 Check that the power supply cover has not been removed nor tampered with Check for any obvious non IBM alterations Use good judgement about the safety of any non IBM alterations Check inside the unit for any obvious unsafe conditions such as metal filing contamination water or other liquids or signs of fire or smoke damage 10 Check for worn frayed or pinched cord or cables OND Safety Information 16 Related Publications Model A00 Publications The following publications provide information on the Model A00 IBM 4247 Printer Model A00 User s Guide SA24 4404 This guide describes the operating procedures and contains information on printer setup operation maintenance and error recovery and programming information This book is shipped with the printer Printers with code version 2 14 or higher are shipped with a copy of the 4247 Printer Model A00 User s Guide Addendum no form number available IBM
85. gt t or to scroll through the Parameters and Values 7 Once you find the Value you want press Menu Enter to save the new Value and exit the Power On Configuration menu 12 Table 56 A00 Configuration Menu CATEGORIES Pull Page Lag Jam Sensors Page lag Parallel Interface Page Lag Serial Interface Page Lad Functions Page ho Sensor Tune Page Lod Bidirectional Adjustment Page Loi Restore Mfg Defaults Page laa A Manufacturing Default When emulation is set to Native 4247 4202 Ill XL or 2381 When emulation is set to Epson FX 1 Proprinter is a trademark of the International Business Machines Corporation 2 Epson is a trademark of the Seiko Epson Corporation Appendix A Printer Configuration 487 PARAMETERS AND VALUES PULL Table 57 Pull NO YES PUSH PULL JAM SENSORS Table 58 Jam Sensors Yes No PARALLEL INTERFACE Table 59 Parallel Interface Interface Types Select In Signal Buffer Size CX Parallel 1284 byte On 256 1284 Nibble Host 2K 12K 32K 64K Emulation Character Sets Print Language Native 4247 4202 Ill XL PC1 CP437 2381 PC2 Epson FX Italic Epson FX Only CP1251 Appendix A Printer Configuration 488 Table 59 Parallel Interface continued Print Language Automatic CR on LF Automatic LF on CR USA
86. iow Td For ETE di 002 or 003 see Medes 001 002 gr OS Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 93 MAP 0170 ASF Stacker Symptom Explanation Suspected FRUs Causes 02 FORMS JAM 97 STACKER ERROR 087 STACKER ERROR 099 FORMS JAMMED Stacker Failures Mechanical parts Printer logic board ASF stacker assembly ASF stacker cable assembly Table 13 MAP 0170 ASF Stacker down position when feeding paper from the ASF bins or from the manual sheet feed tray See step Is the forms guide metal deflector open Step Questions Actions Yes No 1 Are you here due to a 02 97 087 or 099 Go to step I on page 9d Go to step B display message 2 The forms guide metal deflector must be in the open Go to step B on page 95 Repair as needed Run T amp D in Automatic Test Mode to verify correct printer ME For Model see amp D P 1 For Models 001 002 or 003 see How To Bun thd Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 94 Table 13 MAP 0170 ASF Stacker continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 3 The stacker has a motor that transfers the stacker vane When ASF or manual sheet feed configurations are used the stacker vane will be in the down position to guide the paper into the stacker When fanfold push configurations are used the stacker vane will be in the up position to allow the paper to bypass the
87. is 128 to 127 Each unit is approximately 0 2 mm When the tear off is correct go to the next step 17 When the tear off line is correct press the Micro 4 key to get the next display YES lt STORE gt NO 18 Press the Micro key to store the rear tear off adjustment value Chapter 2 Diagnostics 183 19 If an error message is displayed go to 20 The test completed successfully if the display advances to the next test number T amp D18 Single Sheet Feed Printout Use this test to check manual sheet paper feed and line skew If the test completes successfully the display advances to the next test number or If the following message displays go to Display PINCH XXXXX Note XXXXX is CLOSE or OPEN Return here after the sensors are tuned If the following messages appear in the display continue with this procedure These 2 messages display sequentially T amp D 18 USER INSERT CUT SHEET 1 Insert a single sheet of forms at least 356 mm 14 in wide on the manual sheet feed tray 2 During the printing the following message will be displayed T amp D 18 USER 3 For printout analysis see Manua 4 f an error message is displayed go to 5 When the print test is complete the display advances to the next test number Chapter 2 Diagnostics 184 T amp D19 Top Cover Interlock Test If the top cover is open when this test starts the followin
88. is present on the power supply when the power cable is connected even when the power switch is set to O Off Table 11 MAP 0150 Power Supply Questions Actions Yes No 1 Power off O the printer Go to step Bl Have the customer repair the voltage problem Unplug the power cord from the voltage source Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify Verify that the power source voltage is correct correct printer operation For Model Power Min Normal Max Frequency 3 Hz AOO see How To Bun the Test and Source S Low 90 120 137 50 60 Hz High 180 220 264 50 60 Hz Is the voltage correct 2 Disconnect the power cord from the printer Go to step B on page 77 Install a new power cord Check the power cord continuity Is there continuity Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 76 Table 11 MAP 0150 Power Supply continued Questions Actions Yes No 3 Put the covers in the service position See Go to step A on page 78 Install a new an supply See Power Disconnect the power supply fan from the power supply board Power Supply Pins and Connectors Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Model A00 see FHow a Bu Run m Test and Connector to Logic Board Power Supply see Carriage Motor Power Supply Fan Connector Fan Connector e90aps3 Disconnect the carriage motor fan from the power supply board Disconnect
89. needle 5 Model 002 or 5B Models A00 001 003 moved at the correct time during the AFTA routine The needle either failed to extend or was not detected when it was pushed back Printhead misaligned and loosely fastened AFTA motor defective 22 conductor printhead cable Models A00 001 003 damaged or poor connection 26 conductor printhead cable Model 002 damaged or poor connection Mechanical parts damaged or binding Printhead defective Logic board defective AN CAUTION The printhead may be hot Wait for it to cool down Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 127 Table 16 MAP 0200 55 AFTA Errors Step Questions Actions Yes No 1 Perform the Standard AFTA Serice Check see Is the service check OK Go to step P on page 129 Repair as needed Mount forms and try loading and parking forms several times Run T amp D in automatic test mode to verify correct printer For Ti For Model A00 see anata cae 001 002 or 003 see How Ta Bun thd Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 128 Table 16 MAP 0200 55 AFTA Errors continued Step Questions Actions Yes No Check the printhead cables Go to step B 2 n p th ahead S P Install new printhead cables and Inspect the printhead flat cables for damage Mount forms and try loading c If the printer is a Model A00 001 or 003 18 needle and parking forms several times prin
90. on the printer Does the power supply fan run OK Go to step id Power off O the printer Install a new tractor assembly Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Model A00 see uu a Bu Run ue lest andl 19 Power off O the printer Go to step bd Go to step gt Bal Does this printer have a second tractor assembly 20 a Power off O the printer Go to step bal Power off O the printer b Install the second tractor assembly c Power on the printer Does the power supply fan run OK Install a new tractor assembly Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Model Aco see teow TB Bun the PS andl 2 Power off O the printer Does this printer have an ASF assembly Go to step P2 on page 8d Verify the failure symptom and return to 5 on paqe 24 in MAP 0100 Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 87 Table 11 MAP 0150 Power Supply continued Questions Actions Yes No 22 a Power off O the printer b Install the stacker assembly c Power on the printer Does the power supply fan run OK Go to step bal Power off O the printer Install a new stacker assembly Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Model A00 see uu cam Run ue lest andl 23 1 Power off O the printer 2 Install the ASF bin assembly 3 Pow
91. on for connector locations and logic board depictions Check the orientation of the microcode module on the attachment card Are the cable connection and the microcode module orientation OK Run T amp D in Automatic Mode to en correct E a See Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 44 Table 6 MAP 0121 Attachment Models 001 002 or 003 continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 6 The following items are listed with the most probable failing item first Check the first list item and test the printer If the printer still fails continue with the next list item a Check the host cable connection b Printer Configuration To print the configuration information 1 2 Power off O the printer Load the printer with at least 22 inches 55 9 cm of blank fanfold forms in the same tractor the customer is using Note If there are no blank fanfold forms available install two sheets of blank letter or legal size paper in the manual sheet feed to print the configuration Power on the printer Press the Stop key to make the printer Not Ready only the Power LED is lighted Press the Test key The message 4247 OPERATOR TESTS appears Press the Micro 4 key until the Printer Configuration test is displayed below 4247 OPERATOR TESTS Press the Enter key and wait for the configuration to print Verify the configuration information matches the host settings c Ensur
92. operating at these later levels will tolerate the narrower white to black threshold created by the shiny surface of an aged platen Before changing the microcode module determine that you have the Configuration printouts available for your printer Model Printout A00 Program Setup amp Power On 001 002 003 Configuration of all Custom Sets being used Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 299 11 After changing the microcode module check the Configuration Parameter values and proceed with the Adjustment section of T amp D11 Tractor Sensor Check and Adjustment Use this procedure when the printer displays a 02 002 020 FORMS JAM message that is caused by a forms tractor sensor To verify that the tractor sensor is requesting the message with the 02 002 020 FORMS JAM message in the display open and close the printer top cover If the carriage does not move across the print line investigate the tractor sensor The tractor sensor is located under the blue cover on each tractor assembly When the printer is operating correctly a light beam between the transmitter and receiver of the tractor is interrupted by the tractor holes in the forms as the forms travel through the tractor Attention Do not use T amp D11 for this procedure T amp D11 only applies to the paper presence sensors When the printer displays a 02 002 020 FORMS JAM message examine the tractor for damaged forms f you do find damaged forms in the tractor go
93. or PINCH CLOSE PINCH XXXXX Note XXXXX is CLOSE or OPEN 2 The status of the platen pinch rollers stored in microcode must match the position of the rollers Chapter 2 Diagnostics 168 In the next step ensure you do not power off the printer when removing the left side cover to look at the platen pinch roller gear 3 Remove the left side cover and look at the platen pinch roller gear on the left side to determine if the rollers are closed touching platen or open not touching platen Pinch Roller Gear Open Pinch Roller Gear Closed e90atd1 Figure 14 Pinch Roller Gear Viewed From Left Side 4 Press the Micro J key to get the next display Y CHANGE IT N 5 Compare the position of the gear with the display in step il of this T amp D and perform the action requested in the following table Gear Display Action Closed PINCH CLOSE Press the Load Form Feed key Chapter 2 Diagnostics 169 Gear Display Action Open PINCH OPEN Press the Load Form Feed key Closed PINCH OPEN Press the Micro key Open PINCH CLOSE Press the Micro key 6 The next part of this procedure is forms path sensor tuning The rear forms path sensor is mounted on one of the platen pinch roller assemblies Because this sensor has two positions closed and open the printer tunes this sensor in ea
94. paper path service check indicated by the flashing on page 1611 For Models 001 Are the service checks OK 002 c ar 003 sea How Ta PUN Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 62 Table 8 MAP 0130 No Paper Movement continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 2 a Use T amp D11 to determine if the paper feed motor pulley turns Sensor tuning uses the paper feed motor to engage and disengage the platen pinch rollers Remove the front tractor assembly if installed Run T amp D11 and observe the paper feed motor pulley For Model A00 E When you ran T amp D11 did the paper feed motor pulley turn Go to step B on page 64 Go to step A on page 65 Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 63 Table 8 MAP 0130 No Paper Movement continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 3 Perform the tractor assemb service check Go to Is the service check OK Install a new tractor assembly in the failing position Front or Rear Of Install a new logic board For Install a new tractor assembly cable Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer ou To un For Model est and See eT For yere 001 002 or 003 see FHow To Bun thel Repair as needed Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation E Mode A00 see How Id Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 64 Table 8 MAP 0130 No Paper
95. press the Micro key and go to step an page 18d 6 To select the next printing mode press the Load Form Feed key The following message will display Y NLQ 9 UNI N 7 In this mode the printhead will print NLQ by using 9 wires and two passes per line in one direction 8 To select this mode press the Micro key T amp D21 Paper Path Sensor Test This test provides information on the operation of the front fanfold presence sensor rear fanfold presence sensor and manual cutsheet presence sensor Use this test to verify correct sensor operation The test is available for printers with microcode level 2 09 or higher Verify sensor operation by inserting and removing a form from a paper path and checking for correct changes in the display status given in step d below 1 The printer displays the following giving you the option of performing a sensor tune at this time Y SENSOR TUNE N Press the Load Form Feed key to skip to step B on page 187 without performing a sensor tune Chapter 2 Diagnostics 186 3 The following displays Y PATH STATUS N 4 Press the Micro key to display sensor status Press the Load Form Feed key to skip to step E The current path status displays CX EX Bo P yy where C is status of the Cutsheet sensor F is status of the Front fanfold sensor R is status of the Rear fanfold sensor x will be B or F to indicate PATH BLOCKED or PATH FREE e P yy will b
96. printer 2 Ensure that the stacker is installed correctly 3 Power on the printer 4 SeefFr MAP 0170 ASE Stacker on 088 INVALID PAPER SOURCE USE MANUAL OR CHANGE CONFIGURATION Printer requires a paper source not installed 1 Change configuration to match the paper source requested see BM 4247 Printer Models 001 002 User s Guide E 2 Goto 089 RIBBON JAM CHECK RIBBON The ribbon motion sensor has detected an error Power off and on If message remains see 096 COVER OPEN False Message The cover open sensor has detected an error 097 FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE MENU LOCKED The Operator Panel has been locked This means the Configuration Menu and Printer Adjustments functions in the Test Menu cannot be used f you need to use these functions e If the customer had the operator panel locked Always lock the operator panel after completing your service procedures by performing this procedure Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 142 Table 18 Error Messages for Models 001 002 and 003 continued Message Description Action 098 HOLD PRINT TIMEOUT PRESS LOAD Coax interface only 003 FORMS EJECTED condition exceeded 60 seconds Press Load 099 FORMS JAMMED CLEAR JAM THEN PRESS START ASF paper path Paper still present after attempted Park or Eject 099 FORMS JAMMED CLEAR JAM THEN PRESS START All other paper paths Path sensor
97. printer to exit T amp D mode Chapter 2 Diagnostics 230 T amp D Error Messages and Actions Models 001 002 and 003 Table 28 T amp D Error Messages and Actions USING PARALLEL PORT Error Message Description Action ERROR RAM RAM Error TEST ATTACHMENT Coax card error Verify that the coax card is installed with the coax base CARD IS NOT code COMPATIBLE WITH PRINTER BASE CODE WAITING CODE Operator error Verify that you are using the Stop and Test keys at DOWNLOAD power on to initiate test and diagnostics TD 1 FRU 5 Microcode Hardware Replace the logic board See TD 4 FRU 4 X X or Match Error 001 and 00 8 For Model 003 see HLagid TD 1 FRU 4 X 66l TD 2 FRU 5 X Microcode Error Replace the logic board See 2 s D01 and 00 page 378 For Model 003 see FLagid TD 2 FRU 4 X a J TD 3 FRU 22 Microcode Error mE the m board See TD 4 FRU 5 X Microcode Error Replace the logic board See Or r Model 003 see l Lagid Chapter 2 Diagnostics 231 Table 28 T amp D Error Messages and Actions continued Error Message Description Action TDES FRU TA Operator Panel Failure 1 This error can occur if a key is not pressed in less than 10 seconds Run T amp D05 again to verify the problem 2 m the aa panel See 4 Replace the operator panel cable TD 6 FRU 0 X TD 8 FRU 0 X Parallel Interface Failure
98. remove Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 381 9 Transfer the attachment bezel and screws from the old board to the new board as needed 10 Verify that the new logic board has microcode modules installed If not you must transfer the modules from the logic board you are replacing to the new board Use Module Extractor PN 73G5523 for modules on all levels of the logic board or PN 10G3902 for Model A00 late level and Models 001 and 002 logic board and attachment card microcode modules 11 Verify that the microcode modules are properly oriented and plugged into the socket Attention When using module extractor PN 7365523 follow these steps to avoid cracking or damaging the plastic sockets a Insert the C shaped end of the tool into one of the module socket extraction slots b Hold the tool perpendicular to the module and pull upward to loosen it from the socket c Repeat the previous 2 steps using the extraction slot in the opposite corner until the module lifts out of the socket Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 382 Coax Twinax Connector Microcode CR Module U2 ER id Bevel Microcode Module U54 S 4247 001 and 002 Level 1 Coax Twinax Connector Microcode Module U57 s Corner Cut Off Microcode Module U2 Microcode Bevel Module U54 4247 001 and 002 Level2 Coax Twinax Connector Microcode Module U57 Microcode __ Microcode ee M
99. sensed paper still present after attempted Park or Eject For fanfold forms this message can display if you park but do not tear off the output Path sensor detected forms already present when you tried to load forms into a fanfold path 1 Ensure fanfold forms are torn off before parking the forms Ensure fanfold forms are loaded onto the tractor pins with the leading edge visible on the tractor Check for pieces of paper in the manual sheet feed under the platen and above the front tractor 4 f smi remains see FMAP 0190 m 200 ATTACHMENT INCOMPATIBLE MODEL 003 SEE USER S GUIDE Installed attachment card is not compatible with the printer base code loaded The coax attachment card is missing install a coax card Printer base code must be reloaded for the installed attachment carg see lAppend change the E card to the correct OM TATE TSE ee ee i about base code e See ICompatibilities Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 143 Table 18 Error Messages for Models 001 002 and 003 continued Message Description Action 201 NO ATTACHMENT CARD FOUND MODEL 003 TWINAX CODE SEE USER S GUIDE A serial LAN or twinax attachment card was not found during the current power on but was previously 1 If attachment card was removed confirm this by pressing the start key 2 Otherwise power off the printer and reseat the attachment card 202 NEW ATTACHMENT CARD FOU
100. the Load Form Feed key to select INIT 7 For error code descriptions and repair action go to T amp T amp D01 Microcode Test Display T amp D 01 USER If an error message is displayed go to L amp successfully if the display advances to the next T amp DO2 Microcode Test Display 90 The test completed T amp D 02 CRC ROM Note The asterisk will flash during the test If an error message is displayed go to successfully if the display advances to the next test number 90 The test completed Chapter 2 Diagnostics 164 T amp DO03 Not Used Press the Micro key to bypass this message T amp DO04 Microcode Test Display T amp D 04 CRC FONT Note The asterisk will flash during the test If an error message is displayed go to T amp successfully if the display advances to the next et number T amp DO05 Operator Panel LED and Key Test Display T amp D 05 USER 1 All of the LEDs will switch on at the same time 2 Next beginning at the top each LED will flash on and off once with a buzzer sound 3 After the LED test the following message will be displayed PRESS KEY 1 gt 4 The key is good if the display advances to the next key number 5 Press key 1 shown below 90 The test completed Chapter 2 Diagnostics 165 ame ooo nline OE o D Ej a
101. the ribbon motor cable connector from the logic board Note the location of the connector and the cable path to aid installation Note If the motor is being removed only to access other parts do not disconnect the connector Motor Figure 133 Ribbon Drive Motor Connector Model A00 Early Level Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 403 Ribbon Motor Figure 134 Ribbon Drive Motor Connector Model A00 Late Level and Models 001 002 and 003 Models 001 and 003 have connectors A and B Model 002 has only connector B 4 Remove the ribbon motor mounting screws and remove the ribbon drive motor Note the type and location of each screw to aid installation Self Tapping Ribbon Screws Motor Threaded Screws Figure 135 Ribbon Motor Screws Viewed From Left Side 5 If the drive spool has a screw remove the screw then lift the shaft out of the bracket If the drive spool does not have a screw remove the retaining clip from the drive shaft Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 404 Left Ribbon Bracket Figure 136 Ribbon Drive Spool Retaining Clip Viewed From Top 6 Lift the left ribbon bracket up and out of the printer Replacement Follow the removal steps in reverse order Ribbon Lift Motor Removal 1 Open the top cover and remove the ribbon 2 Remove the 2 ribbon lift motor screws and unplug the conn
102. tune the sensors cor Model A00 see b Run T amp D21 and Verb c correct sensor operation If not OK 1 Install a new logic board For 2 Install a new sensor cable assembly c Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Model A00 see m Go to step B on page ad Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 29 Table 2 MAP 0110 Automatic Sheet Feeder continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 2 Are you here because Bin 2 or Bin Go to step 4 Go to step El 3 failed to feed paper 4 a Swap the bad bin connector with Go to step 8 Install a new bin the Bin 1 connector See Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Model AOO see b From the operator panel load paper from Bin 1 This will cause paper to be fed from the bad bin Does paper load from the bad bin OK 5 Perform the main paper drive service Go to step 6 Repair as needed Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct rinter operation For Model A00 see How ishe main paperiive service Ta Bun dhe Tes aua Bee an check OK 6 Perform the ASF service check See Go to step 7 Repair as needed Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct rinter operation For Model A00 see How Is the ASF service check OK une s Dese 7 Are you here due to a 02 or 099 Go to step display message Continue with FMAP 0170 ASH Chapter 1 Diagnosing Pro
103. you MUST use extractor 73G5523 For all other logic boards you can use extractor 73G5523 or 10G3902 16A 10G3902 NS Extractor Microcode Module Not Shown 17 01P7581 1 Board Logic 4247 003 18 01P7574 1 Card Attachment 4247 Model 003 Twinax SCS 18A 01P7575 1 Card Attachment 4247 Model 003 Twinax IPDS 19 01P7576 1 Card Attachment 4247 Model 003 Coax SCS 19A 01P7577 1 Card Attachment 4247 Model 003 Coax IPDS 20 01P7578 1 Card Attachment 4247 Model 003 Serial 21 01P7579 1 Card Attachment 4247 Model 003 Ethernet LAN Axis 10 100 27P8217 R Diskette 4247 Model 003 Printer Code 5 05 ASCII Twinax not shown 27P8218 RH Diskette 4247 Model 003 Printer Code 5 05 Coax not shown Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 478 Assembly 9 Printhead and Cables DETAIL A lj DETAIL B DETAIL B 3 1A 4 Model A00 001 Model 002 003 Asm Part Index Number Units Description 9 1 08H7249 1 Cable Operator Panel 1A 08H7267 1 Filter Assembly EMI Detail A 2 08H7250 1 Cable Stacker 3 08H7247 1 Cables Printhead 18 Wire Model A00 and Model 001 Detail B 3 90H0025 1 Cables Printhead 9 Wire Model 002 Detail B 4 08H7248 1 Cable Tractor Assembly 5 08H7251 1 Cable Sens
104. 001 and 002 oss 392 Twinax Attachment Card Models 001 and 002 les 396 POWO GUDDIU 242244 a5 cow heehee es RONURUN ER RR UE NUR eee ee ee S deb OE TRA 400 Ribbon Drive Motor amp uus ura Ue des E eR ok Lo nde Bee Ko ah he E KON A cn D e ee o ds Rd 403 aie mMS s PRG RE RESET StET2Tt 5llll 119 911 21 7171711712 7T 405 Automatic Forms Thickness Adjust AFTA Assembly oll 407 Contents 6 Platen Pinch Roller Assembly cn g6e e842 6 e624 8 SMA X0 UROR LER ESSE SE SD MR OS REO 411 Carriage Drive Motor Assembly amp xoxo Rew ok RU Bw GR OE UE EO e OG xS Rw Re Oe DUE REO 415 Carriage Drive Bell o e s5 stus c 4k ae Gea EUR eee WO a RON ee ee Bee Rub ee 420 Paper Bail Assembly ur uq Sb o Oe hee ULT E HR we De RR I HE ERE HERR ERU EE 422 Manual Sheet Feed Tray ux Wo wok wok qe m Oe YER ee X 3k ORR ORE Geox EX DH EES a 425 Upper Feed Roller Shaft Assembly uu adeo e EU REOR Bo RUR OW Ee uU xDOGRUE E Re ECHO RC Re EU ERE Lec 426 Platen Assembly a oko h Bee GS Ree ee ee eee EERE eee eH eed BEES 429 Printhead Mask o eu ec oe ddp 3o ea uSe eS ERE ERODE REGEX ERS ROSE SES GED EG 432 Lower Feed Roller Assembly 2 0 ee ee 435 Carriage Assembly sox ed de he eee eo des Sous 19 ded rele Aa OE we Re E de IE ln RR ERE d 437 Carriage Support Shaft 2 usw doe ipn Bese eee suuded tS Gece w ee IE d ua ib s 439 Sensor Cable Assembly s quad umor m3 See ee om PX RON eo OS S ewe NUR HE Se GHG oe deos de eS 44
105. 001 and 002 0 2 ee 270 Connector Locations Early Model AOO 1 aa ss 271 Connector Locations Later Model A00 and Models 001 and 002 lll ls 272 Connector Locations Model 003 a oaoa a lle serons 273 Network Print Server Attachment Pin 18 5 V Jumper Location and the Parallel Connector 273 Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 22s 215 Service POSITION ies dunes e eae m OR En bee oe oe ee de ee cou Uk XE UR UR HR RS DOR we GE a 275 Service Checks and Adjustments 2 sw uox RO x om a 279 Carriage Drive Belt sc fukn ae BOUE ewe ee ee Wo8 ROREM IPAE eu ku ow Be ee ES UE 279 Carriage Support Shaft use Wee Be uk sos d e ROB UECRCNON ee uk ow OG y a aor OUR de Roe OS UE X 280 Paper Feed Bell x 3 w ma uox 5 6 2 05 p ie RO mom eee Ee EER Ree Sot e eR De dd 281 Automatic Forms Thickness Adjustment AFTA a 282 asini UC 294 Contents 5 Bidirectional adiri m 2244626864 Oe Se KROES Sse DERE LEE SS 294 Tear Off Line 6 5 Se ee eee Ee Se ee ee eee eee eee ee 295 Sensor Service Cheeks uu uou eee adag c woe ee ee Pu 40m Ee Ee ee ee No wem wx 296 Paper Path Service Checks woo ue tom e088 Ax wore ER hs oe CREE Oe eee eR eS 301 Automatic Sheet Feeder ASF Bins Service Check 2 a a a lll 319 ASF Stacker Service Check s sa hh eo EOE eee ee 3 o o UE SR ER UE EC ee Ewe eS 322 Platen Pinch Roller Assembly Service Check 2 2 2 llle 323 Tractor Assembly Service Chec
106. 003 have connectors A and B Model 002 has only connector B 5 Perform the following a Remove the 2 ground strip screws b Remove the 2 mounting screws Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 445 Note The right side screw can be accessed through the cable slot in the fan mounting bracket or by using an offset screwdriver c Remove the 2 wire ties Note The printer mechanical assembly will not come straight up Pivot it to the front disengaging the rubber grommets and then lift it out 49 DETAIL A Figure 181 Printer Mechanical Assembly Replacement Follow the removal steps in reverse order Attention Do not pinch the cables during installation Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 446 Paper Feed Motor AN CAUTION The paper feed motor may be hot Wait for it to cool down Removal 1 Remove the printer covers See 2 Remove the printer mechanical assembly See 3 Loosen the paper belt tension lever screws and remove the Sao drive belt from the paper feed motor gear Note the path of the belt to aid installation Belt Figure 182 Paper Feed Motor Belt Viewed From Right Side 4 Remove the 3 mounting screws and remove the motor Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 447 Figure 183 Paper Feed Motor Replacement 1 Follow the removal steps in reverse order 2 Perform the paper feed belt tension service check See Paper Feed Motor Drive Belt
107. 02 or 003 see odei 001 002 9 008 Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 68 Table 9 MAP 0131 Paper Path Sensor continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 6 Open the top cover Is paper visible between the printhead and the platen Run T amp D21 and verify correct sensor operation If not OK Install a new logic board For Install a new sensor cable ae See Sensor Cable Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation ror Mode A00 see Pow Td For VERE 001 002 or 003 see odei 001 002 9 008 Probable forms loading problem Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 69 MAP 0140 Printhead Drive Symptom Explanation Suspected FRUs Causes 56 PRINT ERROR Ribbon defective or incorrectly installed A n he TS Ragged tear offs on continuous forms 053 MACHINE CHECK ERR 3 X X 053 MACHINE CHECK ERR 4 3 X Corner on the leading edge of the forms is catching in printhead 056 MACHINE CHECK mask mask damaged Carriage Slams Into Sides Printing Slows or Stops Carriage belt tension is incorrect Carriage belt clamp is loose Carriage motor is defective mounting hardware Carriage belt idler is not turning Printhead home sensor is dirty or defective Mechanical interference Printhead gap is incorrect Logic board is defective Power supply is for wrong AC voltage Printhead is defective Printhea
108. 1 Printer Mechanical Assembly 2 ee 444 Paper Feed Motor us sm edo IR Um AO m de meom Qu EUR HS CSE EAE AS PO IRSE RUE Se RUE A 447 Paper Feed Motor Drive Bell a u sco s o omo ade a Rb eS eee ES eR wea X Russ ee 448 Lower Plastic Shield Support Assembly llle 451 Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 22s ll esse ss sss 457 How To Use This Parts Catalog dc oe le UR ee ee ee ue o ee ek es EROR QE ER ee 457 hcec PPP 459 Assembly 1 Covers and Operator Panel 2l 460 Assembly 2 Tractor Assembly Automatic Sheet Feeder and Stacker 2 2 4 4 463 Assembly 3 Printer Mechanical Assembly and Base 2 ee 465 Assembly 4 Mechanical Assembly 00 0 000 2 ee les 467 Assembly 5 Mechanical Assembly ll 2 2 2 ee 470 Assembly 6 Mechanical Assembly Ill 0 002 ee ee 473 Assembly 7 Electronics eau a omo aca bu x9 6 OE XU Rok ch R3 OR E RS ab E 4E EBRD ES 475 Assembly 8 Electronics Mou ux e eae eB SRS OEC Re SEAS Se EB cmo SOS UR ox XC eRe ew eee 477 Assembly 9 Printhead and Cables lll llle rs 479 Assembly 10 Power Cords Parts Kits and Tools a a 481 Chapter 7 Preventative Maintenance 000 pee 483 Contents 7 Appendix A Printer Configuration 2 2 00 2 ee 484 Configuration Information All Models llle 484 OUGNIBW fee ee ee dw ee ee ee ee Se ee Su ROS S
109. 1 5 461 08H7291 4 50 469 08H7344 1 6 461 08H7297 4 38 469 08H7345 1 16 462 08H7298 4 45 469 08H7348 1 12 462 08H7299 5 3 471 08H7349 1 17 462 08H7300 5 6 471 08H7350 1 9 461 08H7301 5 8 471 08H7351 10 16 481 08H7302 5 11 471 08H7352 10 17 481 08H7304 5 15 471 08H7353 10 18 481 08H7305 5 26 471 08H7354 5 4 471 08H7306 5 32 472 08H7355 10 20 481 08H7306 9 6 479 08H7355 4 51A 469 08H7307 5 34 472 08H7356 1 15D 462 08H7308 5 35 472 08H7356 10 21 481 08H7309 5 39 472 08H7358 10 24 481 08H7310 5 43 472 08H7359 5 48 472 08H7311 5 10 471 08H7360 6 26 474 08H7314 5 24 471 08H7364 2 6 464 08H7315 5 25 471 08H7365 2 8 464 08H7317 5 46 472 08H7367 7 16 476 08H7319 6 7 474 08H7368 2 11 464 Part Number Index 558 Part Asm Part Asm Number Index Page Number Index Page 08H7369 1 18 462 38L1605 8 14 478 08H7370 1 4A 461 38L1606 8 13 478 08H7395 6 4 474 63H6000 4 16 468 10G3902 10 31 482 63H6001 10 22 481 10G3902 8 16A 478 63H6002 4 5 468 13F9940 10 12 481 63H6004 1 1 461 13F9979 10 14 481 63H6004 3 11 466 13F9979 10 4 481 63H6007 1 4 461 13F9997 10 3 481 63H6008 1 8 461 14F0015 10 15 481 63H6009 1 13 462 14F0015 10 2 481 63H6010 7 13 476 14F0033 10 1 481 63H6020 1 2 461 14F0051 10 7 481 63H6021 1 11 462 14F0069 10 6 481 63H6062 3 2 465 14F0087 10 5 481 63H6063 5 21 471 1838574 10 10 481 63H6065 1 13A 462 24H7580 1 10 461 63H6066 1 4B 461 24H7729 4 51 469 63H6067 1 20 462 24H7730 4 7 468 63H6068 1 9A 461 24H7732
110. 15 will be 4 8 to 5 2 V dc at power on and 0 0 V dc after the printer is idle for approximately 30 seconds Reference Table 9 Base Code Compatibilities Table 23 Base Code Compatibilities Base Code For Use With twinax no card serial card twinax card LAN card coax coax card Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 157 Reference Table 10 Ribbon Lift and 26 Pin Cable Connectors Table 24 Connectors Ribbon Lift Connector 26 Pin Connector Pin 1 Pin 25 Pin 2 Pin 23 Pin 3 Pin 24 Pin 4 Pin 26 Reference Table 11 Paper Paths Table 25 Guide and bail positions 40 for details on the location of the pins on the connector Selected Paper Path Forms Guide Metal Deflector Paper Bail Front Push Open Closed Manual Sheet Feed Open Closed Rear Push Open Closed ASF Open Closed Rear Pull Closed Removed Front Push Pull Closed Closed Reference Table 12 Minimum Microcode Table 26 Minimum Microcode Levels Model Module Minimum Code Level Controller Code Generator Code Attachment Code Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 158 Table 26 Minimum Microcode Levels continued A00 2 09 1 16 001 Coax 3 19 2 02 3 04 Twi 3 18 mue 2 02 3 02 002 Coax 2 19 2 03 3 03 Twinax 2 18 2 03 3 02 003 5 05 5 05 5 05 Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 159 Chapter 2 Diagnostics Test and Diagnostic Informa
111. 229 8124 Observe the following rules when working on electrical equipment Find the room emergency power off EPO switch disconnecting switch or electrical outlet If an electrical accident occurs you then can operate the switch or unplug the power cord quickly Do not work alone under hazardous conditions or near equipment that has hazardous voltages Disconnect all power before Performing a mechanical inspection Working near power supplies Removing or installing main units Before you start to work on the machine unplug the power cord If you cannot unplug it ask the customer to power off the wall box that supplies power to the machine and to lock the wall box in the Off O position f you need to work on a machine that has exposed electrical circuits observe the following precautions Ensure that another person familiar with the power off controls is near you Remember If conditions require a second person that person must be present when you power off O the printer A DANGER Some hand tools have handles covered with a soft material that does not insulate you when working with live electrical currents Use only approved tools and testers Use only one hand when working with powered on electrical equipment keep the other hand in your pocket or behind your back Safety Information 13 Remember There must be a complete circuit to cause electrical shock By observing t
112. 3 pore For ponele 001 002 9 008 0r Install a new ribbon drive motor See l Ribbon Drive Motor on Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation ror Mode A00 see se iow Id For toe 001 002 or 003 see Medels 001 002 ar 003 Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 91 Table 12 MAP 0160 Ribbon Feed and Ribbon Lift continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 8 Power off O the printer Go to step B on page 93 Install a new ribbon lift motor See Ribbon Moto Disconnect the ribbon lift motor connector at the printhead see Measure the resistance of the motor mane See Is the resistance correct Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation sel Model AOO see Vm d For Models 001 002 or 003 see jae ont Uo Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 92 Table 12 MAP 0160 Ribbon Feed and Ribbon Lift continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 9 Remove the printhead See Put back the printhead Install a new printhead See Measure the resistance between the connector pins on Install a new logic board For the printhead Run T amp D in automatic mode to us correct printer operation For Mode A00 see ow Id Is the resistance 5 ohms or less for all measurements Install new printhead cables Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation D Model A00 see
113. 3 Models 001 and 003 have connectors A and B Model 002 has only connector B 3 Remove the following Ground strip screw Fan nuts e Fan Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 416 Carriage DSI Carriage Motor Fan Nuts Figure 151 Carriage Drive Motor Fan Viewed From Right Rear 4 Remove the following e Front tractor housing nut e Fan bracket screw Note The fan bracket will be removed after the next step Note how the fan bracket is installed Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 417 Carriage A Motor Fan Bracket S Z A V a Front Tractor 9 Sew oN Connector cC ae A Housing Nut po a N Figure 152 Carriage Motor Fan Bracket Viewed From Right Rear 5 Remove the following Carriage drive belt from the motor pulley see 4 bracket screws Fan bracket Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 418 Carriage Drive Belt Figure 153 Carriage Drive Belt Viewed From Right Side 6 Remove the following Printhead cable bracket screws Carriage motor bracket screws the later version of screws has a de tinted finish an upgrade Camage motor Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 419 Carriage Motor Carriage Motor Bracket Screws Print Head Cable Bracket Screws Figure 154 Carriage Motor Bracket Screws Viewed From Front Replacement 1 Follow the removal steps in reverse order Note
114. 3 to 4 numbers higher than 6 at about 9 or 10 This approximate setting will vary from printer to printer If it is not in this range 1 Loosen the 2 screws that hold the wheel 2 Pull the gear away from the intermediate gear 3 Move only the wheel to align the pointer with a number in the range of 9 to 10 Verify that the printhead mounting screws are tight and that the printhead is seated correctly If the printer had 56 056 errors or printhead has been hitting the side wall of the printer a b C d Inspect the 2 printhead screws and 2 washers for damage Replace any damaged screw or washer Loosen the 2 printhead screws Hold the printhead toward the platen Tighten both screws Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 288 6 Power On Check Perform this check only after completing the Inspect the printhead cable for damage and a poor connection at the printhead Replace the cable if indicated Verify AFTA operation using single part forms 1 2 3 Power on the printer Set the AFTA menu item to AFTA 0 This invokes the microcode to use the needle 5B and invokes the AFTA motor and the internal logic to detect the thickness of the forms that are positioned against the platen Load a single sheet of 20 Ib 80 g m paper This paper is about 0 1 mm 0 004 in thick occasionally 20 Ib paper might measure as little as 0 09 mm 0 0038 in thick Note If the printer displays a 55 055 AFTA ERR
115. 301 manual sheet feed 317 push pull 313 rear pull 311 rear push 315 platen pinch roller assembly 323 print quality fanfold printout 338 single sheet printout 343 printhead drive 333 ribbon feed lift 330 439 stacker ASF 322 tractor assembly 325 Service Checks and Adjustments 279 Service Position 275 service position covers 275 shield lower plastic 451 specifications forms 534 stack locations 541 542 543 544 stacker cable wiring 261 MAP 94 motor wiring 255 service check 322 stacking recommendations 539 Start of Call 23 Supplies 531 y tear off line adjustment 295 Test and Diagnostic information Model A00 How To Run T amp D Tests 161 T amp D Descriptions listing of 164 T amp D01 Microcode Test 164 T amp DO02 Microcode Test 164 T amp DOS3 Not Used 165 T amp D04 Microcode Test 165 T amp D05 Operator Panel LED and Key Test 165 T amp DO6 Parallel Interface Test 166 T amp D07 Not Used 166 T amp D068 Microcode Test 167 T amp D09 Serial Attachment Test 167 T amp D10 Stacker ASF Test 167 T amp D11 Pinch Roller Status Sensor Tuning Ribbon Feed and Lift Motors Test 168 T amp D12 AFTA Calibrate Test 171 210 T amp D13 Not Used 174 T amp D14 Fanfold Form Printout Test 174 T amp D15 First Line Printing Test 175 T amp D16 Bidirectional Adjustment Test 178 T amp D17 Tear Off Line Adjustment Test 180 T amp D18 Single Sheet Feed Printout 184 T amp D19 Top Cover
116. 4247 Printers Maintenance Information Document Number SA24 4 400 05 Part Number 27P8450 Note Before using this information and the product it supports read the information in Sixth Edition February 2001 This edition replaces SA24 4400 04 Requests for IBM publications should be made to your IBM representative or to the IBM branch office serving your locality If you request publications from the address given below your order will be delayed because publications are not stocked there Many of the IBM Printing Systems Division publications are available from the web page listed below Internet Visit our home page at http www ibm com printers A Reader s Comments form is provided at the back of this publication If the form has been removed you can send comments by fax to 1 800 524 1519 USA only or 1 303 924 6873 by E mail to printpub us ibm com or by mail to IBM Printing Systems Division Department H7FE Building 003G Information Development PO Box 1900 Boulder CO 80301 9191 USA IBM may use or distribute whatever information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1995 2001 All rights reserved US Government Users Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp Contents Safety Information ia 2 24 oe hae eG SERS ADR CROP A X
117. 71 if available to hand cycle the paper feed mechanism to observe the parts The knob installs on the left end of the platen shaft Install new parts as needed Upper feed roller assembly This is CRITICAL for successful rear push path operation The rubber rollers wear with paper feeding If print registration is the problem or extra paper is found behind the platen the upper feed roller assembly must be replaced Upper feed roller gear Push selector gear Tractor assembly gears Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 316 Tractor Assembly Gears Cover Removed Upper Feed Push Selector Roller Gear Push Pull Selector in Push Position Idler Down Gear Figure 71 Rear Push Path Viewed From Left Side Tractor Connector Not Shown 8 Ensure that the metal forms guide deflector is in the open down position See Figure 57 on page 303 9 Use a lint free cloth to clean the jam sensor located on the tractor SELMA 10 Perform the platen pinch roller release service check See 11 Return to the step that sent you here Manual Sheet Feed Path Check 1 Locate and remove from the forms path torn pieces of paper or other foreign material that can cause forms jams 2 Inspect the following parts for wear damage or binds Use knob PN 08H7271 if available to hand cycle the paper feed mechanism to observe the parts The knob installs on the left end of the platen shaft Install new parts as needed
118. 7264 1 Tie Wire Packaged 50 Per Pack 2 1 Screw PP 08H7356 3 08H7252 1 Fan Assembly Carriage Motor 4 08H7258 1 Fan Assembly Board 5 08H7265 1 Bracket Board Fan Support 6 63H6245 1 Cover Power Supply 7 08H7262 1 Strip Ground 8 6 Screw M3x6 with washer PP 08H7355 9 2 Screw PP 08H7355 10 NP Bracket Power Connector 11 1 Screw M4x6 PP 08H7355 12 1 Screw M3x8 without washer PP 08H7355 13 63H6010 1 Supply Power 220 V 4247 A00 001 002 13 08H7257 1 Supply Power 120 V 4247 A00 001 002 13 01P7580 1 Supply Power Auto Ranging 4247 003 14 8 Screw PP 08H7356 15 1 Board Logic See ELECTRONICS II 16 08H7367 1 Card Serial Attachment 4247 A00 17 4 Screw M3x8 with washer PP 08H7355 18 1 Washer PP 63H6001 19 08H7261 1 Strip Ground 20 2 Screw M3x30 PP 08H7355 21 1 Nut M3 PP 63H6001 22 1 Nut M3 PP 63H6001 23 NP Bracket 24 AR Module Microcode Models A00 001 002 See ELECTRONICS II 25 01P7584 1 Cover Plate Attachment Card 4247 003 with 2 screws 26 01P7585 1 Guide assembly Attachment Card 4247 003 with 2 support posts 27 01P7621 1 Interposer Connector with Ground Strap Attachment Card 4247 003 28 6 Screw M3x4 without washer PP08H7355 29 2 Screw M3x4 with washer PP08H7355 Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 476 Assembly 8 Electronics Il 17 s Microcode Module Extractor ModelAO0 Model
119. 8 ate 3 E o zs E cn ee 2 yn 26 2 2 Q J U19 a G ad me E lt i g Lu Figure 125 Models A00 001 and 002 logic board diagram Table 53 Module Reference List Board Position Module Name Function U35 U36 L6203 Carriage Motor U34 L298 Paper Feed Motor Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 387 Table 53 Module Reference List continued Board Position Module Name Function U37 L6219 Ribbon Drive Motor U19 L293 Ribbon Lift Motor U20 L293 Select Tractor Assembly Motor inside U38 L6219 AFTA Motor Q1 364 D2 AFTA Needle 5 Note For the following lines A stationary side B moving side 01 top most needles 09 bottom most needles Needle 01 row a Needle 06 row a Needle 03 row a Needle 04 row a Needle 05 row a Needle 09 row b Needle 08 row a Needle 09 row a Needle 02 row b Needle 07 row b Needle 02 row b Needle 08 row b U31 L295 U32 L295 U33 L295 U30 L295 U29 L295 U28 L295 U26 L295 Needle 03 row b Needle 06 row b Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 388 Table 53 Module Reference List continued Board Position Module Name Function U27 L295 Needle 04 row b Needle 05 row b U25 L295 Needle 07 row b Needle 01 row b Q6 Q2 BDX53C 363 2D Moving ruby coil U18 HC4052 Paper presence sensors Carriage home position sensor Thermal printh
120. 82 NPS 642 p n 30H4083 or NPS 542 p n 30H4055 using an external power supply see EET 21 0n page 155 LAN attachment not shown on operator panel display Model 003 with LAN card No communication between LAN card and logic board 1 Loosen screws and reseat the LAN card 2 ERG the LAN card See Model 00 Replace the interposer connector See Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 152 Symptom Probable Cause Action Network or packet light continues to flash after power on Internal error occurred For external NPS all models 1 Disconnect the power cable at the NPS unit 2 Wait 10 seconds then reconnect the power cable 3 If the problem continues replace the NPS unit For LAN attachment Model 003 1 Power off on the printer LAN must be shown on the display 2 Ifthe problem continues replace the LAN card See Model 003 Test page will not print For external NPS all models 1 Check that parallel configuration values are at factory defaults 2 Unplug the NPS unit at the parallel port and reseat 3 Press and hold the test button on the NPS unit until the Network or Packet light flashes then release the test button 4 Ifthe test page still does not print perform the parallel port wrap test on the printer 5 Ifthe parallel port wrap test passes replace the NPS unit 6 Ifthe parallel port wrap test fails replace the printer logic board
121. 97 Contents 4 How to Print the Printer Configuration and the Custom Sets lll 198 How to Print and Clear the Error Log and Print the Usage Metrics 0 198 How To Run the Test and Diagnostic T amp D Programs 201 T amp D Descriptions s s s ss ss 585 beet eee eee ewe ee See eee ee eae eee eee ee 204 T amp D Error Messages and Actions Models 001 002 and 003 2 004 231 Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams ll lll lll sss ss sss s 240 Wiring Diagrams 22 xesmde mom RURCOE E ORBE eee es Ones mom mh eA AS e UR OA CRUS Eos XR Se ERA 240 Printhead and Motors Wiring Diagrams 2 2 ll lel ese 240 Cable Diagrams 4 2 4 eae eek dem om ee ek ue ub Sore kh deba Rock S ER ee Ee ec Ep abe nd 258 Attachment Connectors s xk cm aem X RO 4 9 BE RES X A OR 8 Ge SOE ETRE RE Um oH SE Ee em oe UR 262 Chapter 4 Locations s 2 lt 6 2 ox dee XR os Soe Be ee eek C Ree ER ee wee EORR UE We die 265 Locations and Orientations s x xc om EORR S OX EUR e CRURUE E ede Kok uh GR D ADS Roe Wl ES SS 266 Logic Board Microcode Module Locations and Orientation Model AOO 2 266 Logic Board Microcode Module Locations and Orientation Models 001 and 002 268 Attachment Card Microcode Module Location and Orientation Models 001 and 002 269 Microcode Module Label Model AOO 2 22 ern 270 Microcode Module Label Models
122. AFTA mechanism Use the wheel as an indicator as you adjust the distance between the print needles and the platen Each numeral change on the wheel represents 0 1 mm 0 004 in change of AFTA gap Thus each mark on the wheel represents a movement half that amount or 0 05 mm 0 002 in The numbers 0 through 6 are printed on the wheel but the numbers can be considered to go beyond the 6 to an implied number of 13 Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 286 E90ARB13 Figure 54 AFTA Indicator Wheel Notice the position of the pointer on 1 1 To gain access to the wheel remove the left side cover 2 Verify the smooth rotation of the wheel Hand cycle the wheel clockwise as viewed from that end of the printer to a higher value until the mechanical stop is against the frame This is the full open gap position The travel of this rotation should equal about 10 to 11 numbers on the wheel The travel through the entire range must be smooth and free of any binding as you rotate the wheel to full open then to the full close position If you feel any binding a Check the AFTA intermediate gear gray and the wheel white for damaged teeth Replace if necessary b Ensure the AFTA motor is not pushed upward too much against the AFTA intermediate gear Loosen and retighten the AFTA motor screws This will allow the AFTA motor to fall away from the AFTA intermediate gear Check the ends of the large
123. AR PAPER TIMEOUT TEAR OFF AT INPUT AND PRESS EJECT Coax interface only 092 FANFOLD EJECT condition exceeded 60 seconds Tear off paper before entering the printer and press Eject to allow operation to complete Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 139 Table 18 Error Messages for Models 001 002 and 003 continued Message Description Action 050 MACHINE CHECK ERR XXX Firmware error in Supervisor code Power off and power on the printer If message remains install a new Logic 051 MACHINE CHECK ERR XXX Firmware error in interpreter code Power off and power on the printer If message remains install a new Logic 052 MACHINE CHECK ERR XXX Firmware error in print manager code Power off and power on the printer If message remains install a new Logic 053 MACHINE CHECK ERR 2XX 053 MACHINE CHECK ERR 42X Firmware error in engine code Power off and power on the printer If message remains install a new Logic 053 MACHINE CHECK ERR 3XX The firmware detected a data integrity error Power off and power on the printer If message remains see FMAP 0140 053 MACHINE CHECK ERR 40X Firmware error detected during initialization of ribbon motion sensor message remains see MAP 0160 Ribbon Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 140 Table 18 Error Messages for Models 001 002 and 003 continued Message Description Actio
124. Center Characters Figure 15 Bidirectional Adjustment Printout The alignment is correct if the appears in the center of the H 3 The following message will display PRESS A KEY 4 Press any key to feed the paper back into the printer and the following message will display YES lt STORE gt NO 5 If A alignment adjustment is correct press the Micro key to store the first print line position See step 9 6 If the vertical alignment adjustment is not correct press the Load Form Feed key to view the next display VERT X Chapter 2 Diagnostics 179 Note X can be any number between 6 and 6 7 lf the Iis closer to the left leg of the H decrease the number If the I is closer to the right leg of the H increase the number Press the Micro key for a positive value Press the Load Form Feed key for a negative value The range is 6 to 6 Each unit is 0 212 mm 0 0083 in or aae 1 120 in 8 Press the Micro Y key to print the new ediustment See step IA 9 f an error message is displayed go to FT amp 10 The test completed successfully if the display HUS to the next test number T amp D17 Tear Off Line Adjustment Test This test allows you to adjust the tear off position from the operator panel The value set by this test becomes the tear off position when the configuration menu item Tear Adjustment is set to 0 at the operator panel If the s id is the following go t
125. Cover Seals 3 14 08H7339 1 Cover ASF Rear 15A 01P75351 1 Cover 4247 A00 001 002 Rear Main with low voltage label 15B 01P7536 1 Cover 4247 A00 001 002 Rear Main with high voltage label 15C 01P7682 1 Cover 4247 003 Rear Main with universal label 15D 08H7356 2 Screw Rear Main Cover 16 08H7345 1 Door Rear Tractor Paper 17 08H7349 1 Hinge Right Acoustic Cover Packaged 5 Per Pack 18 08H7369 1 Cover ASF Stacker Top 19 01P4764 1 Guide Wire Forms 20 63H6067 1 Guide ASF Top Wire Support Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 462 Assembly 2 Tractor Assembly Automatic Sheet Feeder and Stacker o a lt S o I Asm Part Index Number WUnits Description 2 1 63H6069 1 Tractor Assembly 2 08H7090 1 Stacker Assembly 3 08H6955 1 2nd or 3rd Bin Automatic Sheet Feeder Assembly Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 463 Assembly 2 continued Asm Part Index Number WUnits Description 4 08H7094 1 Support Paper 5 08H6952 1 1st Bin Automatic Sheet Feeder Assembly 6 08H7364 1 e Cover Electronics Card 7 08H7092 1 Cap left Packaged 5 Per Pack 8 08H7365 1 Deflector 9 08H7093 1 Cap right Packaged 5 Per Pack 10 08H7091 1 Plate 11 08H7368 1 Kit ASF Board and Cable Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 464 Assembly 3 Printer Mechanical Assembly and Base Asm Part Index Number Units Description
126. Diagnostics 188 x1 x2 x3 are numbers in hexadecimal format corresponding to the measured voltages with resolution of 20 mV The display is continuously updated to track sensor output changes Press the Micro key to go to step dl 9 The following displays Y REPEAT TEST N Press the Micro key to restart from path status step lt on page 1868 Press the Load Form Feed key to end the test 10 The following message displays after the test has been completed END T amp D 11 To exit the T amp D program power off O the printer Chapter 2 Diagnostics 189 T amp D Error Messages and Actions Table 27 lists the messages that may occur while you are performing Test and Diagnostic procedures Table 27 T amp D Error Messages and Action Error Message Description Action TD 0 FRU 0 1 Microcode Error Replace the logic board TD 1 FRU 5 X Microcode Error Replace the logic board TD 2 FRU 5 1 Microcode Error Replace the logic board TD 3 FRUS32 Microcode Error Replace the logic board TD 4 FRU 53 Microcode Error Replace the logic board Chapter 2 Diagnostics 190 Table 27 T amp D Error Messages and Action continued Error Message Description Action TD 5 FRU TA Operator Panel Failure 4 This error can occur if a key is not pressed in less than 10 seconds Run T amp D0O5 again to verify the problem Replace the mE panel
127. E ER HE ES 548 Appendix C Flashing the Memory of the Model 003 oll 549 Flashing the Memory ofthe Model 003 llle 549 Downloading Model 003 Microcode from the IBM First Service System l database 549 Downloading Model 003 Microcode from your computer into the flash memory 551 Part Number Inde8X ue wok rok x Ro x SED m m we 3 PERE eRe ew CREO RES ox EID s E ES 557 NIU xor e es he PERERA RE Re Ree eae Nees ee sue msbSXsgoeE ed d x E 561 Contents 8 Safety Information This section contains information that you need to be familiar with before servicing this printer Safety Notices There are two levels of safety notices that appear in this Maintenance Information Danger calls attention to a situation that is potentially lethal or extremely hazardous to people Caution calls attention to a situation that is potentially hazardous to people The following notices are the Dangers and Cautions used in the Maintenance Information Attention notices Important notices and Notes may be located throughout the Maintenance Information but are not listed here Non English translations of Safety and Caution notices are located in BM 4247 Printer Safety Notices SA24 4406 A DANGER To prevent serious personal injury from electrical shock when connecting or disconnecting the interface cable set the printer power switch to O Off and unplug the power cable Copyright IBM Corp
128. E MFG DEFAULTS Table 64 Restore Mfg Defaults No Yes s Manufacturing Default ae When Emulation is set to Native 4247 4202 Ill XL or 2381 When Emulation is set to Epson FX Program Configuration Menu How To Print the Program Setup Configuration Power on the printer Load forms Press the Menu Enter key The printer goes off line and the message PRINT OUT NO displays To print the settings press the Pitch key The message PRINT OUT YES displays and the Program Setup Printout is printed are NS Program Configuration Printout Sample Printout Showing Factory Defaults Ju shows the factory default settings for the Program Configuration for a Model A00 printer Appendix A Printer Configuration 492 Program Setup Printout TEAR POS ADJUST FRONT PATH 0 REAR PATH 0 1 FORM PER PATH PATH MANUAL FEED PATH FRONT PUSH PATH REAR PUSH IMPACT SOFT IMPACT SOFT IMPACT SOFT PERF SAFE NO PERF SAFE NO PERF SAFE NO AFTA 0 AFTA 0 AFTA 0 HORIZ ADJUST 10 HORIZ ADJUST 10 HORIZ ADJUST 10 VERT ADJUST e VERT ADJUST 0 VERT ADJUST 0 LINE SP 6 LPI LINE SP 6 LPI LINE SP 6 LPI LINE SP LOCK NO LINE SP LOCK NO LINE SP LOCK NO PAGE LENGTH LTR PAGE LENGTH 66 PAGE LENGTH 66 TOP OF FORM 0 TOP OF FORM 0 TOP OF FORM 0 SKIP PERF 0 SKIP PERF 0 SKIP PERF 0 FONT DP FONT DP FONT DP PITCH 10 CPI PITCH 10 CPI PITCH 10 CPI PITCH LOCK NO PITCH LOCK NO PITCH LOCK NO LEFT MARGIN 0 LEFT MARGIN 0 LEFT MARGIN 0 RIGHT MARGIN 80
129. E t Lt Module U54 Bevel Corner Cut Off 8 jj 4247 001 Level3 9 Figure 122 Models 001 and 002 Rear View of Microcode Module Locations and Orientation Replacement 1 Follow the removal steps in reverse order Note Be certain the front edge of the logic board is inserted between the metal tabs on the frame 2 Ensure the non metal washer is installed as shown in Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 383 Note When the non metal washer is not installed the frame ground is connected to the dc ground The default is washer installed The NPS 540 can be used without an external power supply only if 5 V dc is enabled supplied on pin 18 of the printer parallel attachment connector NPS devices p n 30H4082 30H4083 30H4055 cannot be powered by pin 18 and always require an external 12 V ac power supply There is no danger of damaging any NPS or other computer devices when 5 V dc is enabled on pin 18 The new logic board you will receive will have a 2 pin jumper installed on either a 2 pin or a 3 pin connector located near the parallel attachment connector To attach the NPS Ethernet 540 p n 30H4054 to the 4247 printer without an external power supply a Find the 2 pin jumper and connector b If a 2 pin jumper is installed on a 2 pin connector then 5 V dc is enabled to pin 18 c lfa2 pin jumper is installed on a 3 pin connector as shown in Figure 4 18 use the chart below and verify the jumper is installed to enable 5
130. FORMS TIMEOUT LOAD FORMS BIN Coax interface only False 001 END OF FORMS condition exceeded 60 seconds Forms do not load when Load Eject is pressed No forms movement Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 138 Table 18 Error Messages for Models 001 002 and 003 continued Message Description Action 032 FORMS JAMMED TIMEOUT CLEAR JAM AND RELOAD FORMS Coax interface only 033 TEAR PAPER TIMEOUT TEAR OFF AT OUTPUT AND PRESS PARK Coax interface only 002 FORMS JAMMED FRONT TRACTOR or 020 FORMS JAMMED REAR TRACTOR condition exceeded 60 seconds Jam detected at the front or rear tractor jam sensor 091 FANFOLD PARK condition exceeded 60 seconds 1 Tear off paper after exit from the printer 2 Press Park to allow operation to complete 034 INVALID FORMS SELECT TIMEOUT FORMS NAME SELECT NEW DEVICE Coax interface only Message and form name alternate on the first line of the display 014 INVALID FORMS SELECT condition exceeded 60 seconds Perform one of the following Restart job Cancel job Select another source and restart the job e Run the job with current source Refer to a 4247 User s Guide for more detail 035 MARGIN ERROR TIMEOUT ADJUST MARGIN OR LINE LENGTH Coax interface only 005 MARGIN ERROR condition exceeded 60 seconds Press Stop then Start Left margin value will be reset to 10 for current line only 036 TE
131. Feed key to view the next display F FR XXX Note X can be any number between 128 to 127 7 To move the first print line closer to the top of the paper press the Load Form Feed key To move the first print line down away from the top of the paper press the Micro key The range is 128 to 127 Each unit is approximately 0 2 mm 8 Press the Micro J key using the new adjustment value See step d 9 To exit this test without adjusting the rear first print line press the Load Form Feed key 10 To run the rear first print line test ensure a tractor assembly is installed in the rear position 11 Install fanfold paper in the tractor assembly YES F RE ADJ NO Note F RE is First print line REar tractor ADJustment 12 To select the test for the rear first print line adjustment press the Micro key LOAD PAPER 13 Install the fanfold paper in the rear tractor assembly 14 Press the Micro key 15 The following message will display F RE XXX 16 A block of the Es will be printed on the first print line The paper will feed to a position for viewing Note the position of the first print line on the paper 17 The following message will display PRESS A KEY Chapter 2 Diagnostics 177 18 Press any key to feed the paper back into the printer and the following message will display YES lt STORE gt NO If the first print line adjustment is correct press the Micr
132. Install a new Operator panel assembly Of Install a new EMI filter assembly used only with Model A00 early level logic Or Install a new operator panel cable assembly Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Model ave see Hon To Run the Test and Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 81 Table 11 MAP 0150 Power Supply continued Questions Actions Yes No 9 a Power off O the printer Go to step td Power off O the printer b Connect the sensor connector Install a new sensor cable assembly c Power on the printer Does the power supply fan run OK Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer TEE For Model A00 see 10 a Power off O the printer Go to step Ht on page 83 Power off O the printer b Connect the tractor cable assembly connector c Power on the printer Does the power supply fan run OK Install a new tractor cable assembly Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Model A00 see Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 82 Table 11 MAP 0150 Power Supply continued Questions Actions Yes No a Power off O the printer b Connect the printhead cable connector s c Power on the printer Does the power supply fan run OK Go to step hal Power off O the printer Install new printhead cables or Install a new print
133. Interlock Test 185 Index 565 Test and Diagnostic information Model Test and Diagnostic information Models U A00 continued 001 and 002 continued T amp D20 NLQ Printhead Mode T amp D Descriptions continued posi un 1 REA Select test 185 T amp D20 NLQ Printhead Mode usage dinetics 198 T amp D Error Messages 190 Select test 222 9 Test and Diagnostic information Models T amp D21 Paper Path Sensor 001 and 002 Test 224 V How To Run T amp D Tests 201 Dr b i Board LINK Voltages 156 s ps T amp D31 Adapter Board CPU listing of 204 Test 227 W T amp DO1 Microcode Test 204 T amp D02 Microcode Test 204 ern 5 d Board EPROM We ol or T amp D04 Microcode Test 205 in iring Viagrams T amp D33 Adapter Board Dynamic RAM Test 228 T amp D34 Adapter Board Static RAM Test 228 T amp D35 Adapter Board Shared RAM Test 229 T amp D36 Adapter Board BCP T amp D05 Operator Panel LED and Key Test 205 T amp DO6 Parallel Interface Test 206 T amp DO8 Microcode Test 207 T amp D10 Stacker ASF Test 208 T amp D11 Pinch Roller Status Sensor Tuning Ribbon Feed and Lift Motors Test 229 Test 208 T amp D12 AFTA Calibrate Test 212 dd Rd Board Digital T amp D13 Not Used 214 T amp D14 Fanfold Form Printout T amp D38 Adapter Board Analog Test 214 Test 230 T amp D15 First Line Printing T amp D Error Messages 291 Test 215 Tests and Diagnostics Models 001 002 T amp D16 Bidirectional Adjustment and 003 197
134. Messages and Actions continued Error Message Description Action TD 35 FRU 7 35 Attachment Card Replace the attachment card Shared RAM Failure TD 36 FRU 7 36 Attachment Card BCP Failure TD 37 FRU 7 37 Attachment Card BCP Digital Failure Chapter 2 Diagnostics 238 Table 28 T amp D Error Messages and Actions continued Error Message Description Action TD 38 FRU 7 38 Attachment Card Replace the attachment card BCP Analog Failure S Note The coax interface must be disconnected from the attachment card TD 38 FRU 7 38 The twinax interface must have the self terminating cable PN 38F8254 connected Notes Can be any number This error message will display if a loop back connector is not installed Press the Form Feed key to bypass this test If a loop back connector is installed perform the recommended action This error can occur in any test that requires a mechanical operation T amp D 11 12 14 15 16 17 or 18 This error can be 00 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 Chapter 2 Diagnostics 239 Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams Wiring Diagrams Printhead and Motors Wiring Diagrams OVERVIEW This section contains the wiring diagrams for the printhead motors and cables See Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers S229 8124 for grounding procedures Figure 24 on page 2411 shows the location of the green yellow ground wi
135. N Coax Attention The electronic parts of this printer can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Use ESD protection devices and procedures including a static discharge wrist strap while working on the printer A DANGER To prevent serious personal injury from electrical shock when connecting or disconnecting the interface cable set the printer power switch to O Off and unplug the power cord A DANGER Do not connect or disconnect any communication port teleport attachment connector or power cord during an electrical storm Removal 1 Power off O the printer and unplug the power cord from the printer 2 Disconnect the host cable from the Attachment Card 3 Loosen the two thumbscrews holding the Attachment Card in place 4 Holding the thumbscrews with both hands or the handle if this is a LAN card gently pull the Attachment Card from the Attachment Card Port Hold the Attachment Card only by its edges and faceplate 6 Place the Card in a static shielding bag when not in use 9o Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 359 ee eee a e61a3143 Replacement Follow the Attachment Card Removal procedure above in reverse order Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 360 Model 003 IPDS and SCS Feature Identification The Model 003 can be connected to a host by using one of the following attachment features e Twinax SCS e Twinax IPDS e Coax SCS e Coax IPDS Proper operati
136. N amp level how to print Model A00 160 Models 001 002 197 first print line adjustment about 294 First Printing Line Adjustment Test T amp D15 Model A00 175 First Printing Line Adjustment Test T amp D15 Models 001 and 002 215 Flashing the Memory of the Model 003 549 Forms 531 forms considerations environmental requirements 546 other 533 specifications 531 stacking recommendations 539 forms feed problems MAP 130 No Paper Movement 62 MAP 131 Paper Path Sensor 66 MAP 190 Forms Feed Problems 101 forms path choosing 531 for special forms 532 forms specifications 539 front push path service check 310 H How to Print Firmware P N amp Level Model AOO 160 How to Print Firmware P N amp Level Models 001 and 002 197 How to Print the Error Log Models 001 and 002 198 How to Print the Power On Configuration Model A00 160 How to Print the Print Test Model A00 160 Index 562 How to Print the Printer Configuration Models 001 and 002 198 How to Print the Printer Demonstration Models 001 and 002 197 How to Print the Program Setup Model AOO 161 How to Run T amp D Program Model A00 161 How to Run T amp D Program Models 001 and 002 201 intermittent failures MAP 130 L LED and Test Page Problems 152 location connectors 271 microcode modules 266 Locations 265 Logic Board Model 003 366 Logic Board Models 001 and 002 370 378 Logic Board Component Inspection Reference 385 logic boar
137. ND DIAGNOSTIC IN PROGRESS PLEASE WAIT flashing MODEL 003 SEE USER S GUIDE A new type of attachment card was found during the current power on This will occur on the first power on following the installation of a new card Press Start to confirm installing a new attachment card and to continue power on initialization After the code transfer is complete Coax or Twinax will be displayed on the operator s panel 203 ATTACHMENT CARD FAILURE MODEL 003 SEE USER S GUIDE An error occurred during attachment card flash memory power on initialization The problem may be from the base code the attachment card the attachment card interposer connector or the logic board 1 oe the basecode See a If you are having difficulty physically installing the attachment card inspect the attachment card guide assembly and the interposer connector for damage Replace if necessary See ar Coal Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 144 Table 18 Error Messages for Models 001 002 and 003 continued Message Description Action 220 SERIAL DSR ERROR MODEL 003 TWINAX CODE SEE USER S GUIDE A remote connection serial interface error condition was detected The Data Set Ready or Data Carrier Detect signal was not sensed See MAP 0 221 SERIAL OVERFLOW ERROR MODEL 003 TWINAX CODE SEE USER S GUIDE A serial input buffer overflow error condition was detected Data has been los
138. NGER Do not connect or disconnect any communication port teleport attachment connector or power cord during an electrical storm Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 35 Table 4 MAP 0120 Attachment Model A00 Step Questions Actions Yes No 1 The following items are listed with the most probable failing item first Check the first list item and test the printer If the printer still fails continue with the next list item a Communications cable and connector pins b Model A00 Press and hold the Menu Enter key and power on the printer Release the Menu Enter key after initialization and press the Pitch key to print the power on configuration Model 003 Press Stop and Test and scroll down to PRINTER CONFIGURATION and Enter To print the current configuration lt X gt on the display Ensure that the following settings match the host settings for your parallel or serial attachment Parallel Model A00 INTF SELECT IN DATA BITS NATIVE EMUL CHAR SET LANG Model 003 INTERFACE TYPE SELECT IN EMULATION MODE CHARACTER SET PRINT LANGUAGE Serial Model A00 INTF BAUD DATA BITS PARITY PACING CONNECT NATIVE EMUL CHAR SET LANG Model 003 INTERFACE TYPE DATA BITS BAUD RATE PARITY PACING PROTOCOL CONNECTION TYPE EMULATION MODE CHARACTER SET PRINT LANGUAGE Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 36 Table 4 MAP 0120 Attachment Model A00
139. O the printer Check the paper bail setting The paper bail is removed from the printer when the rear pull forms path is used When the paper bail is installed ensure that it is as shown here Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 301 LEVEL 1 BAIL NO TAB LEVEL 2 BAIL WITH TAB When closed the bail end caps are Tab touches even with frame at this point frame hc0z0002 Figure 56 Correct Installed Position for Paper Bail r NOTE The paper bail may be slightly different than the ones shown here Later models may have a coil spring 3 Check the forms guide metal deflector setting The forms guide has a metal forms guide deflector that has two positions The closed up position is used for rear tractor pull configurations The open down position is used for front or rear tractor push manual sheet feed and ASF configurations Ensure that the metal forms guide deflector is in the correct position for the paper path configuration being used Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 302 Metal Forms Guide Deflector Closed PULL Position 3 SS 2 iw Lo oJ i H g i Metal Forms Guide Deflector LN Open PUSH I ri Position si Figure 57 Paper Guide Metal Deflector CLOSED and OPEN Use the following table to ensure the correct positions Table 47 Paper Bail and Paper Guide Positions Selected Paper Path Forms Guide
140. OR there may be a problem with printhead needle 5B ES R for Model AOO or 0 for Models ma 002 and 003 to investigate the AFTA ERROR Verify that under AFTA motor conirol the wheel turns clockwise to the full open position near the 9 to 10 mark and counterclockwise to the full close position near the 0 to 2 mark Park and reload the forms a few times to verify that the wheel position is repeatable e f the wheel does not rotate power off O the printer and check the AFTA motor connections the AFTA motor and the logic board e If the printer displays the 55 055 AFTA ERROR message the AFTA 5B measurement needle is faulty Replace the printhead f the wheel does not move to the full open position then to the full close position power off O the printer and check for binds in the AFTA mechanism e When the wheel will move repeatedly to full open and back to the same position note for later use the closed position number near the 0 to 2 mark For later discussion identify that number as A Verify AFTA calibration using thicker or multiple part forms 1 Park single part forms 2 Set the operator panel menu item AFTA O Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 289 ra With loose forms back fold the beginning of the forms along a left to right perforation Mount these forms onto the tractor pins The printer now has a combined paper thickness of approximately 0 2 m 0 008 in Perform a Load operation on this do
141. ORMS JAM message after the operator loaded forms the forms may have been loaded too far onto the tractor or blocked the paper presence sensor Thus when attempting to reload the forms the sensor has already sensed paper and will display the message Instruct the customer that when loading forms to install the forms with the top edge of the first form to be near the square drive shaft of the tractor assembly or Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 296 If the printer displayed a 02 099 FORMS JAM message while an operator was performing a Park operation advise the operator that the forms perforation must be torn off at the tear bar before confirming the Park operation The error occurs when the printer backs up the forms but does not detect that the paper is back on the tractor The printer stops and displays 02 099 FORMS JAM 2 Ensure that the bellcrank the mechanism on the left end of the platen is working correctly The bellcrank raises and lowers the pinch rollers The paper presence sensor for the rear forms path is mounted on the pinch roller The bellcrank mechanism must be functioning correctly for the sensor to operate correctly Platen Gear N gS Bellcrank Washer e90aas4 Figure 55 Bellcrank Location Must be located between platen gear and washer Ensure the bellcrank is captured between the washer and the gear Load forms into the rear forms path and verify that the pinch rollers raise a
142. RIGHT MARGIN 136 RIGHT MARGIN 136 SLASH ZERO NO SLASH ZERO NO SLASH ZERO NO e61a0081 Figure 195 Model A00 Program Configuration Printout Changing a Value In the Program Configuration Menu 1 2 Press Menu Enter The printer goes offline is not ready and the message PRINT OUT N0 displays If you want to print the current settings on the printer press The message PRINT OUT YES displays and the Program Configuration Setup Printout is printed or If you want to change a Category press until you find the Category you want Depending on which Category you want to change press gt t or to scroll through the Parameters and Values Appendix A Printer Configuration 493 5 Once you find the Value you want press Y until the message STORE QUIT displays 6 If you want to exit the Program Configuration menu without saving the value you just selected press Menu Enter and the previous value remains valid OF 7 Press gt and the message STORE SAVE displays If you want to save the new value permanently in NVRAM Non Volatile Random Access Memory press Menu Enter and the value is saved OF 8 Press and the message STORE CURRENT displays Press Menu Enter and the new value remains valid until the printer is powered off O 9 Press Online to make the printer ready Note Entering the Power On Configuration menu through the Program Configuration menu does not allow you to access the PULL o
143. S48 C165 i D ss RS50 Wak E E Es U25 U30 U29 o fs ky RS5Z RS218 Fa s E RS74 e zi EREEF Ser E U11 d e B i olo x 2 olaf llelo len eus e ene s ects E zol Sisi Eso EE 2 rare i38 lo C122 Sle 25555 S825 55 PL RSE x x 9jx x x 9 x x v o_ices U35 cr ea ee U U3 RSTS 8 27 1 K 2 pRS47 eT RS48 o o RS44 Se RS170 LES g EST e ls 200g RS106 La Pr RST68 ate SA e a ee U19 2 Yn 26 22 p Ut9 w Q 25 1 au 21 H Ye JI rsz 5 Ce j Ti7L e ofa U44C3o HE J 5 E oC cas of_icas Ce c206 L ec2 RS29500 RS2960 _ _ u49 La ZL oe Og D uw J us RAIO RAG RAM 5 un 19 36 1 18 3 U won RS 144 i DOR 7 zooi UR U10 z U3 733 RSI3 9 ps 5 Ee g RS165 o U45 C128 TO em lo E E 8 8 uss gt RS248 C235 5 Sa 0235S 2 P Xena i RS 39Cje Vo e Cj U64 RSIAY RA RAG RAT 3 ama a eas Ras OO ms p 8 88 Ss aa ee u70 E gi ots Q i eo gt o 0O000000000000000000000000000009 837 Pir Poe ee A32 u69 J4 u63 u68 RS303 eti Figure 124 Model 003 logic board diagram also similar to later Models A00 001 and 002 Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments E90ACB4 386 a RS119 te Ll 2m zu
144. SF Bin 3 AFTA 10 0 to 60 0 24 to 576 0 5 to 3 Fixed 1 to 8 ASF Bin 3 Left ASF Bin 3 Paper Load Position Manual Feed AFTA Margin Alignment 10 0 to 60 0 24 to 576 0 5 to 3 Fixed 1 to 8 Appendix A Printer Configuration 515 Table 87 Printer Adjustment continued Manual Feed Left Manual Feed Paper Margin Alignment Load Position 10 o 0 to 60 24 to 576 DISPLAY LANGUAGE Table 88 Display Language 000 English 010 Suomi SEND BUFFER REPRINT CODE Table 89 Send Buffer Reprint Code Yes No VITAL PRODUCT DATA Table 90 Vital Product Data Serial Number Device Specific Information XXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX j Manufacturing Default 25 When Emulation Mode is set to 4247 4202 III XL or 2381 Personal Printer When Emulation Mode is set to Epson FX t When Emulation Mode is set to Epson FX only Compatibility Options 3 6 and 8 are available Appendix A Printer Configuration 516 Twinax Attachment Configuration Configurations to which this menu applies Using the twinax attachment with Models 001 and 002 Using the twinax base code and no attachment serial twinax or LAN attachment with the Model 003 Table 91 Twinax Configuration Menu CATEGORIES Configuration Storage See Attachment with twinax See J O J Rear Tractor Use rear tractor installed S
145. TACHMENT CARD Models 001 002 066 PRINTER BOARD FAILURE Models 001 002 200 ATTACHMENT INCOMPATIBLE Model 003 203 ATTACHMENT CARD FAILURE Model 003 Print Test OK no print from host Incorrect or garbled print wrong characters print Suspected FRUs Causes Printer configuration Logic board includes parallel attachment Host cable Models 001 002 coax or twinax attachment card Model 003 plug connection Logic board includes parallel attachment Note Printing in hexadecimal code is available to aid service personnel and programmers for host program debug Press the Stop key the Hex Print key and the Start key Printing will now be in hexadecimal code Refer to a 4247 User s Guide for instructions Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 41 A DANGER To prevent serious personal injury from electrical shock when connecting or disconnecting the interface cable set the printer power switch to O Off and unplug the power cable AN DANGER Do not connect or disconnect any communication port teleport attachment connector or power cord during an electrical storm Table 6 MAP 0121 Attachment Models 001 002 or 003 Step Questions Actions Yes No 1 Are you here due to a 065 066 200 or 203 display Go to step bl Go to step A on page 44 message 2 Are you here due to a 065 or 066 message Go to step B on page 43l Go to step A on page 44
146. Table 30 22 Pin Printhead Connector 18 Wire Printhead Pin Names Pin Names 1 Wire 1A Coil 2 Wire 1A Coil 3 Column A 4 Column B Shifter Coil Shifter Coil Wire 2A Coil 6 Wire 2A Coil Wire 3A Coil 8 Wire 3A Coil Wire 4A Coil 10 Wire 4A Coil 11 Wire 5A Coil 12 Wire 5A Coil 13 Wire 6A Coil 14 Wire 6A Coil 15 Wire 7A Coil 16 Wire 7A Coil 17 Wire 8A Coil 18 Wire 8A Coil 19 Wire 9A Coil 20 Wire 9A Coil 21 Wire 9B Coil 22 Wire 9B Coil Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams 243 Table 31 26 Pin Printhead Connector 18 Wire Printhead 1 Pin Names Pin Names 1 Not Used 2 Not Used Not Used 4 Not Used Thermal 6 Thermal Sensor Ground Sensor 7 Wire 2B Coil 8 Wire 2B Coil Wire 3B Coil 10 Wire 3B Coil 11 Wire 4B Coil 12 Wire 4B Coil 13 Wire 8B Coil 14 Wire 8B Coil 15 Wire 7B Coil 16 Wire 7B Coil 17 Wire 6B Coil 18 Wire 6B Coil 19 Wire 5B Coil 20 Wire 5B Coil 21 Wire 1B Coil 22 Wire 1B Coil 23 Ribbon Lift Pin 24 Ribbon Lift Pin 2 3 25 Ribbon Lift Pin 26 Ribbon Lift Pin 4 9 Wire Printhead Wiring Model 002 The printhead is an electromagnetic non ballistic type It has one column of 9 wires Wire 1 is at the top Needle 5 is used for AFTA paper thickness measurements The printhead is connected to the logic board by a 26 pin cable Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams 244 9 Wire Pr
147. Test TEAR FRONT ADJ YES NO 3 To adjust the tear off line for the front tractor feed press the Line Feed key 4 f you want to advance to the rear tear off line adjustment now press the Start key The procedure to adjust either front or rear tear off line is the same 5 If fanfold paper is not loaded the display is T amp D17 Tear Off Line Adjustment Test LOAD PAPER 6 Install fanfold paper in the front or rear tractor assembly 7 Press the Load Eject key 8 Aline of Xs will be printed on the first print line The paper will feed to the tear off bar for viewing The Xs should be completely on the paper The top of the X s should be approximately 1 mm 0 04 in below the erforation If this condition does not exist perform FT amp o bage 215 and then return here 9 The following message displays T amp D17 Tear Off Line Adjustment Test TEAR XXXX 0 RUN Chapter 2 Diagnostics 219 Form Perforation Line e61a0900 Tear Edge of Cover L Figure 23 Tear Off Position Only the earlier models had a serrated tear edge as shown If the tear off needs to be adjusted press the Line Feed key to move the paper up or press the Start key to move the paper down The range is 128 to 127 Each unit is approximately 0 2 mm 0 008 in When the tear off is correct go to the n
148. WO Nub ea See Bw HER 484 Model A00 Configuration Information uox oho mom mon ox es be PRS OE o Rex wow Ee Dee eS 485 Models 001 002 and 003 Configuration Information llle 499 Appendix B Supplies Forms Paths amp Environmental Considerations 531 OUSIVIEM Lu se eee aea ae aa URN RUPEE XE ee ae eee he GRECE eee Wes os eR af E SR s 531 OBBUDISS s e opa wor www EN dme SE ER he oa Boe ee Be PRENNE SR S NER d RE RUE HIS 531 Choosing a Forms Path for Your Needs aoaaa aa less ess ss 531 Choosing a Forms Path for Special Forms aoaaa ee bee Ge 6 RSE RES e we ee OR ee 532 Other Considerations TOF Forms lt lt 2 lt 2 2 468648 A a gt ede ee 9 Powe xo ban GH EHe ee es 533 Forms and Paper Specifications 2 2 i044 22846 FE 9 ed Xem X CX dl Re eRe ORO 4 534 Forms Stacking Recommendations lll llle s 539 Forms Stack Input and Output Locations 5 4 sc cmenck REGE Ele E X Rok E EO X REE ES ER De RUE OA 540 FOUNSPONS PPTCT I Se Bowe SS Oe hee as 541 Environmental Requirements am dum 42428664 Bee bed eee RS mob xm OE EHS ER SG 546 Operating Environment ese x oum ee oa Boe eee PE wee ee RES SEE REY ere CHE eS 546 Nonoperating Environment xxn cease OP Eee Ee bw eee eee EL EC COR SES ewe Ee Eee 547 Shipping Environment aoaaa 64664462488 de RUE WEES ESS ee EDO eAHS oe RIP Ee BOS 547 Storage Environment 2 6 me omo e484 Xm 3E RUE deb hoe DRED EES 1S3 EO EO
149. Wheel C Make T amp D 122 4 6 Finally choose the Estimate to use and Set the correct Print Gap a Write down Estimate A and Estimate B Compare them using the next chart Table 46 Estimate Comparison Action If Estimate B is equal to Estimate A or up to 0 5 greater than Use Estimate A for Print Gap Estimate A If Estimate B is greater than Estimate A by more than 0 5 Wheel Use Estimate A 0 5 for Print Gap number If Estimate B is LESS than Estimate A the print needles are Replace printhead amp repeat samples worn down b Set the correct Print Gap using T amp D 12 Change the T amp D 12 value until the Wheel goes to the Chosen Wheel position from step 6a c SAVE and exit the T amp Ds Standard AFTA Service Check and Adjustment AFTA Service is divided into 4 separate procedures Checks performed with power off Checks performed with power on Print quality check Gap check Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 285 Some procedures related to this section are found in this manual Model A00 Models 001 002 and 003 Model A00 Models 001 002 and 003 You can locate Print Test information in one of the 4247 User s Guides Power Off Check Perform this check if the AFTA indicator wheel wheel AFTA motor gears carriage shaft or platen have been removed at any time for service This check verifies the position of the wheel and the manual operation of the
150. X X X X X Reduces throughput by 5096 AFTA X X X X X Top of Form X X Vertical Adjustment X X Horizontal Adjustment X X X X ASF Mountable X i See note 1 Notes 1 IBM recommends you remove the ASF before loading forms into the rear push forms path 2 To use the push pull or dual push forms paths you must install the optional second forms tractor Choosing a Forms Path for Special Forms Note IBM recommends selecting first the front push then the rear push as your choices for forms paths The 4247 Printer can print on various sizes dimensions and WE of forms IBM recommends you test all forms for your application before ordering large quantities Use when you are choosing which path to use for special forms or paper Appendix B Supplies Forms Paths amp Environmental Considerations 532 Table 107 Selecting Path for Special Forms Types Forms Type Front Rear Rear Pull Push Manual Sheet Comments Push Push Pull Feed Black Back Forms X Labels 1 Part to 4 Part 5 Part to 8 Part Greater than 21 Ib Greater than 0 014 in thick For front push do not use Park X XIX XxX Xx X X XxX XK Xx lt XI X XxX Xx Prenumbered Forms XXIX XX KX Xx Critical Registration X Easiest to load in front push Set PERF SAFE YES for 8 part forms Form stock with stick on X X If multiple thicknesses on each sheet card or form or forms of remove Paper Bail varying thickness
151. able 7 Network Server Problems NPS and LAN Attachment Card 156 Reference Table 8 Power Supply Connector Pins and Voltages 156 Reference Table 9 Base Code Compatibilities 157 Reference Table 10 Ribbon Lift and 26 Pin Cable Connectors ole 158 Reference Table 11 Paper Paths llle 158 Reference Table 12 Minimum Microcode 0 sess 158 Chapter 2 Diagnostics a a lll sss Sos 160 Test and Diagnostic Information Model AOO 2 lle n 160 How To Print the Print TeSt gt e sso ee eae na Som CRE EER Ee ee Ree ewe Ee E 160 How To Print Firmware Part Number and Version Levels leen 160 How To Print the Power On Configuration 2 21 lt e se eek eece RP e ee eae ee ee ee we we ms 160 How Io Print th Program Setup Configuration 4 lt 22 86 25 82466 646 ee RE ORC eda 161 How To Run the Test and Diagnostic T amp D Programs 161 T amp D Descriptions ex a s doen mo 6o wobowm Eon aE EU Xo x bow RO eobweeeeuaunds 164 T amp D Error Messages and Actions w amp v ds EE 4o wx RU oo eek Se o4 ex SHER RE ER e 190 Test and Diagnostic Information Models 001 002 and 003 2 0 000002 ee eee 197 How To Print the Printer Demonstration ox ox mom ce xx oko wo 3 ees ea ee o oy X Rx RS 197 How To Print Firmware Part Number and Version Levels lee 1
152. act with the bottom of the belt is 0 9 0 05 kg 2 0 0 1 Ib 5 If the measurement is correct the service check is complete Stop here and return to the step that sent you here If the measurement is not correct go to the adjustment plo e90acb3 Figure 51 Carriage Belt Viewed From Top Teeth must align during measurement Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 279 oc justment Remove the printer covers See Printer Covers on page 3471 Loosen the lock nut and adjust the screw until a force of 0 85 to 0 95 kg 1 9 2 1 Ib is required to push the upper half of the belt center between the printhead and the left side frame to touch the bottom half of the belt Tighten the lock nut and check the adjustment again Repeat steps bl and Bl as needed Incorrect belt tension contributes to 56 056 errors also seen as margin shifts and printhead slams Carriage Support Shaft Service Check and Adjustment 1 e 3 Remove all paper the ribbon cartridge and the paper bail assembly Loosen the right side support shaft screw Measure the gap between the printhead and the platen at both ends of the platen right and left The correct gap is 0 25 to 0 30 mm 0 010 to 0 012 in when the AFTA indicator is pointed at 1 The correct difference in the gap between the left and right ends is 30 08 mm 0 003 in Using pliers rotate the eccentric bushing until a minimum difference between the left and right end
153. ad black back forms in the front p P P push rear pull or push pull forms paths Select another forms path Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 66 Table 9 MAP 0131 Paper Path Sensor continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 4 a Remove the forms Go to step 5 on page 68l Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Mode A00 see o Hou Id b a oao Run T amp D11 to tune the sensors For Model A00 Power off O the site Load forms Close the top cover Power on the printer After the printer is completely powered on approximately 20 seconds make the printer Not Ready e f this is a Model AOO press the Online key f this is a Model 001 002 or 003 press the Stop key Press the forms load key e f this is a Model A00 press the Load Form Feed key e f this is a Models 001 002 or 003 press the Load Eject key Is there a false paper path sensor message Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 67 Table 9 MAP 0131 Paper Path Sensor continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 5 Is the current forms path either rear pull or Run T amp D21 and verify correct Go to step 6 on page 69 push pull sensor operation If not OK Install a new logic board For e Install a new sensor cable See Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation ror Modo A00 see Pow Td For IEEE 001 0
154. akes the equipment unsafe Before you start the machine ensure that other service representatives and the customer s personnel are not in a hazardous position Store removed covers and other parts in an isolated location away from all personnel while you are servicing the machine Keep your tool case away from walk areas so that other people will not trip over it Do not wear loose clothing that can be trapped in the moving parts of a machine Ensure that your sleeves are fastened or rolled up above your elbows If your hair is long fasten it Insert the ends of your necktie or scarf inside clothing or fasten it with a nonconductive clip approximately 8 centimeters 3 inches from the ends Do not wear jewelry chains metal frame eyeglasses or clothes with metal fasteners Remember Metal objects are excellent conductors Wear safety glasses when you are involved with Hammering Drilling Soldering Outting wire Attaching springs Using liquid cleaners or solvents or sprays Working in any other conditions that might be hazardous to your eyes After service reinstall all safety shields guards labels and ground wires Replace any safety device that is worn or defective Reinstall all covers correctly before returning the machine to the customer Safety Information 12 Electrical Safety For a detailed description of electrical safety refer to Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers S
155. and 002 Coax Twinax Connector Microcode 1 Corner Module U2 s aad Bevel Microcode Module U54 4247 001 and 002 Level 1 Coax Twinax Connector Microcode Module U57 D Corner Cut Off Microcode Module U2 Microcode Bevel Module U54 4247 001 and 002 Level2 Coax Twinax Connector Microcode Module U57 n Eq Microcode 4 EI Module U54 Bevel Corner Cut Off 8 oO 4247 001 Level3 E Figure 39 Hear View of Logic Board Microcode Module Locations and Orientation Models 001 and 002 Chapter 4 Locations 268 Attachment Card Microcode Module Location and Orientation Models 001 and 002 _ Card to Logic Board Bevel Cable Microcode Module S1 Corner 1 Cut Off nS Twinax Connector Coax Connector e90aloc4 Figure 40 Rear View of Attachment Card Microcode Module Location and Orientation Models 001 and 002 Level 1 Long 182 mm P 7 2 in P P X E Bevel a Corner Cut Off S 3 Figure 41 Rear View of Attachment Card Microcode Module Location and Orientation Models 001 and 002 Level 2 Short On the Level 2 short attachment card use the orientation marks to help you position the microcode module in the module socket see Figure 6 on page 54 Attention Incorr
156. anguages Safety notices from both the service and customer documentation are included This publication is not shipped with the printer in the United States IBM 4247 Printer Automatic Sheet Feeder Guide SA24 4407 This book describes the installation and configuration procedures and the forms and envelope specifications for the automatic sheet feeder ASF This publication is shipped with the ASF Electrical Safety for IBM Customer Engineers S229 8124 This manual outlines in detail the procedures which one should follow for electrical safety Related Publications 18 Preface What s New in the Model 003 This Maintenance Information Manual is a comprehensive reference for the IBM 4247 Printer Models AOO 001 002 and the new 003 The Model 003 is very similar in function to its predecessors particularly the Model 001 but it is different in several important ways The Model 003 has a new Attachment Card Port which enables one to quickly change between hardware configurations without any disassembly this includes serial twinax coax and Ethernet LAN cards The installation of the attachment cards is now part of the customer setup during the initial printer installation There are also new menus and display messages to cover these additional attachments The transfer of Microcode Modules is no longer necessary because the modules have been replaced with flash memory This memory needs to be reflashed only when one is changing to o
157. ard 6 Single Alternate Unidirectional Bidirectional PARALLEL CONFIGURATION Using parallel configuration with coax base code on the Model 003 Using the coax attachment with Model 001 and 002 Appendix A Printer Configuration 510 Table 83 Parallel Configuration Characters Per Inch CPI 10 12 15 16 7 17 1 20 Lines Per Inch LPI Maximum Print Position MPP Maximum Page Length MPL 6 8 136 066 001 136 at 10 CPI 001 660 at 6 LPI 163 at 12 CPI 880 at 8 LPI 204 at 15 CPI 227 at 16 7 CPI 233 at 17 1 CPI 272 at 20 CPI Perforation Skipping Emulation Mode Print Language Model 003 000 065 4247 437 PC 2381 Personal Printer i 4202 Proprinter Ill XL Epson FX 1251 Oyrillic Windows Print Language Print Quality Print Quality 0 USA NM 1251 Cyrillic Windows DP Quality DP Text Quality Near Letter Quality OCR A OCR B DP Quality Courier Gothic OCR A OCR B Appendix A Printer Configuration 511 Table 83 Parallel Configuration continued NLQ Typeface Character Set Printer Compatibility Courier Gothic PC1 PC2 Italics Epson Only See Sub Menu in Table 85 Alarm Control Override Host Model 003 only Enabled Disabled Paper Source Characters Per Inch Lines Per Inch Maximum Page Length Disabled Enabled Disabled E
158. arts OK Install a new operator panel Repair as needed Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation E Mode A00 see ow Id Of Install a new operator panel cable Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation Mode AOO see Hoa Tol For eren 001 002 or 003 see Models 001 002 ar 008 Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 100 MAP 0190 Form Feed Problems Symptom Explanation Suspected FRUs Causes 02 FORMS JAM Debris or unwanted paper in forms path 002 FORMS JAMMED FRONT TRACTOR 020 FORMS JAMMED REAR TRACTOR Traciorassemoy 088 INVALID PAPER SOURCE Mechanical parts 099 FORMS JAMMED Logic board Forms Jam Forms Stick Together Tractor assembly cable Static charge build up Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 101 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems Step Questions Actions Yes No a Forms feed problems can have multiple causes While following this MAP do not stop your search after resolving the first cause This is especially true when you are investigating environmental and usage problems Search for additional causes The error messages 02 FORMS JAM 002 FORMS JAMMED 020 FORMS JAMMED and 099 FORMS JAMMED display when forms jam in the printer or if the sensor circuit senses an incorrect situation or fails Either the printer sensed that the forms have stopped processing throu
159. ath the message may return as the platen continues to age and become more shiny 2 If the printer is using a rear path repeat step B on page 297 and step 4 on page 297 at the beginning of this Service Check If the paper presence sensor does not sense the forms you must verify the microcode level of the printer 3 In cases where you encounter extreme platen wear you may want to install a new platen upgrade to the later microcode module and run T amp D11 c If the 02 099 FORMS JAM message is still in the display verify that the microcode level is at least at the minimum level shown in the following list The threshold level set by the earlier microcode might be creating a false message The later level of microcode corrects this condition with a different threshold setting which is less sensitive to the shine of the platen For this discussion later microcode begins at the following controller code levels Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 298 8 9 10 Model Microcode Level A00 2 03 001 Twinax 3 19 001 Coax 3 18 002 Twinax Coax 2 19 003 Twinax Coax 5 05 To verify that your printer has the latest level microcode module installed e A00 Print out the SELF TEST PRINTOUT by holding down the Online key as you power on the printer Or 001 002 003 Print out the FIRMWARE INFORMATION pattern using the Test key Check that the microcode is at the minimum levels mentioned in step Zc on page 298 A printer
160. ation Configuration Information All Models Overview This section contains information for configuring all models of 4247 printers This chapter also provides examples of the 4247 Printer configuration menu structures and options These examples note the factory default settings with a symbol This information is organized into the following sections Twinax base code attachment for parallel only LAN serial and twinax attachments Coax base code attachment for coax attachment You will find directions for viewing changing and printing the menus Use this section as an aid while verifying or changing configuration items Copyright IBM Corp 1995 2001 484 Model A00 Configuration Information This section provides configuration information for the Model A00 printer There are two sections 1 Power on configuration see 2 Program configuration see Power On Configuration Menu How To Print the Power On Configuration 1 Load forms Power off O the printer Press and hold the Menu Enter key while powering on the printer Hold the Menu Enter key pressed until the printer has stopped all motion approximately 20 seconds Release the Menu Enter key and the message PRINT OUT NO will display To print the current settings press the Pitch key The message PRINT OUT YES will display and the Configuration Printout is printed DARON Power On Configuration Printout Sample Printout Showing Factory Defa
161. ation If not OK Install a new logic board For Did a Park or Eject operation cause the error message f the printer is still failing after the logic board has been changed install a new sensor assembly cable Go to Sensor Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operator For e A00 see Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 118 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 2f service check Go to Perform the tractor ESSI Is the service check OK Install a new tractor assembly in the failing position front or rear If the printer is still failing after the tractor assembly has been ebat install a new is If the printer is still failing after the logic board has been changed install a new tractor assembly cable Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operator For Model A00 see Repair as needed Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Moge A00 see Fio Io Run Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 119 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 28 This is a 099 message or the A00 equivalent Check for customer operating errors Was the customer performing a PARK operation Tear off the forms in the area between the printhead and the tear bar Complete the Park operati
162. attachment card use the orientation marks to help you position the microcode module in the module socket Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 53 Microcode Module S1 Twinax Connector Coax bet Connector if Bevel Cardto Logic Board Cable e90aloc8 Orientation Marks Figure 6 Models 001 and 002 Orientation Marks for Microcode Module Short Card Attention Incorrect orientation of the module will damage the module and can damage the attachment card Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 54 Feature Feature Module Name Resistors S1 Label Coax IPDS both levels Hit KxClAvvv S01 CRC d 7 KxCSAvvv S01 CRC Coax SCS KxCSAvvv level 2 has metal shield S01 CRC Twinax IPDS KxTIAvvv both levels S01 CRC Twinax SCS KxTSAvvv evel 1 S01 CRC Twinax SCS KxTSAvvv level 2 S01 CRC Figure 7 Attachment Card and Microcode Modules K2 x 2 is the module designation for Model 001 K5 x 5 is the module designation for Model 002 The vvv is a 3 digit number that indicates the module code version number Return to step 11 on page 471 Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 55 Attachment Card Procedure 2 Figure al shows the location and orientation
163. blems 30 Table 2 MAP 0110 Automatic Sheet Feeder continued Step Questions Actions Yes No Do you have the stacker ASF loop back connector PN 08H7271 Go to step 9 Install a new logic board For Model 003 Or Or Install a new ASF Bin 1 assembly or Install a new stacker cable Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct To Bu he Test For Model or see How Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 31 Table 2 MAP 0110 Automatic Sheet Feeder continued Step Questions Actions Yes No Run T amp D10 in Single Test Mode to test the stacker ASF For Model A00 see ATTE TET EE Did T amp D10 Test run without errors Install a new ASF bin 1 assembly Install a new stacker assembly Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Model Install a new logic board For Mode A00 Or Install a new stacker cable Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct mE operon For Model ae see How Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 32 MAP 0120 Parallel or Serial Attachment Model A00 and Model 003 Symptom Explanation Suspected FRUs Causes Communication failures Power on configuration Model A00 020 DSR error 220 Serial DSR error Serial attachment card Logic board includes parallel attachment Host cable Parallel and serial configuration Model 003 Parallel configuration
164. board you receive will have a 2 pin jumper installed on either a 2 pin or a 3 pin connector located near the parallel attachment connector 1 Find the 2 pin jumper and connector E90ALOCA Chapter 4 Locations 2 Ifa2 pin jumper is installed on a 2 pin connector then 5 V dc is enabled to pin 18 3 If a 2 pin jumper is installed on a 3 pin connector as shown in Figure 47 use the chart below and verify the jumper is installed to enable 5 V dc on pin 18 If the jumper is not installed correctly move it to the pins shown in the chart WW Logic Board Parallel Connector Figure 47 Models A00 001 and 002 Pin 18 5V Jumper Location Viewed From Rear Note If after installing the logic board the NPS 540 power light is not lighted check for 5 V dc on pin 18 with a volt meter pin 18 is shown on connector Table 43 Model A00 logic board jumper location to enable 5 V dc on pin 18 4247 A00 Logic Board Level Install jumper between pins Level 1 2 3 logic board 2 and 3 Level 4 logic board 1 and 2 Table 44 Models 001 and 002 logic board jumper location to enable 45 V dc on pin 18 4247 001 002 Logic Board Level Install jumper between pins Level 1 2 logic board 2 and 3 Level 3 logic board 1 and 2 Chapter 4 Locations 274 Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments Service Position Removing Covers A DANGER To prevent
165. cable connections Repair as needed install a new printhead See 5 o o D z 8t C O o o o TI o s o o D 4 Install new orinihead cable 5 Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Model Ao see How TB Bun the EY and Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 339 Table 49 Print Quality Tests and Actions Fanfold continued Line Description Action if failure 5 Paper feed test Prints three lines of alternating line segments and spaces The top and bottom lines are printed first The middle line is printed after line 12 prints and the paper feeds back to line 5 The middle line should be centered between the first and third lines Bidirectional printing test Prints four lines Each H should align with the H above or below Bidirectional printing test Prints four lines Each vertical line should align with the vertical line above or below The first line is 10 CPI draft mode the second line is 17 1 CPI draft mode and the third line is 10 CPI NLQ mode Printhead wire shifter test 18 wire printhead only Models A00 001 and 003 Prints two lines To print in NLQ mode one set of nine wires 1B to 9B is shifted up by a solenoid relative to the fixed set of nine wires 1A to 9A In this test the first line prints a less than symbol NLQ mode tilde draft mode and a greater than symbo
166. cable is securely connected to the circuit board behind the tractor connector and gear Use needle nose pliers to reseat if needed Use a lint free cloth to clean the forms jam sensor Ensure that the forms are adjusted in the tractor assembly so the holes are not damaged and the forms are not loose bubble in the middle Return to the step that sent you here Ribbon Feed and Ribbon Lift Service Check You are here because of an 89 089 RIBBON JAM message 1 Remove the ribbon cartridge See Ribbon on page 2 Advance the ribbon by turning the knob in the direction of the arrow The ribbon should freely advance without the ribbon folding over Replace the ribbon cartridge if you locate a problem such as a ribbon that binds or is folded over Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 330 Print Head Mask Left Ribbon Bracket Figure 84 Ribbon Carriage and Ribbon Brackets Viewed From Top Left 3 Inspect the left ribbon bracket for wear damage or binds Repair the following parts as needed Ribbon feed spool tabs Ribbon motion sensor Ribbon spool teeth Note The ribbon feed spool has three tabs on the bottom that interrupt the ribbon motion sensor Ribbon Feed Spool Tabs Sensor E90ARB5 Ribbon Feed Motor Figure 85 Ribbon Spool Tabs Sensor Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 331 4 Use a lint free cloth to clean the ribbon motion sensor 5 Inspect the following parts for wear damage or bi
167. cables do not rub on paper feed belt 2 Perform the paper feed belt tension service check See EP Lower Plastic Shield Support Assembly Before You Begin Determine whether your printer has a one piece or two piece version If the support assembly has 2 screws see the printer contains a two piece version if the support assembly does not have 2 screws the printer contains a one piece version Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 451 Shield e90alocg Figure 188 Lower Plastic Shield Two Piece Version Attaches to Support Assembly If the printer has a one piece version the entire Lower GENE Shield Support Assembly must be removed The two piece version will be installed as the If the printer has a two piece version and the failure is only the damaged plastic shield the plastic shield assembly can be exchanged without exchanging the entire Lower Plastic Shield Support Assembly Go to Removal One Piece Version Remove the printer covers See 1 2 Remove the ribbon See RB 3 Remove the paper bail assembly See 4 Remove the carriage motor drive belt from the motor pulley Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 452 5 Remove the 4 carriage motor support bracket screws Separate the motor bracket from the fan bracket The motor can now be moved to access the right side mounting screw in Step Attention Do not damage the cables 6 Remove the carriage assemb
168. carriage shaft for correct adjustment If the carriage shaft is too tight you will notice binding at the frame If the carriage shaft is too loose you will notice clicking at the frame when you grasp the carriage shaft and attempt to move it up and down Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 287 When you grasp and attempt to move it the carriage shaft is correctly adjusted if it turns freely but does not click at the frame Ensure both screws that secure the carriage shaft retainer are tight To achieve the correct adjustment loosen the 2 screws of the carriage shaft retainer to relieve the bind Bias the carriage shaft retainer toward the lower carriage shaft retainer screw the 5 o clock position and retighten the screws Verify the correct mounting of the platen a Grasp and attempt to move up and down the left end of the platen b C If you hear a clicking where the bearing goes into the frame loosen and tighten the bearing retainer plate screws while biasing the retainer toward the lower screw the 5 o clock position Retighten the 2 screws and verify there is no clicking when you grasp the carriage shaft and attempt to move it up and down Verify the initial alignment of the wheel by following these steps a b Rotate the wheel to the full open gap position With the mechanical stop at the left end of the carriage shaft resting against the frame the pointer of the wheel should be in the range of
169. carriage shaft with the screw hole is on the left side Install the felt wipers after you place the carriage and black plastic holders on the shaft a Wrap the wipers around the shaft Slip them into the black plastic holders then snap the holders into the carriage b Do not lubricate the felt wipers 5 Reinstall the left retainer position it in a way that eliminates any radial looseness of the carriage shaft E ud d Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 438 To do this push the retainer lightly toward the front bottom corner of the printer shown by arrow in Figure 174 while you tighten the screws N Screw C Screw D e90alocf Figure 174 Carriage Left Retainer Push Retainer in Direction of Arrow 6 Perform the AFTA adjustment See 7 Perform the carriage drive belt service check See 8 Perform the bidirectional adjustment See Bidire Carriage Support Shaft Removal 1 Remove the left and right printer side covers 2 Mark the position of the eccentric adjustment bushing for reference during installation Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 439 Carriage Support Shaft Bushing Eccentric Carriage Support Bushing Shaft e90aloce Figure 175 Carriage Support Shaft Components 3 4 Remove the left and right carriage support shaft screws Remove the old support shaft from the printer Installation QI Mom ON Es Install the carriage assembly support bus
170. ce Temperature 1 and 2 19 Ohm 10 25 C 77 F 3 and 4 19 Ohm 10 256 77 F so sai DA VIEW FROM E e WIRING SIDE l 2 Figure 29 AFTA Motor Wiring Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams 251 Ribbon Drive Motor Wiring The ribbon feed motor is a stepper motor with a 7 5 step angle The motor leads go through the print head cables to the logic board RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS Note Allow the ribbon feed motor to cool before taking resistance measurements Table 37 Ribbon Feed Motor Resistance Pins Resistance Temperature 1 and 3 24 Ohm 10 25 C 77 F 2 and 4 24 Ohm 10 25 C 77 F Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams 252 Ef a nu s f 2 Un 4 77 VIEW FROM WIRING SIDE o ANAN ANAN ge Figure 30 Ribbon Feed Motor Wiring Ribbon Lift Motor Wiring The ribbon lift motor is a linear actuator stepper motor with travel of 18 mm 0 71 inch The motor connects to the printhead and the printhead cable connects to the logic board RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams 253 Note Allow the ribbon lift motor to cool before taking resistance measurements Table 38 Ribbon Lift Motor Resistance Pins Resistance Temperature 1 and 2 150 Ohm 10 25 C 77 F 3 and 4 150 Ohm 10 25 C 77 F Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams 254 VIEW FROM
171. cessfully if the display advances to the next test number T amp DO 2 Microcode Test Display T amp D02 Microcode Test RUN TEST YES END NO Note The message TEST RUNNING will flash during the test If an error message is displayed go to The test completed successfully if the display advances to the next test number Chapter 2 Diagnostics 204 T amp DO4A Microcode Test Note Not available in Model 003 Display T amp D04 Microcode Test RUN TEST YES END NO Note The message TEST RUNNING will flash during the test If an error message is displayed go to The test completed successfully if the display advances to the next test number T amp DO05 Operator Panel LED and Key Test Display T amp DO05 Operator Panel LED and Key Test RUN TEST YES END NO 1 All of the LEDs will switch on at the same time 2 Next beginning at the top each LED will flash once except for the power LED which will remain lighted An audible alarm will sound 3 After the LED test the following message will be displayed PRESS KEY 1 gt 4 The key is good if the display advances to the next key number 5 Press key 1 shown below Chapter 2 Diagnostics 205 000000 8 L7 2 C 6 1 C5104 3227 1 5 16 155014 13 12 11 103 9 Figure 19 Operator Panel Key Press Sequence
172. ch Lock Left Margin 5 CPI 6 CPI No 0 7 5 CPI Yes 0 66 at 5 CPI 8 5 CPI 79 at 6 CPI 10 CPI 100 at 7 5 CPI 12 CPI 114 at 8 5 CPI 15 CPI 134 at 10 CPI and Prop 17 1 CPI 161 at 12 CPI 20 CPI 202 at 15 CPI Prop 231 at 17 1 CPI 270 at 20 CPI Right Margin Slashed Zero Restore Mfg Defaults Appendix A Printer Configuration 496 Table 71 Form Setting continued 196 2 68 at 5 CPI No No 81 at 6 CPI Yes Yes 102 at 7 5 CPI 116 at 8 5 CPI 136 at 10 CPI and Prop 163 at 12 CPI 204 at 15 CPI 233 at 17 1 CPI 272 at 20 CPI ANOTHER PAPER PATH Table 72 Another Paper Path No Yes EXIT TO POWER ON CONFIGURATION MENU Table 73 Exit to Power On Configuration Menu No Yes HEXADECIMAL PRINTING Table 74 Hexadecimal Printing No Yes STORE MODE Appendix A Printer Configuration 497 Table 75 Store Mode Quit Save Current Manufacturing Default Appendix A Printer Configuration 498 Models 001 002 and 003 Configuration Information There are two sections of configuration information found here X 06 contains coax and coax parallel configuration information contains all other possible configuration information Unlocking and Locking Printer Configuration Menu Note Follow this procedure to unlock or lock the printer configuration menu 1 Press the Stop key 2 Pres
173. ch position During this part of the test the pinch rollers are closed and opened The next message displayed will be SENSORS TUNED r Important The paper path sensors were tuned The tuning must be done with all paper removed If paper is installed remove the paper and repeat T amp D11 7 f paper was not installed press the Micro Y key Return to the step that sent you here or for T amp D11 continue with the next step 8 The ribbon feed motor and the ribbon lift motor run continuously during this test The message that appears in the display is TO STOP gt 9 The ribbon feed and lift motors will run continuously until the Load Form Feed key is pressed If either motor fails go to 10 If an error message is displayed go to Chapter 2 Diagnostics 170 11 The test completed successfully if the display advances to the next test number 12 T amp D12 determines the number of motor steps to move from full open gap to the 1 part paper 0 1mm print gap position Calibrate the printer to the minimum allowed 1 part paper 0 1 mm T amp D12 AFTA Calibrate Test You must complete this test to Calibrate the microcode for the printhead and Adjust the gap between the printhead needles and the platen Display T amp D12 YES NO END Calibrate the microcode 2 Move to or keep the value 0 3 Exit with STOREZYES The requirement for calibrating is described in Adjust the print gap Chap
174. continued Step Questions Actions Yes No c Ensure that cable length restrictions are not Run T amp D in Automatic Mode to Go to step B exceeded Refer to the signal cable ordering information verify correct printer operation in the IBM 4247 Printer Model A00 User s Guide see Mum o fun ps Tes and SA24 4404 for attachment cable configurations S Is the problem fixed 2 Is the failure with the serial attachment Go to step B TUUS Go to step 6 on page 40 Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 37 Table 4 MAP 0120 Attachment Model A00 continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 3 There are two serial loop back connectors One for RS 232C PN 08H7268 and one for RS 422A PN 08H7259 Do you have the serial loop back connectors for this printer Go to step 4 on page 39 Install a new serial attachment card See page 9l Or Install a new logic board See or B Install a new host cable Run T amp D in Automatic Mode to verify correct printer operation See How To Bun the Test and Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 38 Table 4 MAP 0120 Attachment Model A00 continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 4 Install the RS 232C loop back connector Go to step El Record the display message and go to FI RD Error E Run T amp D9 in Single Test Mode to test the serial attachment circuits See Mo To Model 003 and Deom
175. continuously updated to indicate sensor status changes Inserting paper into a path changes the display from F free to B blocked Press any key to go to step B The following displays T amp D21 Sensor Test THRESHOLD YES NO This part of the test is intended for use by Product Engineering and allows the user to examine internal sensor threshold values stored in NVRAM Press the Start key to skip to step B on page 226 Press the Line Feed key to enter Threshold values written in NVRAM display T amp D21 Sensor Test Cx1 Fx2 Rx3 x4 PRESS A KEY where e x1 is the threshold for manual path e x2 is the threshold for front path Chapter 2 Diagnostics 225 x3 is the threshold for rear path and rollers closed x4 is the threshold for rear path and rollers open X1 X2 x3 x4 are numbers in hexadecimal format which correspond to the measured voltages resolution of 20 mV Press any key to go to step B 8 The following displays T amp D21 Sensor Test SENSOR LEVEL YES NO This part of the test is intended for use by Product Engineering and allows the user to examine sensor output voltages 9 Press the Start key to skip to step 110 on page 227 Press the Line Feed key to enter The current sensor measurements display T amp D21 Sensor Test C x1 F x2 R x3 PRESS A KEY where x1 is manual path measurement e x2 is front path measurement e x3 is rear path measur
176. d T amp D15 First Printing Line Adjustment Test FANF XXXX 0 RUN 9 10 A line of Es will be printed on the first printing line and then the paper will feed to a position for viewing The Es should be completely on the paper The top of the Es should be approximately 1 mm 0 04 in below the perforation The following message will be displayed T amp D15 First Printing Line Adjustment Test PRESS A KEY 11 Press any key to feed the paper back into the printer The following message will display T amp D15 First Printing Line Adjustment Test STORE YES NO 12 13 If the first print line adjustment is correct press the Line Feed key to store the first print line position If the first print line adjustment is not correct press the Start key to get the next display T amp D15 First Printing Line Adjustment Test FANF XXXX 0 RUN 14 If an error eri is displayed go to Press the Line Feed key once to increase the space between the top of the form and the top of the print test or press the Start key once to decrease the space between the top of the form and the top of the print test The value changes on the operator panel display Press the Form Feed key to run the test Go to T amp D15 step Bl and repeat until the line of Es is just below the edge of the form To exit this test without adjusting the rear first print line press the Start key The test completed
177. d Enabled Disabled Table 97 Printer Compatibility Sub Menu 3 Automatic LF on CR t 4 Automatic CR on LF 5 Form Feed Suppression Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 6 Init t 7 Condensed Print 8 Slashed Zero t Enabled 15 Enabled Disabled 16 7 Disabled 17 1 Appendix A Printer Configuration 522 Table 97 Printer Compatibility Sub Menu continued 9 20 CPI Enabled Disabled PRINTER SETUP Table 98 Printer Setup Paper Source Front Rear Bin 1 with ASF Bin 2 with ASF Bin 3 with ASF Manual ASF Default Bin ASF installed Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 ASF Bin 1 Media ASF installed Paper Envelope ASF Bin Linking ASF installed Front Forms Backup Rear Forms Backup Disabled Bin 142 Enabled Enabled Bin 14243 Disabled Disabled Bin 243 Continuous Forms Linking Form Feed Mode Automatic Eject Enabled Disabled Not Active in Ready State Enabled Active in Ready State Disabled Automatic Restore Continuous Forms Eject Mode Manual Paper Overlay Appendix A Printer Configuration 523 Table 98 Printer Setup continued Disabled Data Timer 10 Seconds Timer 20 Seconds Timer 80 Seconds a Timer 40 Seconds Timer 50 Seconds Immediate Eject Delayed Eject Enabled Disabled Automatic
178. d cable is defective or has bad connection Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 70 Table 10 MAP 0140 Printhead Drive Step Questions Actions Yes No 1 The ribbon lift bar lift bracket and ribbon Go to step B on page 72 guide are part of the ribbon assembly These parts can cause printhead drive problems Remove the ribbon see l Ribbon on Print a print test If this is a Model AOO age 160 and print at ae 10 pages If this is a m 001 002 or 003 see a repeat the test at least 5 times 10 pages Are you here due to a 56 73 059 or 056 display message Go to step B Was the printhead drive OK during the The ribbon is the customer s print test responsibility Repair as needed Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Model A00 see inu Io Bun the Test ad Go to step B on page 74 Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 71 Table 10 MAP 0140 Printhead Drive continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 2 Power off O the printer Go to step ni Repair as needed Perform the printhead drive service Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify check See nthead correct printer operation For Model Check on page 333 A00 see iow To Aun ihe Tas and Is the service check OK 4 When the print wires are too close to the Go to step Al Repair as needed platen they can cause printhead drive Run T amp D in a
179. d remove install Model A00 370 Models 001 and 002 378 logs error 198 lower feed roller remove install 435 lower plastic shield support 451 Maintenance Analysis Procedures MAPs 20 manual sheet feed print quality printout 343 service check 317 tray remove install 425 MAP 0100 START 23 0110 Automatic Sheet Feeder 26 0120 Attachment Model A00 33 0121 Attachment Models 001 and 002 41 0122 Network Print Server Attachment 59 0130 No Paper Movement 62 0131 Paper Path Sensor 66 0140 Printhead Drive 70 0150 Power Supply 75 0160 Ribbon Feed and Lift 89 0170 Stacker 94 0180 Top Cover Interlock 98 0190 Forms Feed Problems 101 0200 55 AFTA Errors 127 0210 Intermittent Failures 130 MAP 0100 Start of Call 23 MAPs 20 mask printhead 432 menu coax attachment chart 506 power on configuration changing avalue 486 chart 485 printer configuration changing a value 504 menu continued printer configuration continued locking unlocking 499 program configuration changing avalue 493 chart 492 twinax attachment chart 517 messages T amp D error Model 001 002 231 T amp D error Model A00 190 Microcode 158 microcode module location 266 Model 001 Configuration 499 Model 002 Configuration 499 Model 003 Attachment Cards Removal amp Installation 359 Model 003 Configuration 499 Model A00 Configuration 485 Model A00 Error Messages 133 Models 001 002 003 Error Messages 136 motors AFTA remove ins
180. de Print Language Print Guality NLG Typeface Character Set Printer Compatibility X Auta LF on CR A Auto CR on LF gt IFF Suppression b initi 7 Condensed Print 3 ilashed Zero 5 C20 CPI Alarm Control Interface Typs input Buffer Size Selsci in AutoFeed XT Last Used Front Twinax Push DP Quality 500 International S2 Helgian New ona Enah ied Disabled Pe DP Guality Courier PC1 Disabled Dicaoled Disabled Enabled Lak GPI Disabled Enabled Enakisd Disabled E90AX005 Figure 198 Twinax Configuration Printout Part 1 of 2 Appendix A Printer Configuration 503 Figure 199 Twinax Configuration Printout Part 2 of 2 Changing a Value In the Printer Configuration Menu 1 Printer Setup Paper Source ASF Default Bin ABF Bin 1 Media ASF Bin Linking Front Forms Backup Rear Forms Backup Continuous Forms Linking Form Feed Mode Automatic Eject Automatic Restore Continuous Forms Eject Mode Manual Paper Overlay Automatic Manual Load Manual Feed Ejegt Mode Bar Code Print Direction Graphics Print Direction Perforation Safety Jam Sensors Printer Adjustments Front AFTA Front Tear Position Front Left Margin Alignment Front Paper Load Position Rear AFTA Rear Tear Position Rear Left Margin Alignment Rear Paper Load Position ABE Bin i AFTA ASF Bin 1 Left Margin Alignment ASF Bin 1 Paper Load Position ASF Bin Z AFTA Bin Z Left Margi
181. de modules match the host connect feature 15 Models 001 002 Go to step 1d Repair as needed Run T amp D in 5 Automatic Mode to verify correct Are both U54 and U2 modules correctly oriented How To Bun amp D 16 Are you here due to a 028 display message The Go to step d Go to step MUN problem can be intermittent or solid The printer can be Ready but will not print 17 lnstall a coax attenuator P N 80F9513 on the connector on Run T amp D in Automatic Go to step 18 on page 4d the back of the printer between the printer and the coax cable Is the problem corrected Mode to verify correct printer operation See Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 48 Table 6 MAP 0121 Attachment Models 001 002 or 003 continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 18 Are you here because of a T amp D 30 38 failure a 015 017 027 028 error OR no print from host OR wrong printed character Replace the attachment card See Run T amp D in Automatic Mode to verify correct printer a See Verify the symptom and return to Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 49 Attachment Card Procedure 1 Models 001 and 002 connect to a host by using one of the following features Coax IPDS attachment Coax SCS attachment Twinax IPDS attachment Twinax SCS attachment Proper operation of the feature requires the correct combination of attachment card and microc
182. dhesive from the forms path Are these checks OK Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 114 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 20 Make the following checks of the printhead mask Go to step bil Repair as needed see Locate and remove debris or adhesive from the printhead mask opening Run T amp D in automatic mode to Check the printhead mask for damage or incorrect verify correct printer operation installation For oge A00 see fow To Bu _ Carriage Platen Side Adhesive Mask Are these checks OK 21 The paper bail assembly plastic shield is spring loaded Go to step pd Install a new paper bail assembly away from the platen plastic shield and spring Remove the ribbon Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation Remove the forms For Model A00 see Haw Ta Bud Move the printhead as far to the right as possible Is there spring tension holding the paper bail plastic shield open approximately 10 mm 0 39 in Go to step P3 on page 118 Go to step 4 on page 118 Is the problem with a tractor feed forms path Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 115 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 23 Do the forms jam after they leave the tractor Go to step bal Go to Tractor Assembly Servicd assembly Check
183. ding the code 3 Hold down both the Start and Cancel keys on the 4247 and power on the printer 4 You can release these 2 keys when the following message is on the 4247 display Appendix C Flashing the Memory of the Model 003 551 WAITING CODE DOWNLOAD USING PARALLEL PORT If this message does not appear power off and try again If this message never appears you will need to replace the logic board before proceeding with the code download Power on your computer laptop or PC a If the 4247 code is stored only on the diskette you must copy the code to the C drive Insert the diskette into the A drive At the DOS prompt type copy A C and press Enter You should see this response A 4247TXXX exe or A 4247CXXX exe 1 file copied 1 file copied If you try to load code from the A drive you will get the error message Error writing temp file b When the 4247 code is stored on the C drive Type dir and hit Enter to verify the filename The code will be found as 4247TXXX exe or 4247CXXX exe T ASCII TWINAX or C COAX and XXX code level Verify the connection of the parallel cable connected in step B Type the required filename and Enter to run this executable file The message on the screen will appear C COPYRIGHT 1995 2000 IBM CORPORATION Checking connection If the parallel cable connection is a problem the message on the screen will appear Printer doesn t respond check connection And the download prog
184. dware while inspecting the parts e f available use knob PN 08H7271 to observe the parts The knob installs on the left end of the platen shaft or Use the rollers on the upper feed roller assembly Drive belt Pulleys Bearings or bushings Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 306 Lower Feed Roller Pulley le Belt Tension Ho Lever 7 Platen pes Outside Pulley Front Tractor Drive Gear Paper Feed Motor Pulley Figure 61 Paper Feed Main Drive Viewed From Right Side Arrows show forward up paper feed Gears Check for broken teeth on the platen gear and the pinch roller gear BS eh Qo Pinch Roller Pinch Roller 2 Gear Open E Gear Closed e90atd3 Figure 62 Platen Pinch Roller Gear Viewed From Left Side Attention Failure to install the bellcrank and platen gear properly can result in damage to the gears Be certain the retaining clip is seated in the groove on the platen shaft Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 307 Q Groove for e clip A e90aas2 Figure 63 Detail of Retaining Clip on the Platen Shaft The retaining clip called e clip is installed in the shallow groove next to the V groove in the shaft 6 Perform the following a b C d Remove all forms Remove the ribbon see Ribbon on page 353 Move the printhead to the far right Inspect the paper bail Ensure that the upper plastic shield is spring loaded away
185. e 2 blue dots on the right side end cap d Run T amp D14 Model A00 or Firmware Information Models 001 002 003 to determine the microcode levels in the printer Replace if not at or above the levels indicated in Run T amp D11 to run the sensor tuning algorithm on the new platen surface If the problem persists go to step B amp on page 124 Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 123 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 35 Is it OK Check the sensor cable assembly for wear or damage Install a new logic board Run T amp D in automatic test mode to verify correct printer operation For odel A00 see dou o Run Install a new sensor cable assembly Run T amp D in automatic test mode to verify correct printer operation For M ge A00 see fHow o Rur Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 124 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 36 Run T amp D 14 to determine the microcode levels in the Go to step BZ a Install a new platen sa ite controller code must be at least at the levels b If the upper feed roller has ingieated Jn oh ihe latest th hold not been replaced recently 9 Nave MIS Mets Sensor MIESO you should replace it algorithms C Also replace the bail Is the code level at or above these minimums assembly if it does NOT have 2 blue dots on the right side e
186. e How For Models 001 002 and 003 see How 2 Scroll to T amp D17 Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 295 Sensor Service Checks You are here because the printer displayed a 02 002 020 099 FORMS JAM message or an unrecoverable 01 001 END OF FORMS message Note If the printer displays a 01 001 END OF FORMS message after you load forms proceed to Papel To determine whether you should investigate the FORMS JAM message as a paper presence sensor condition or a tractor sensor condition perform this test While the message is in the display open and close the printer top cover e f the carriage moves across the print line and returns follow the Paper Presence Sensor Check or e f the carriage does not move across the print line follow the Tractor Sensor Check and Adjustment beginning on Bool Paper Presence Sensor Check This Check informs you when to use T amp D The 3 paper presence sensors are located near the platen in the Front Push Rear Push and Manual Sheet Feed paper paths Before you perform T amp D11 follow these steps to verify that you actually need to perform T amp D11 Do not perform T amp D11 until you are instructed to do so 1 If the printer displayed a 02 099 FORMS JAM message during Load or Park operations determine the cause Load and Park problems are often customer use problems Do not perform T amp D11 because of a Load or Park problem or If the printer displayed a 02 099 F
187. e EMI filter MUST be removed from the operator panel cable a Follow the eMe to remove the EMI filter in b Connect the operator panel cable directly to the late level logic board Note Be certain the front edge of the logic board is inserted between the metal tabs on the frame Ensure the non metal washer is installed as shown in Note When the non metal washer is not installed the frame ground is connected to the dc ground The default is washer installed The NPS 540 can be used without an external power supply only if 5 V dc is enabled supplied on pin 18 of the printer parallel attachment connector NPS devices p n 30H4082 30H4083 30H4055 cannot be powered by pin 18 and always require an external 12 V ac power supply There is no danger of damaging any NPS or other computer devices when 5 V dc is enabled on pin 18 The new logic board you will receive will have a 2 pin jumper installed on either a 2 pin or a 3 pin connector located near the parallel attachment connector To attach the NPS Ethernet 540 p n 30H4054 to the 4247 printer without an external power supply a Find the 2 pin jumper and connector b If a 2 pin jumper is installed on a 2 pin connector then 5 V dc is enabled to pin 18 c lfa2 pin jumper is installed on a 3 pin connector as shown in Figure 4 18 use the chart below and verify the jumper is installed to enable 5 V dc on pin 18 If the jumper is not installed correctly move it to t
188. e P OP or P CL to indicate the position of lower rollers OPEN or CLOSED The display is continuously updated to indicate sensor status changes Inserting paper into a path will change the display from F free to B blocked Press the Micro key to go to step EJ 5 The following displays Y THRESHOLD N This part of the test is intended for use by Product Engineering and allows the user to examine internal sensor threshold values stored in NVRAM 6 Press the Load Form Feed key to skip to step Z on page 188l Press the Micro key to enter Chapter 2 Diagnostics 187 Threshold values written in NVRAM display Cx1 Fx2 Rx3 x4 where e x1 is the threshold for manual path e x2 is the threshold for front path e x3 is the threshold for rear path and rollers closed x4 is the threshold for rear path and rollers open X1 X2 x3 x4 are numbers in hexadecimal format corresponding to the threshold voltages with resolution of 20 mV Press the Micro key to go to step ni The following displays Y SENSOR LEVEL N This part of the test is intended for use by Product Engineering It allows the user to examine sensor output voltages Press the Load Form Feed key to skip to step Bl Press the Micro key to enter The current sensor measurements display C x1 F x2 R x3 where x1 is manual path measurement e x2 is front path measurement X3 is rear path measurement Chapter 2
189. e Support Shaft PP 08H7351 24 08H7314 1 Screw Carriage Belt Adjusting Packaged 5 Per Pack 25 08H7315 1 Bracket Packaged 5 Per Pack 26 08H7305 1 Pulley Packaged 3 Per Pack 27 1 Pivot PP 08H7351 28 2 Spacer PP 08H7353 29 NP Bracket Carriage Motor 30 4 Grommet Rubber PP 08H7352 Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 471 Assembly 5 continued Asm Part Index Number WUhnits Description 31 4 Stud PP 08H7352 32 08H7306 1 Motor Carriage 33 2 Screw M4x6 PP 08H7355 34 08H7307 1 Belt Paper Feed Drive Packaged 5 Per Pack 35 08H7308 1 e Gear AFTA Sector 36 1 Screw M3x6 PP 08H7355 37 2 Clip Retaining PP 63H6001 38 4 Screw PP 08H7355 39 08H7309 1 Gear 40 1 Clip Retaining PP 63H6001 41 2 Spring PP 08H7351 42 2 Guide Spring PP 08H7352 43 08H7310 2 Gear Packaged 5 Per Pack 44 1 Slide PP 08H7353 45 2 Washer PP 63H6001 46 08H7317 2 Bracket Ground Packaged 5 Per Pack 48 08H7359 1 Motor Ribbon Lift 49 1 Nut M5 PP 63H6001 50 08H7330 1 Bracket Carriage Motor Stiffening 51 2 Wear Surface Sheetmetal PP 08H7351 Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 472 Assembly 6 Mechanical Assembly Ill Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 473 Assembly 6 continued Asm Part Index Number WUnits Description 6 NP Mechanical Assembly 1 2 Sc
190. e for future use The microcode can be downloaded when required from the C drive into the 4247 flash memory through the printer s parallel port You may need to download microcode for one of these reasons 1 A more recent level of microcode is available that will address a known customer problem 2 A printer requires another type of microcode load There are two types available for different attachment uses Table 109 Microcode Types Twinax Load is used for Coax Load is used for Parallel only Coax feature Serial feature Twinax feature Ethernet LAN card feature Downloading Model 003 Microcode from the IBM First Service System IlI data base m Note Microcode may also be ordered on diskette if no access is available to the IBM database See the Parts Catalog for the part numbers 1 Open Lotus Notes O Copyright IBM Corp 1995 2001 549 Open the IBM First Service System ll data base a Click on the button for uCode b A pop up menu containing Machine Microcode and Rim Notes Code should display on your screen Highlight Machine Microcode via WEBSITE Primary Left click to select this option On the next screen PSD Machine Microcode scroll down to the 4247 machine type near the bottom of the page a Click on the Link icon b Netscape will open the Code Download Site Locate the version of the code that you require in the list and double click the icon with the left mouse button I
191. e from the forms path torn pieces of paper or other foreign material that can cause forms jams 2 Ensure the rear tractor paper door is open or removed 3 Ensure that the paper bail is installed properly See Table 47 on page 303l Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 313 Rear Paper Door N Tol te Tractor ee mS F Va j f Tractor Assembly x N PR 2 Upper 7 p Assembly NN SN Feed NBN Roller Platen Figure 68 Front Push Pull Path Overview Viewed From Left Side 4 Ensure that the rear tractor assembly is in pull mode To put the tractor assembly in pull mode pull the two levers on the back and pivot the part that mounts to the printer until it detents approximately 45 degrees Ensure the rear tractor push pull selector is set correctly To set the rear tractor for the pull forms path pull the push pull selector toward the front of the hl until the Se shafts are e at the bottom of the slots in the selector See and Inspect the following parts for wear damage or binds Use knob PN 08H7271 if available to hand cycle the paper feed mechanism to observe the parts The knob installs on the left end of the platen shaft Install new parts as needed Upper feed roller gear Idler gear Pull selector gear Tractor assembly gears Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 314 Push Pull Selector in Pull Position Up Tractor Assembly Gears Cover Removed
192. e latch under the top center of the operator panel and pull forward approximately 10 mm 0 39 in b Lift the operator panel and disconnect the connector Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 350 Figure 99 Operator Panel Removing 10 Remove the ASF cover 2 latches Latches Figure 100 ASF Cover 11 Remove the rear main cover mounting screws Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 351 Figure 101 Rear Main Cover Screws 12 Remove the operator panel cable wire tie from the front main cover if installed 13 Remove the front and side mounting screws and remove the front and rear covers Figure 102 Front Main Cover Screws Replacement 1 Follow the removal steps in reverse order 2 Perform the tear off line adjustment See FTear Off Line an page 295 Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 352 Ribbon Removal 1 Open the top cover and the forms guide 2 Push the printhead to the center of the printer 3 Turn the ribbon advance knob to maintain fabric tension e90arb9 Figure 103 Moving the Carriage to Center Overview 4 Press the tab to the rear while pulling tab H up to disengage the ribbon from the lift asse
193. e order 2 Perform the sensor tuning service check See 3 Perform the AFTA service check See 4 Perform the first line printing service check See Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 443 Printer Mechanical Assembly Removal AN DANGER To prevent serious personal injury from electrical shock when connecting or disconnecting the interface cable set the printer power switch to O Off and unplug the power cord A DANGER Do not connect or disconnect any communication port teleport attachment connector or power cord during an electrical storm 1 Remove the printer covers 2 Remove any attachment cards 3 Remove the logic board For Model A00 see page ird For Models 001 and 002 see page 4 Disconnect the carriage motor fan connector from the power supply Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 444 Operator Tractors Panel Sensors ESSA x X N Stacker Paper Feed Motor Print Carriage Ribbon AFTA Carriage Head Motor Motor Fan Figure 179 Logic Board Connector Locations Model A00 Early Level Stacker Operator Tractors Sensors Panel Ribbon Motor arriage Carriage AFTA C Fan Coax Twinax Print Card Head Motor Figure 180 Logic Board Connector Locations Model A00 Late Level and Models 001 002 Models 001 and
194. e part forms using a good ribbon The print should appear dark Chapter 2 Diagnostics 213 Press the Micro key to bypass this message T amp D13 Not Used T amp D14 Fanfold Form Printout Test Note Use this test to check print quality print wires printhead wire shifter 18 wire printhead only carrier movement paper feed line skew and bidirectional vertical alignment See o cane for symptoms and see Figure 93 on 342 and eme 94 on 343 for examples of print samples 1 Display T amp D14 Fanfold Form Printout Test RUN TEST YES END NO 2 Press the Line Feed key If the aie message displays go to T amp D14 Fanfold Form Printout Test STORED PINCH XXXXX PRESS A KEY Return here after the sensors are tuned 3 If fanfold paper is not loaded the printer will display T amp D14 Fanfold Form Printout Test LOAD PAPER 4 Install fanfold paper in the tractor assembly and press the Load Eject key The print test will print and the display will be T amp D14 Fanfold Form Printout Test TEST RUNNING 5 When the print test is complete the following message is displayed T amp D14 Fanfold Form Printout Test TEAR amp PRESS KEY 6 Tear off the printout and press any key 7 For printout analysis see LP Chapter 2 Diagnostics 214 8 Ilf an error message is displayed go to 9 The test completed successfully if the display advances to the
195. e printer Go to step lid Power off O the printer b Connect the AFTA motor connector Install a new AFTA motor See c Power on the printer Does the power supply fan run OK Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Model Aco see How Bu Bun m eS andl 16a Power off O the printer Go to step I7 on page 84 Power off O the printer b Connect the paper feed motor connector Install a new paper feed motor See c Power on the printer Does the power supply fan run OK Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Model A00 see Dios To Bun the m andl Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 85 Table 11 MAP 0150 Power Supply continued Questions Actions Yes No 17 a Power off O the printer b Install the attachment card For Model A00 see Serial Attachment Card 4 a Models eh and 002 see oa c Power on the printer Does the power supply fan run OK Go to step 18 on page 87 Power off O the printer Install a new attachment card For Model A00 s see Serial Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Model ate see Chow To Bun the m andl Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 86 Table 11 MAP 0150 Power Supply continued Questions Actions Yes No 18 a Power off O the printer b Install the tractor assembly c Power
196. e the host system and program are still running d Ensure that cable length restrictions are not exceeded Refer to the signal cable ordering information in the BM 4247 Printer Models 001 002 User s Guide SA24 4408 or IBM 4247 Printer Model 003 User s Guide S544 5780 for attachment cable information Is the problem corrected Run T amp D in Automatic Mode to verify correct p operation See Go to step Zon page 44 Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 45 Table 6 MAP 0121 Attachment Models 001 002 or 003 continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 7 Is the failure with the parallel attachment Go to step 6 on page 451 Go to step tal 8 Do you have the parallel loop back connector PN Go to step I Install a new logic board See l Logid 08H7269 for this printer j or Install a new host cable Run T amp D in automatic mode to e correct m opeen See 9 Install the loop back connector Install a new host parallel cable Run T amp D in Run T amp DO6 in Single Test Mode to test the VETE Automatic Mode to verify SESE and perform the attachment circuits See correct printer operation suggested action see iow Ta Bun tha Did T amp DO6 run without errors 10 Run T amp D30 38 in Single Test Mode to test the coax or twinax attachment circuits See The twinax attachment must have a self Dsmmin HO twinax cable installed P N 38F8254 Did T amp D30 38 run without e
197. ead sensor U11 74LS241 Operator panel Mechanical options ASF etc U3 U10 74ALS245 74LS241 Parallel interface r Notes 1 The bin motor drivers and the paper stacker paper path selector can be found on the board which is located inside the paper stacker option 2 The paper stacker motion driver and the tractors motion drivers are the same as the paper motor driver Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 389 Serial Attachment Card Model A00 Removal Attention The electronic parts of this printer can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Ensure that ESD protection devices and procedures including a static discharge wrist strap are used while working on the printer A DANGER To prevent serious personal injury from electrical shock when connecting or disconnecting the interface cable set the printer power switch to O Off and unplug the power cable A DANGER Do not connect or disconnect any communication port teleport attachment connector or power cord during an electrical storm 1 Disconnect the host cable 2 Put the covers in the service position See Dag 3 Remove the screws and lift the card straight up out of the printer Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 390 Jumper Serial Attachment Card e90asat Figure 126 Serial Attachment Card Replacement Follow the removal steps in reverse order Ensure the jumper is installed as shown Note T
198. ear pull forms paths Note If there is a feed problem with the rear push forms path position the rear edge of the printer at the rear edge of the work surface e Forms tension between the left and right tractors is properly adjusted GO J Q OQ 6 3 LeftMargin RightMargin LeftMargin RightMargin Correct Incorrect f Forms meet specifications described in Appendix B Are the checks OK Go to step H9 on page 114 Repair as needed Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Moge A00 see Fio Io Run amem Continue with step UT on page 1 10 Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 113 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 19 Make the following checks Go to step Bo on page 115 Repair as needed dpi the dap i ps c E R n TAD imautomatie modeto en Mn ots Eee ane t UIS ae verify correct printer operation TIE aene For Moge A00 see an o Rur Note If you suspect lower plastic shield damage determine which version part is installed If the lower plastic shield is attached with 2 screws remove the screws to remove the plastic shield and inspect it for damage If the lower plastic shield is not attached gt with 2 screws remove the platen to inspect it E Or 9 Shield e90alocg Locate and remove any paper debris label debris or label a
199. ect orientation of the module will damage the module and can damage the attachment card Chapter 4 Locations 269 Microcode Module Label Model A00 c CorG vvv Code Version Level Loc Location U54 or U1 or U2 CRC Manufacturing Use Only nnnnnnnnnnn KAOOcvvv Loc CRC OOOO AAAAAAD UUUUUUUUUUU DUUUUUUUUUU e90aloc7 Figure 42 Logic Board Microcode Module Label Model A00 Microcode Module Label Models 001 and 002 Kx 4247 001 or002 a C T orX lt b S l orx ae c C G orA vvv Code Version Level Loc Location U54 or U2 Logic Board Loc Location S1 Attachment Card CRC Manufacturing Use Only C Coax T Twinax X both Coax and Twinax S SCS I IPDS Xz both SCS and IPDS C Contoller G Generator A Attachment nnnnnnnnnaun Kxabcvvv Loc CRC ommna UUHHUUHUHHUU guuuuuguuuuu e90aloc9 Figure 43 Logic Board or Attachment Card Microcode Module Label Models 001 and 002 K2 x 2 is the designation for Model 001 and K5 x 5 is the designation for Model 002 Chapter 4 Locations 270 Connector Locations Early Model A00 Operator Tractors Sensors rbd Stacker upply po Feed Te Motor I Ls I Board FTN mon D l N Print Carriage Ribbon AFTA Carriage Head Motor Motor Fan Figure 44
200. ector from the socket on the printhead circuit card Attention Do not pull the wires out of the connector Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 405 Ribbon Lift Motor Screws Print Head LLLI Ribbon Lift Mctor Connector Ribbon Lift Motor Screws Printhead Cable Ribbon Lift Motor Connector E90ARB12 Figure 138 Ribbon Lift Motor New Viewed From Top Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 406 Installation 1 2 3 4 The position of the wiring on the new ribbon lift motor is different form the positioning of the wiring on the original motor See Figura 138 an page 40A for correct motor positioning and routing of the wiring Route the cable around the platen side of the motor between the mounting post and the motor body Ensure the cable does not contact any moving parts Reinstall the ribbon lift motor screws Reinstall the ribbon and close the cover Automatic Forms Thickness Adjust AFTA Assembly Removal Ts 2 3 Remove the printer covers See Record the indicator setting Disconnect the AFTA motor connector from the logic board Note the location of the connector and the cable path as a guide for re installation Note If the motor is being removed only to access other parts do not disconnect the connector Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 407
201. ed Press the Micro key to bypass this message T amp D14 Fanfold Form Printout Test Use this test to check print quality print wires printhead wire shifter carrier movement paper feed line skew code level and bidirectional vertical alignment See and Figure 93 on page 342 i print samples If the following message displays go to OO SF Pe PINCH XXXXX Note XXXXX is CLOSE or OPEN Return here after the following message displays SENSOR TUNED If the following message displays continue with the next step LOAD PAPER 1 Install fanfold paper in the tractor assembly and press the Load Form Feed key Chapter 2 Diagnostics 174 The print test will print and the following message displays T amp D 14 USER 2 When the print test is complete the following message is displayed TEAR amp PRESS KEY Tear off the printout and press any key For printout analysis see EP If an error message is displayed go to f1 amp The test completed successfully if the display D to the next test number T amp D15 First Printing Line Adjustment Test This test allows you to adjust the first print line for the front fanfold forms path and the rear fanfold forms path from the operator panel D o o The value set by this test becomes the first print line position when the configuration menu item Vertical Adjustment is set to 0 Note If you adjust this value you al
202. ed C clip in right side and remove the lower feed roller assembly from the lower feed roller shaft on the Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 436 C clip GN Lower Feed NU Roller Assembly Right Side Screws Screws N Figure 172 Lower Feed Roller Assembly Cut Sheet Tray Frame Hep eman Follow the removal steps in reverse order Perform the paper feed drive belt service check See WIN Idem Carriage Assembly Removal 1 Remove the printer covers See Remove the printhead See P Remove the AFTA assembly See Remove the pinch roller bellcrank See Remove the paper bail assembly See Perform the following a Loosen the carriage belt clamp screw and remove the belt from the clamp b Remove the left carriage shaft screws and retainer ees Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 437 Attention Small sheetmetal wear surfaces may be present straddling the side frame where the carriage shaft was resting they are easily lost c Remove the carriage and shaft Sheetmetal Wear Surface Rubber Ring Discard if present gt Carriage Belt Clamp Screw Carriage Shaft Left Retainer Support Shaft Sheetmetal Wear Surface e90aca1 Figure 173 Carriage and Shaft Viewed From Top REDE omen Follow the removal steps in reverse order Ensure the sheetmetal wear surfaces if present are seated correctly on the side frame Ensure the end of the
203. ed by the 180 degree turn the path makes around the platen On the front path paper passes straight through the printer Print line registration on the rear path can change by up to 1mm after the initial load This small change in registration might be objectionable to a customer using pre printed forms if characters print outside of a box The solution is to raise the print 1mm higher on the first page by raising the load position This will keep the print inside the box on all pages Registration critical jobs where a small change is not acceptable should be run on the front path Fanfold paper print line skew Print line too high or low at one end of line Single sheet feed print line skew Print line too high or low at one end of line Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 148 Reference Table 5 Operator Panel and Miscellaneous Problems Description of Failure Action Models 001 002 or 003 When Menu is pressed the operator panel displays RECALL CUSTOM SET VALUES You cannot get other configuration menu selections to display This is normal operation with controller code version 4 06 or higher Model 001 or 3 06 or higher Model 002 or 5 05 or higher Model 003 This means the menu is locked For more detail see the Message Description Action information for message 097 in the table for Reference Table 2 Modele O01 Operator panel keys operate OK but display is blank and LEDs are off
204. ee FREAR Twinax Configuration Models 001 002 See FIWINAX CONFIGURA Model 003 with twinax card See Parallel Configuration Models 001 002 and Model 003 with Lan twinax or no Parallel amp Serial Configuration Model 003 with serial card See Model 00 ontguratlon on page Printer Setup See Printer Adjustments See page 524 Power On Reset Yes Press Enter to execute Display Language See D Vital Product Data See Quit From Menu Restore previous values CONFIGURATION STORAGE Appendix A Printer Configuration 517 Table 92 Configuration Storage Recall Custom Set Values Power On Custom Set Power On Paper Source Custom Set A Custom Set E Custom Set B Custom Set F Last Used Front Bin 3 Custom Set G Custom Set G Custom Set A Custom Set E Rear Manual Custom Set D Custom Set H Custom Set B Custom Set F Bin 1 Last Used Custom Set C Custom Set G Bin 2 Custom Set D Custom Set H Recall Factory Defaults Save Current Values Yes Press Enter to execute Custom Set A Custom Set E Custom Set B Custom Set F Custom Set C Custom Set G Custom Set D Custom Set H ATTACHMENT Table 93 Attachment This choice is available only when the twinax attachment is installed Twinax Parallel REAR TRACTOR USE Table 94 Rear Tractor Use choices vary if the front tractor is also installed Push rear or front and rear Pull
205. eehee oS Ux SO ROS Bh eee Ree eRe mox Ros RUE 4 us 475 Electronics Wicca do oe See ee eee eee ee EE ee ee he ee ee he Oe 477 Mechanical Assembly I cack ee Bele a m9 Ge eee RKC BAe Rae Ce eS Se eS Bw ew ese d 467 Mechanical Assembly Ilo amp geen 2c he eee ee eV Re ee ee SE See ee ESE R OX ee ee ee s 470 Mechanical Assembly Wha ouod uie dee ox iue e OR Em ea ee ae qx ee oo ee wwe ee BS Be ea 473 Power Cords Parts Kits and Tools 2 aa a a a ee 481 Printer Mechanical Assembly and Base 2 2 ee llle 465 Printhead and Cables 4 oak oe oh ook Ge Be eee eR a ce a ee 479 Tractor Assembly Automatic Sheet Feeder and Stacker 1 2 2 a a lll len 463 Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 459 Assembly 1 Covers and Operator Panel A S q b if OOrrr Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 460 Assembly 1 continued Asm Part Index Number Units Description 1 1 63H6004 1 Tray Manual Sheet Feed 2 63H6020 1 Cover Front Main 2A 4 Screw Front Main Cover PP 08H7356 3 08H7337 1 Cover Left Side 3A 1 Screw Left Side Cover PP 08H7356 4 63H6007 1 Cover Top 4A 08H7370 1 Magnet Top Cover 4B 63H6066 1 Kit Top Cover Seals 7 5 08H7343 1 Cap Stacker Packaged 5 Per Pack 6 08H7344 1 Cap Stacker Packaged 5 Per Pack 7 08H7338 1 Cover Right Side 7A 1 Screw Right Side Cover PP 08H7356 8 63H6008 1 Guide Forms 9 08H7350 1 Panel Operator 4247
206. ement X1 x2 x3 are numbers in hexadecimal format which correspond to the measured voltages resolution of 20 mV The display continuously updates to track sensor output changes Press any key to go to step HO on page 2271 Chapter 2 Diagnostics 226 10 The following displays T amp D21 Sensor Test REPEAT TEST YES NO Press the Line Feed key to restart from path status step P on page 224 Press the Start key to end the test r NOTE The following procedures are available for T amp D30 through T amp D38 on the Model 003 only when a Twinax or Coax card is installed T amp D30 Adapter Board Link Test This test checks the interface between the attachment card and the logic board 1 Display T amp D30 Adapter Board Link Test RUN TEST YES END NO Note The message TEST RUNNING will display during the test 2 f an error message is displayed go to T amp nd 3 The test completed successfully if the display advances to the next test number T amp D31 Adapter Board CPU Test This test checks the attachment card CPU Display T amp D31 Adapter Board CPU Test RUN TEST YES END NO Chapter 2 Diagnostics 227 Note The message TEST RUNNING will display during the test If an error message is displayed go to The test completed successfully if the display advances to the next test number T amp D32 Adapter Board EPROM Test This test checks the attachment card OTBs o
207. emoval procedure 2 Follow the instructions in the bail repair kit See Removal 1 Power off O the printer 2 Remove the ribbon See Ribbon on page 3 Move the printhead to the far right 4 Note the position of the paper bail assembly Use Figure 157 as a reference Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 422 LEVEL 1 BAIL NO TAB LEVEL 2 BAIL WITH TAB When closed the bail end caps are Tab touches even with frame at this point frame hc0z0002 Figure 157 Correctly Positioned Paper Bail Level 1 and Level 2 r NOTE The paper bail may be slightly different than the ones shown here Later models may have a coil spring 5 To remove the paper bail grasp it as shown in Figure 158 Rotate the paper bail toward the front of the printer until the pivot posts on the sides can disengage r mS Mylar Figure 158 Grasping Paper Bail Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 423 n 1 Refer to for the correct positions of the paper bail and the forms guide Table 54 Forms Guide and Paper Bail Positions Selected Paper Path Forms Guide Paper Bail Metal Deflector Front Push Open Closed Manual Sheet Feed Open Closed Rear Push Open Closed ASF Open Closed Rear Pull Closed Removed Front Push Pull Closed Closed 2 Move the printhead to the far right 3 Grasp the paper bail as shown in r Important To avoid damaging the plastic strip
208. enus Making this change does the following things e Disables the Load Eject key function e Modifies how the Park function works The printer will request that the forms be broken at entry and then moved forward until ejected from the printer Black back forms cannot be used in these forms paths They can only be used in the rear push Manual Sheet Feed and Automatic Sheet Feeder bins 1 2 and 3 paper paths Appendix B Supplies Forms Paths amp Environmental Considerations 537 Cut Sheet Paper The following sizes of cut sheet paper may be used in the Manual Sheet Feed paper path A5 A4 A3 A2 Letter Legal Executive For optimum performance restrict printing to 12 7 mm 0 5 in from all edges holes or folds on the paper The term ength applies to the paper dimension parallel to the paper motion t t Width Width Paper feeds into the printer this way or Paper feeds into the printer this way Length Length Long edge Feed hc0g1900 Short edge Feed Appendix B Supplies Forms Paths amp Environmental Considerations 538 Forms Stacking Recommendations IBM recommends the following maximum stacking height when stacking continuous forms on the same work surface as the printer Approximately 76 mm 3 inches For Forms in Front Push or Rear Push Approximately 51 mm 2 inches
209. eplace the tractor cable assembly Chapter 2 Diagnostics 234 Table 28 T amp D Error Messages and Actions continued Error Message Description TD FRU 3 27 Carriage Movement 1 Failure TD FRU 0 28 Microcode Error Replace the logic board TD FRU 0 29 Microcode Error Replace the logic board See procedure again TD X FRU 4 20 40 T amp D Error 1 Power off O the printer and start the T amp D 2 Replace the logic board See Logic Board Models For Model D03 see Chapter 2 Diagnostics 235 Table 28 T amp D Error Messages and Actions continued Error Message Description Action TD 30 FRU 7 30 TD FRU 7 30 Attachment Card to Logic Board Communication Failure Related to error 203 1 Verify that the card or cable is securely plugged 2 Replace the attachment card TD 31 FRU 7 31 Attachment Card CPU Failure Chapter 2 Diagnostics 236 Table 28 T amp D Error Messages and Actions continued Error Message Description Action TD 32 FRU 7 32 Attachment Card 1 Replace the attachment card EPROM CRC 2 Replace the S1 microcode module Models 001 Failure oag For Model 003 reflash the pase code see TD 33 FRU 7 33 Attachment Card DRAM Failure TD 34 FRU 7 34 Attachment Card SRAM Failure Chapter 2 Diagnostics 237 Table 28 T amp D Error
210. er on the printer Does the power supply fan run OK Verify the failure symptom and Power off O the printer Install a new ASF bin assembly If bin 2 amp 3 ar epresent isolate by disconnecting inside the electronics card cover on bin 1 Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Model poe see How a Bun the m andl Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 88 MAP 0160 Ribbon Feed and Ribbon Lift Symptom Explanation Suspected FRUs Causes 73 SW ERR 4 0 X 89 RIBBON JAM 053 MACHINE CHECK ERR 4 0 X 089 RIBBON JAM Ribbon Feed or Lift Failures Ribbon installation refer to a 4247 User s Guide Ribbon cartridge customer responsibility Ribbon drive motor Ribbon lift motor Printhead cables Ribbon motion sensor sensor cable Logic board AFTA setting Table 12 MAP 0160 Ribbon Feed and Ribbon Lift Step Questions Actions Yes No 1 The following items are possible causes for ribbon feed Go to step Bl Run T amp D in automatic mode to or lift failures verify correct printer operation Ribbon installed incorrectly For Model A00 see fHow Td e Ribbon cartridge bad 21 P e Printhead cables not installed correctly For Models 001 002 or 003 Repair as needed see Does the problem still exist page 2011 2 Power on the printer Go to step B on page 90 Go to step A on page 90 Are you here due to a 73
211. erflow SW ERR Software Error T amp D Test and Diagnostic IPDS Intelligent Printer Data Stream SCS SNA Systems Network Architecture Character String FRU Field Replaceable Unit OTB One Time Burn modules ESD Electrostatic Discharge NPS Network Printer Server ACGA Attachment Card Guide Assembly Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 22 MAP 0100 START OF CALL Intermittent Strategy For intermittent symptoms see MAP 0210 Intermittent Failures on page had Note 2 For Model A00 T amp D display messages go to MAPs will not diagnose mechanical noise problems This type of problem should be solved by identifying the cause of the noise and then repairing or nea new parts Model 001 Model 002 or Model 003 T amp D display fesse go to MAP 0100 START OF CALL Table 1 MAP 0100 START OF CALL Step Questions Actions Yes No 1 Has the Customer completed the Problem Solving Go to step bl Attempt recovery using the Procedures in the BM 4247 Printer Model A00 User s Problem Solving Procedures in Guide SA24 4404 or the BM 4247 Printer Models a 4247 User s Guide Go to step 001 002 User s Guide SA24 4408 or the BM 4247 Dl as needed Printer Model 003 User s Guide 8544 5780 2 Does the printer display a message Go to step B on page 24l Go to step A on page 24 Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 23 Table 1 MAP 0100 START OF CALL continued Step
212. es pin 18 voltage is installed correctly See Figure 118 onl 4 Go to Step P on page 61l Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 154 Table 20 Reference Table NPS 540 with external power supply 1 Ensure the power supply is 9 volts CAUTION A 12 volt power supply will damage the NPS Disconnect power supply from NPS and check for 9 V ac output at the disconnected power supply If 9 V ac is missing replace the power supply Region or Country Part Number U S A 30H4064 Europe 30H4061 U K 30H4062 Australia 30H4063 Japan 30H4065 If 9 V ac is present replace the NPS unit Go to Step Table 21 Reference Table NPS 640 642 or 542 with external power supply Disconnect power supply from NPS and check for 12 V ac output at the disconnected power supply If 12 V ac is missing replace the power supply Region or Country Part Number U S A 14H7318 Europe 14H7320 U K 14H7319 Australia 30H4066 Japan 30H4021 If 12 V ac is present replace the NPS unit Go to Step Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 155 Reference Table 7 Network Server Problems NPS and LAN Attachment Card Symptom Probable Cause Action Network light flashes rapidly after power on self test on external Token Ring NPS all models Incorrect ring speed selected Select correct token ring speed Power off the NPS unit and try again NPS Server or LAN card will not communicate with host
213. et on the Model 003 and later Models of the 001 and 002 a Press the Micro key until Print Custom Sets is displayed b Press the Enter key and wait RUN To print a custom set on earlier Models 001 and 002 a Use the Printer Configuration Test to print each of the custom sets being used by the customer Press the Menu key until you see Configuration Storage b When the lt X gt on the display is correct use the Printer Configuration Test 6 Press the Cancel Print key to exit test mode How to Print and Clear the Error Log and Print the Usage Metrics Error Log When a previously unlogged error is encountered during printer operation the Code Description is entered into the Print Error Log and the Count is set to 00001 If the Code Description SX d in the error log from a previous posting the Count is incremented to the next higher number see The Print Error Log has a maximum capacity of 8 Code Description entries If fewer than 8 Code Descriptions are encountered the unused entries remain at zero When a ninth Code Description is encountered the oldest entry is deleted from the Print Error Log and the new entry is included in the list Stated another way only the 8 most current errors are maintained in the Print Error Log Chapter 2 Diagnostics 198 The maximum Count that will register for an Error is 256 Print Usage Metrics The test prints decimal values for the following data Power on hours Power o
214. ete TW TI oS gt gt 339 2232222 2922223 Figure 93 T amp D14 18 Wire Printhead Test Pattern Printout Reduced Sample printout is for Model A00 The printout for Models 001 and 003 is identical except for the title line Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 342 EEZREE EEEEEE 4 Dod 002 USEF TEST EEEEEE MTSULLER 7 yyyyyy ver L YY GENERATOR 7H201970 ver 1 05 ADAPTER 78405657 ver sx TWINAX IPDS a n n oz 03 04 oS 056 OF oa oF VER REN Um TF EE TIPP HII ATI O1934556789 apa vM Melde EAS EDS abcdefghiiklmnopars HELA ie AE 789 Cm 78ABCDEF m Tis Maia pN BAKET ILAPAT abcdetghijktanoparsLuvwryrti gt S A Ue HASAT e MICE HL NURCGESRMOTTETT ways 2 rp pu me p r ne rane Oi 2Suti i TRABCIEF 1 ssXa Z0123458789 2 TRABCDEFCHIJRLMNOPQRSTUSWXYZIN mbcdmfghijklanopgrstuvwxyriib ite 0123456788 TEABCDEF SHEEHY HEHEHHE iAH Ee E isti HHHIH HEHHHII E i 1 i aie EEEEEE EEEEEE Figure 94 T amp D14 9 Wire Printhead Test Pattern Printout for Model 002 Reduced Manual Sheet Feed Printout 1 Print the T amp D18 manual sheet feed print test Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 343 For Model A00 see For Models 001 002 and 008 see 2 Use the following table to analyze the printout in Figure 95 on page 345 Table 50 Test Criteria and Action
215. ext step Chapter 2 Diagnostics 220 11 Press the Form Feed key to feed the paper back into the printer The following message will display T amp D17 Tear Off Line Adjustment Test STORE YES NO 12 If the tear off adjustment is correct press the Line Feed key to store the tear off position If the tear off adjustment is not correct press the Start key and return to step 13 Ifthe a shows the following message install the paper in the rear tractor and return to step Zod T amp D17 Tear Off Line Adjustment Test REAR TEAR ADJ YES NO 14 If an error message is displayed go to 15 The test completed successfully if the display advances to the next test number T amp D18 Single Sheet Feed Printout Use this test to check manual sheet feed and line skew Display T amp D18 Single Sheet Feed Printout Test RUN TEST YES END NO 1 Press the Line Feed key If the sc is the following go to T amp D18 Single Sheet Feed Printout Test STORED PINCH XXXXX PRESS A KEY Return here after the sensors are tuned 2 Display T amp D18 Single Sheet Feed Printout Test INSERT CUT SHEET 3 Insert a single sheet of forms at least 356 mm 14 in wide on the manual sheet feed tray Chapter 2 Diagnostics 221 4 For printout analysis see 5 f an error message is displayed go to 6 When the print test is complete the display advances to the next test number T amp D19 To
216. f the problem is print too dark check the Impact Strength Soft or Strong If set to Strong change to Soft Refer to A00 Program Configuration Setup in the 4247 User s Guide Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 146 Print Quality Failures Darkness Location Quality Action Character or line spacing uneven or overprinting 1 Multiple part form copies too light or missing dots Smearing or smudging at perforations on multiple part forms or heavy stock Guide Smearing or smudging Missing dots or characters Incorrect print garbled print or wrong characters print Horizontal misalignment dots or characters move left or right Vertical misalignment dots or characters move up or down Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 147 Print Quality Failures Darkness Location Quality Action Vertical print line misalignment lines move upward page to page 1 Install a new upper feed roller 2 Install the latest level paper bail assembly with the improved spring arrangement The latest level paper bail has 2 blue tabs on the left end cap the older has 1 tab Vertical print line misalignment Lines move downward on the 1 Check the operation of the pinch rollers rear path as much as 1mm 0 039 in following the first page 2 The rear forms path is not the same as the front forms path after initial load Rear path registration is affect
217. f you do not know which version of the code that you need consult At the prompt Unknown File Type click on the Save File button a At the window Save As select the directory folder e g the 4247 folder in which to save the file you may first want to create a new folder b Verify that the File name window has the correct name C Click the Save button The code will download onto the C drive into the directory folder you have specified You may want to copy this code to a diskette for future use Appendix C Flashing the Memory of the Model 003 550 Downloading Model 003 Microcode from your computer into the flash memory Before flashing the memory of the 4247 Print the 4247 Custom Set Information using the Test key and Print Custom Set function Mark the printout as Before A DANGER To prevent serious personal injury from electrical shock when connecting or disconnecting the interface cable set the printer power switch to O Off and unplug the power cord A DANGER Do not connect or disconnect any communication port teleport attachment connector or power cord during an electrical storm 1 Power off the printer 2 Attach a standard parallel cable from the port on the computer to the 4247 If the printer is using an Ethernet LAN card remove the LAN attachment card to gain access to the parallel port You can leave the attachment card slot open until you have completed downloa
218. from the logic board Disconnect the EMI filter assembly from the operator panel cable connector SCC Follow the removal steps in reverse order Run the T amp D program in Gi DNSIMES We mode vap aS Perform all tests of T amp D05 Logic Board Models 001 and 002 r Logic Board Component Inspection During the logic board removal procedure it is necessary to visually inspect the logic board modules and components for burns cracks discolorations or other indications of damage If damage is found use Figure 125 eference to identify the damaged driver circuit Replace the cable and component den to the damaged circuit in addition to the logic board For example if you discovered a burned area around the U38 module you would replace the AFTA motor and the AFTA cable as well as the logic board Removal Attention The electronic parts of this printer can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Ensure that ESD protection devices and procedures including a static discharge wrist strap are used while working on the printer Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 378 AN DANGER To prevent serious personal injury from electrical shock when connecting or disconnecting the interface cable set the printer power switch to O Off and unplug the power cable A DANGER Do not connect or disconnect any communication port teleport attachment connector or power cord during an electrical storm Note Print or ob
219. from the platen This allows the paper to feed under the upper plastic shield when the carriage is at the right side The paper bail plastic shield should be held open approximately 10 mm 0 4 in by spring tension Inspect the following parts for wear damage or binds Install new parts as needed Upper feed roller Upper feed roller pulley Upper feed roller drive belt Platen Platen inside pulley Lower plastic shield Bearings or bushings Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 308 f Reinstall any parts that were removed or not replaced in this procedure Upper Plastic Shield Paper Bail Upper Feed Upper Feed Roller Pulley Roller Pulley Belt Platen Inside Pulley Plastic Shield Figure 64 Paper Feed Main Drive Viewed From Top adjustments when out of range can cause paper feed failures Ensure that they are correct 7 The following Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 309 AN CAUTION Isopropyl Alcohol is flammable Avoid sparks and open flame Upper feed rollers Platen Lower plastic shield Paper bail rollers Upper plastic shield 9 Usea lint free cloth to clean the tractor assembly jam sensor 10 If a problem still exists continue with the next section Individual Forms Paths Checks Use the chart below to select a specific area to check for jams or failure to feed problems Table 48 Forms Path Service Checks Paths
220. g messages will alternately display COVER IS OPEN PLEASE CLOSE IT 1 Close the top cover if open The following message will display OPEN COVER 2 Open the top cover If do not open the cover in approximately 10 seconds the following message will display CLOSE COVER 3 Close the top cover If you do not close the cover in approximately 10 seconds an error message will display If an error message is displayed go to f1 amp yes a 19 4 The test completed successfully if the display anes to the next test number T amp D20 NLQ Printhead Mode Use this test to select how the printhead prints in Near Letter Quality NLQ mode The default setting is NLQ 18 WIRE m Important This setting should be changed only if instructed by Plant Engineering The following message will display Y NLQ 18 WIRE N 1 In this mode the printhead will print NLQ by using 18 wires This is done by shifting one set of 9 wires 1B to 9B up relative to the fixed set of wires 1A to 9A and making one pass per line Chapter 2 Diagnostics 185 2 To select this mode press the Micro key and go to step 110 on page 189l 3 To select the next printing mode press the Load Form Feed key The following message will display Y NLQ 9 BIDI N 4 n this mode the printhead will print NLQ by using 9 wires and two passes per line in bidirectional mode 5 To select this mode
221. ge WAITING CODE DOWNLOAD USING PARALLEL PORT This message at power on indicates that the code is not complete and a download is required If the message at power on is FOUND ERROR 1 Power off the printer and wait for the computer screen message to change to Printer doesn t respond check connection Power on again and proceed with a retry of the download from the beginning o Appendix C Flashing the Memory of the Model 003 554 r Detail Note B If the power to the printer is interrupted during this phase the computer screen message will change to Printer doesn t respond check connection This indicates that the CRC checking was not completed To prevent any printer problems during operation you should repeat the download process from the ERG Be HIR r Detail Note C During the downloading an error message can appear FOUND ERROR xx Table 111 Error Codes XX Meaning 1 Illegal command detected 2 Error found in boot sector checksum 3 Error found in CRC 4 Error found during erase and write of flash memory If an error message appears power off the printer Corrective actions include Reseat or replace the parallel cable Retry copying code from the diskette or the database Retry the download procedure from Step zi If the Error message repeats you will need to replace the logic board and try again 7 When the download is completed power off the printer
222. gh the printer or the printer sensed forms are present when no forms were expected For Models 001 002 or 003 the messages 002 and 020 are sensed by the tractor sensors These messages indicate that forms have stopped Message 099 is sensed by the paper presence sensor located near the platen and indicates unexpected forms are present For Model A00 the sense mechanism uses message 02 for either condition Open and close the top cover while you observe the printhead carriage assembly e If the carriage assembly moves the paper presence sensor indicates unexpected forms are present This is equivalent to a 099 message e If the carriage assembly does not move the tractor sensors indicate the forms have stopped This is equivalent to a 002 or a 020 message Power off O the printer Is this a 002 or a 020 jam message or the A00 equivalent Go to step P on page 103 Go to step 28 on page 12d Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 102 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 2 Examine the tractors for jammed or damaged forms Are the forms OK 3 Check for paper debris such as chad stuck inside the tractor jam sensors Are the sensors free of chad Go to step g Go to step kon page 104 Remove any jammed or damaged forms You should investigate further to find the root cause of the E Go to step Wipe the sensors with a soft
223. hat pertains to that step This information is in the map flow and is an aid in describing why questions or actions are needed to find the correct failing FRU Follow instructions Instructions must be followed exactly in the order given Questions rely on the instructions immediately before the questions Do not change the conditions prepared by the instructions before answering the question Do not power off O the printer or disconnect any cable unless you are instructed to do so Whenever possible the MAPs are written so that No is the error path answer Verify repair or exchange FRU When a card or a cable is identified as the failing FRU reseat it and verify that the same problem remains If the problem continues exchange the FRU Start again at MAP 0100 START OF CALL on page 3 to ensure the correct operation of the printer before returning it to the customer Intermittent Strategy For intermittent symptoms see MAP 0210 Intermittent Failures on page tao Voltage Continuity Readings When taking voltage or continuity readings do exactly as the MAP instructs Abbreviations Used in This Book AFTA Automatic Forms Thickness Adjustment ASF Automatic Sheet Feeder CPI Characters Per Inch CPU Central Processing Unit EMI Electromagnetic Interference EPA Environmental Protection Agency MAP Maintenance Analysis Procedure NLQ Near Letter Quality Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 21 NVRAM Non Volatile Random Access Memory OVFL Ov
224. he pins shown in the chart Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 376 W Logic Board Parallel Connector Figure 118 Model A00 Logic Board Jumper Location Viewed From Rear Note If after installing the logic board the NPS 540 power light is not lighted check for 5 V dc on pin 18 with a volt meter pin 18 is shown on connector Table 51 Model A00 logic board jumper location to enable 5 V dc on pin 18 4247 A00 Logic Board Level Install jumper between pins Level 1 2 3 logic board 2 and 3 Level 4 logic board 1 and 2 4 Run the T amp D program in automatic moga Ensure that T amp D11 T amp D12 T amp D15 T amp D16 and T amp D17 are adjusted if indicated 5 Use the configuration setup printout to configure the printer See IBM 4247 Printer Model A00 User s Guide EMI Filter Model A00 Early Level Logic Board Only Removal Attention The electronic parts of this printer can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Ensure that ESD protection devices and procedures including a static discharge wrist strap are used while working on the printer 1 Power off O the printer and disconnect the power cord from the customer outlet 2 Put the covers in the service position See Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 377 x Disconnect the stacker cable connector from the logic board Note Some connectors have retaining clips Disconnect the operator panel cable connector
225. he above rule you may prevent a current from passing through your body When using testers set the controls correctly and use the approved probe leads and accessories for that tester A DANGER Many customers have near their equipment rubber floor mats that contain small conductive fibers to decrease electrostatic discharges Do not use this type of mat to protect yourself from electrical shock Stand on suitable rubber mats obtained locally if necessary to insulate you from grounds such as metal floor strips and machine frames Observe the special safety precautions when you work with very high voltages these instructions are in the safety sections of maintenance information Use extreme care when measuring high voltages Regularly inspect and maintain your electrical hand tools for safe operational condition Never assume that power has been disconnected from a circuit First check that it has been powered off O Always look carefully for possible hazards in your work area Examples of these hazards are moist floors nongrounded power extension cables power surges and missing safety grounds Do not touch live electrical circuits with the reflective surface of a plastic dental mirror The surface is conductive such touching can cause personal injury and machine damage To ensure correct grounding do not service the following parts with the power on when they are removed from their normal operating places in
226. he jumper connects the serial attachment connector pin 1 to frame ground Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 391 Coax Attachment Card Models 001 and 002 Removal Attention The electronic parts of this printer can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Ensure that ESD protection devices and procedures including a static discharge wrist strap are used while working on the printer A DANGER To prevent serious personal injury from electrical shock when connecting or disconnecting the interface cable set the printer power switch to O Off and unplug the power cord A DANGER Do not connect or disconnect any communication port teleport attachment connector or power cord during an electrical storm 1 Disconnect the host cable 2 Put the covers in the service position See 3 Remove the screws 4 Slide the card away from the opening in the attachment plate and lift it up enough to disconnect the attachment cable from the logic board 5 Disconnect the cable from the logic board and lift the card out of the printer Attention Notice the metal shield on the back of the Level 2 coax attachment card Do not bend or crease the metal shield Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 392 6 Verify that the new attachment card has a microcode module installed If not you must transfer the module from the attachment card you are replacing to the new card For an SCS only printer An SCS only
227. he paper up or press the Load Form Feed key to move the paper down The range is 128 to 127 Each unit is approximately 0 2 mm When the tear off is correct go to the next step Chapter 2 Diagnostics 182 8 Press the Micro 4 key to get the next display message YES lt STORE gt NO 9 Press the Micro key to store the front tear off adjustment and get the next display message YES T RE ADJ NO Note T RE is Tear off line REar tractor ADJustment 10 To exit this test without adjusting the rear tear off line press the Load Form Feed key 11 To run the rear tear off line adjustment ensure a tractor assembly is installed in the rear position 12 Install paper in the tractor assembly 13 To select the rear tear off line adjustment press the Micro key 14 Arow of Xs will be printed on the first print line The paper will feed to the tear off area 15 The Xs should be completely on the paper The top of the Es should be ap proximatel 1 mm 0 in below the perforation If this condition does not exist perform FT amp g Mest an page 174 and return here The following message will display T RE XXX 16 Note XXX can be any number between 128 and 127 E a a owe the correct position of the perforation for a clean tear off If the tear off needs to be adjusted press the Micro t key to move the paper up or press the Load Form Feed key to move the paper down The range
228. head Carefully follow the rM procedure Printhead Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer po Au For Model A00 see a Power off O the printer b Connect the stacker cable connector c Power on the printer Does the power supply fan run OK Go to step 13 on page 84 Power off O the printer Install a new stacker cable Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Model poe see How a Bu Bun the m andl Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 83 Table 11 MAP 0150 Power Supply continued Questions Actions Yes No 13 a Power off O the printer b Connect the carriage motor connector c Power on the printer Does the power supply fan run OK Go to step hal Power off O the printer Install a new carriage motor See Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer TEE For Model A00 see a Power off O the printer b Connect the ribbon motor connector c Power on the printer Does the power supply fan run OK Go to step 15 on page 8H Power off O the printer Install a new ribbon drive motor See Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Model A00 see How lo Run the Test andl Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 84 Table 11 MAP 0150 Power Supply continued Questions Actions Yes No 15 a Power off O th
229. here are different logic boards for every model of the 4247 printer Ensure that you follow the correct procedure for the model you are working with when removing or eee For all other models check the appropriate section in this minem Cables on cards and boards Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 346 AX DANGER To prevent serious personal injury from electrical shock when connecting or disconnecting the interface cable set the printer power switch to O Off and unplug the power cord DANGER Do not connect or disconnect any communication port teleport attachment connector or power cord during an electrical storm Printer Covers Removal Disconnect the power cord from the rear of the printer Disconnect the attachment cable from the rear of the printer Remove paper from the printer Remove the front and rear if installed tractor assembly 2 latches Remove the ASF stacker option if installed Open the top cover approximately 45 degrees and lift up and to the rear DPPN Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 347 Figure 96 Top Cover 7 Remove the side cover screws and side covers Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 348 Figure 97 Side Covers 8 Raise the paper guide approximately 45 degrees and lift it up and to the rear Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 349 Figure 98 Paper Guide 9 Remove the operator panel a Press on th
230. hing on the new shaft Install the eccentric bushing onto the flat end of the new shaft Install the new shaft into the printer with the eccentric bushing on the right side Position the eccentric bushing to the reference mark Install the support shaft into the right side of the frame using the screw Install the support shaft into the left side of the frame using the screw Perform the carriage support shaft adjustment See Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 440 Sensor Cable Assembly Removal Remove the printer covers See Printer Covers on page 3471 Remove the upper feed roller assembly See Remove the platen assembly Some steps are completed See Disconnect the sensor cable connector from the logic board Note the location and path of the cable to aid installation de te a Figure 176 Sensor Cable Connector Model A00 Early Level Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 441 Figure 177 Sensor Cable Connector Model A00 Late Level and Models 001 002 and 003 Models 001 and 003 have connectors A and B Model 002 has only connector B 6 Remove the screws for each of the 5 sensors and remove the cable assembly Single Sheet Feed Tray Print Head Home Ribbon Motion Figure 178 Sensor Cable and Sensor Locations Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 442 Replacement 1 Follow the removal steps in revers
231. icro Y key twice to bypass this test If a loop back connector is installed perform the recommended action This error can occur in any test that requires a mechanical operation T amp D 11 12 14 15 16 17 or 18 Chapter 2 Diagnostics 196 Test and Diagnostic Information Models 001 002 and 003 How To Print the Printer Demonstration 1 Power off O the printer 2 Load the printer with at least 22 in 55 9 cm of blank fanfold forms in the same tractor and forms path the customer is using Note If there are no blank fanfold forms available obtain two sheets of blank letter or legal size paper from the customer Use the manual sheet feed to run the printer demonstration 3 Power on the printer 4 Press the Stop key to make the printer Not Ready only the Power LED is lighted 5 Press the Test key The message 4247 OPERATOR TESTS appears 6 Press the Micro key until the Printer Demonstration test is displayed below 4247 OPERATOR TESTS 7 Press the Enter key and wait for the test to finish 8 Press the Cancel Print key to exit test mode How To Print Firmware Part Number and Version Levels 1 Power off O the printer 2 Load the printer with at least 22 in 55 9 cm of blank fanfold forms in the same tractor and forms path the customer is using Note If there are no blank fanfold forms available obtain two sheets of blank letter or legal size paper from the customer Use the manua
232. ide shows the key functions of the Models 001 and 002 and the available configuration values and the process for setting them This reference is shipped with Models Lul and 002 of the printer Most of the information contained in this publication is located in f IBM 4247 Printer Models 001 002 Programming Reference SA24 4410 This mna describes the programming functions that control the printer This reference is not shipped with the printer it can be ordered from IBM Model 003 Publications The following publications provide information on or related to the Model 003 IBM 4247 Printer Model 003 User s Guide S544 5780 This guide describes the operating procedures for Model 003 of the 4247 Printer It contains information on setup operating the printer maintaining the printer error recovery and programming information This document is shipped with the Model 003 Printer AXIS 5400 User s Manual This guide is available on the AXIS Online CD which is shipped with the Ethernet LAN attachment IBM 4247 Printer Models 001 002 Programming Reference SA24 4410 This reference is also applicable to the Model 003 This manual describes the programming functions that control the printer This reference is not shipped with the printer however it may be ordered from IBM Common Publications IBM 4247 Printer Safety Notices SA24 4406 This manual lists the safety notices contained in the 4247 Printer library in English and many other l
233. if the screw will not tighten Carriage drive belt tension must be correct See Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 335 Carriage Drive Belt Print Head Mask Clamp Idler Pulley Figure 90 Carriage Drive Belt Viewed From Top 6 Inspect the carriage shafts and the attached hardware Look for damage binds or incorrect installation Note Do not lubricate the shafts You should find the carriage shafts to be clean If the small carriage support shaft is coated with a thick viscous film replace the carriage support shaft bushing If the large carriage shaft is coated replace the carriage assembly 7 Verify that the carriage shaft retainers and the sheetmetal wear surfaces are installed correctly The retainers are installed correctly when the shafts are pinched into location on the printer side frames Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 336 7 e Retainer E90APH6 Figure 91 Carriage Shaft Components Viewed From Top 8 Inspect the printhead mask for wear damage and correct installation Ensure the corners of the forms are not jamming in the diamond shaped hole or catching on the adhesive of the mask To inspect both sides of the mask remove the printhead and open the gap To replace the printhead mask remove the support shaft and platen to gain access to the front of the carriage 9 Inspect for wear or damage the plastic shields that cover the platen Chapter 5
234. int Usage Metrics display press the Enter key and wait for the usage metrics to print To exit test mode Chapter 2 Diagnostics 199 Press the Return key to return to offline Not Ready or e Press the Cancel Print key to return to online Ready Figure 17 shows a sample printout of the Models 001 002 and 003 error log The asterisk indicates the most recent error Figure 18 shows a sample printout of the print usage metrics Print Error Log Count Code Description 00007 002 FORMS JAMMED FRONT TRACTOR 00001 051 MACHINE CHECK 00003 020 FORMS JAMMED REAR TRACTOR 00001 055 MACHINE CHECK 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 Figure 17 Sample of Error Log Models 001 002 and 003 Print Usage Metrics Power on Hours 84 Power on Cycles 136 DP Characters 1 541 409 NLQ Characters 0 Number of Barcodes 0 Pages with Graphics or Images 0 Figure 18 Sample of Print Usage Metrics Models 001 002 and 003 Chapter 2 Diagnostics 200 How To Run the Test and Diagnostic T amp D Programs The T amp D program can be run in two modes Single Test Mode or Automatic Test Mode Single Test Mode is used to run individual tests for example to perform an adjustment or print a print test Automatic Test Mode which runs all the tests sequentially is used to verify correct printer operation Automatic mode requires manual intervention for several of the tests 1 2 Power off O the printer Remove all paper f
235. inthead Pines iius o0000Gc0000000000000000000 p jamm Not Ribbon Lift Used Connector Pin 1 26 Pin Connector Figure 26 9 Wire Printhead Wiring Model 002 RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS Note Allow the printhead to cool before taking resistance measurements Table 32 9 Wire Printhead Resistance Measurements Part Resistance Temperature Print Wire Coil 5 Ohm 10 20 C 68 F Thermal Sensor 1000 Ohm 6 256 77 F Example To measure the resistance of the coil for print wire 1 measure between pins 21 and 22 of the 26 pin cable connector Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams 245 Table 33 26 Pin Printhead Connector 9 Wire Printhead 1 Pin Names Pin Names 1 Wire 9 Coil 2 Not Used Wire 9 Coil 4 Not Used Thermal 6 Thermal Sensor Ground Sensor 7 Wire 2 Coil 8 Wire 2 Coil Wire 3 Coil 10 Wire 3 Coil 11 Wire 4 Coil 12 Wire 4 Coil 13 Wire 8 Coil 14 Wire 8 Coil 15 Wire 7 Coil 16 Wire 7 Coil 17 Wire 6 Coil 18 Wire 6 Coil 19 Wire 5 Coil 20 Wire 5 Coil 21 Wire 1 Coil 22 Wire 1 Coil 23 Ribbon Lift Pin 24 Ribbon Lift Pin 2 3 25 Ribbon Lift Pin 26 Ribbon Lift Pin 4 Carriage Motor Wiring The carriage motor is a stepper motor with a 1 8 step angle The motor connects directly to the logic board RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams 246 Note Allow the carriage motor to cool before taking resistance measurements
236. inued NLQ Typeface Character Set Printer Compatibility Courier Gothic PC1 PC2 Italics Epson Only See Sub Menu in Table 103 Alarm Control Override Host Model 003 only Enabled Disabled Paper Source Disabled Enabled Characters Per Inch Disabled Enabled Lines Per Inch Disabled Enabled Maximum Page Length Disabled Enabled Parallel Interface Serial Interface Select In Signal See Sub Menu in Table 104 See Sub Menu in Hable 105 on page 529 Enabled Disabled AutoFeed XT Enabled Disabled Table 103 Printer Compatibility Sub Menu 3 Automatic LF on CR f 4 Automatic CR on LF 5 Form Feed Suppression Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Disabled 6 Init T 7 Condensed Print 8 Slashed Zero t Appendix A Printer Configuration 528 Table 103 Printer Compatibility Sub Menu continued Enabled 15 Enabled Disabled 16 7 Disabled 17 1 9 20 CPI Enabled Disabled Table 104 Parallel Interface Sub Menu Interface Type Input Buffer Size PC Parallel 1284 Parallel 256 2K 12K 32K 64K Table 105 Serial Interface Sub Menu Interface Type Input Buffer Size Data Bits RS 232C RS 422A 256 8 2K 7 12K 32K 64K Baud Rate Parity Pacing Protocol Appendix A Printer Configuration 529 Table 105 Serial I
237. ion of each test go to E1 amp you here 64 or return to the step that sent Chapter 2 Diagnostics 162 d If an error is detected an error message will display TD XX FRU X X e For a description of error messages go to 18 f Press the Load Form Feed key to end the T amp D Boum g The following message will display END T amp D h Power off O the printer and remove all loop back connectors if installed i Single test mode description stops here 13 Automatic Test Mode YES SINGLE NO a Fress the Load Form Feed key You will be prompted by the display or the instructions in FT amp DI ye 164 to press keys or install paper b 7 an error is detected an error message will display TD XX FRU X X c For a description of error messages go to d Ifall the tests run OK the following message will be displayed END T amp D e Power off O the printer and remove all loop back connectors if installed Chapter 2 Diagnostics 163 T amp D Descriptions 1 If an error message is displayed during the T amp D program note the error information TD XX FRU X X 2 Press any of the keys 3 The following message will display REPT SKIP INIT 4 To repeat the last test press the Micro key to select REPT 5 To skip to the next test press the Micro Y key to select SKIP 6 To restart the T amp D program from the beginning press
238. ion suggested Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 25 MAP 0110 Automatic Sheet Feeder Symptom Explanation Suspected FRUs Causes 02 FORMS JAM 099 FORMS JAMMED Automatic Sheet Feeder ASF failures Paper or debris in forms path Mechanical Main paper feed Printer logic board Cable Stacker Bins Before starting this map 1 Ensure that the ASF cable is plugged into the stacker 2 Fan the paper in the paper bins 3 Ensure the ASF assembly is installed correctly The ASF assembly has 2 hook latches that fit into 2 slots on the printer rear frame directly behind the platen For detailed ASF installation instructions see IBM 4247 Printer Automatic Sheet Feeder Guide SA24 4407 and BM 4247 Printer Model A00 User s Guide SA24 4404 OF IBM 4247 Printer Models 001 002 User s Guide SA24 4408 OF BM 4247 Printer Model 003 User s Guide S544 5780 4 Ensure the paper load lever on each ASF bin is closed Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 26 e The paper load lever is located on the right side of each bin when viewed from the rear of the printer See The paper load lever is closed when it is pushed as far toward the front of the printer as possible Forms Selector Levers Left Paper Guide Locking Lever Left Paper Guide Paper Load Leve
239. ive Belt Tension Screws 6 Remove the following Drive pulley retaining clip Left side bearing screws Left side bearing Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 430 Drive ini Pulley Gip N GS Platen E90APL1 gt 4 Bearing Screws Figure 167 Platen Viewed From Top 7 Slide the platen to the left until the right side is free lift and remove Replacement 1 Follow the removal steps in reverse order Note Ensure the upper feed roller shaft drive belt is installed on the feed roller shaft 2 Reinstall the bearing retainer position it in a way that eliminates any radial looseness of the bearing Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 431 Screw A Screw B e90aloch Figure 168 Platen Bearing Retainer Push Retainer in Direction of Arrow To do this push the retainer toward the front bottom corner of the printer shown by arrow in Figure 168 while you tighten the screws 3 Perform the paper feed belt tension adjustment See 4 Perform AFTA service check See Printhead Mask Removal Remove the operator panel and all of the printer covers See Remove the ribbon cartridge See Remove the paper bail assembly See Par 10 Open the printhead gap to its maximum limit by rotating the AFTA ndean wheel to the maximum value Loosen the left end of the aluminum profile Oh O o Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 432 a On the left side near the ribbon drive motor
240. ive in Ready State Active in Ready State Enabled Disabled Automatic Restore Continuous Forms Eject Mode Manual Paper Overlay Disabled Data Timer 10 Seconds Timer 20 Seconds Timer 30 Seconds Timer 40 Seconds Timer 50 Seconds a Immediate Eject Delayed Eject Enabled Disabled Automatic Manual Load Manual Feed Eject Mode Bar Code Print Direction Enabled Disabled Top of Form Automatic Top of Form Bidirectional Unidirectional Graphics Print Direction Perforation Safety Jam Sensors Bidirectional Unidirectional Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled PRINTER ADJUSTMENT Table 87 Printer Adjustment Front AFTA Front Tear Position Front Left Margin Alignment 0 5 to 3 0 10 Fixed 1 to 8 312 to 24 0 to 60 Front Paper Load Position Rear AFTA Rear Tear Position Appendix A Printer Configuration 514 Table 87 Printer Adjustment continued 0 24 to 288 0 5 to 3 Fixed 1 to 8 0 312 to 24 Rear Left Margin Alignment Rear Paper Load Position ASF Bin 1 AFTA 10 0 to 60 0 24 to 288 0 5 to 3 Fixed 1 to 8 ASF Bin 1 Left Margin Alignment ASF Bin 1 Paper Load Position ASF Bin 2 AFTA 10 0 to 60 0 24 to 576 0 5 to 3 Fixed 1 to 8 ASF Bin 2 Left Margin Alignment ASF Bin 2 Paper Load Position A
241. k 2 6 a llle s ns 325 Ribbon Feed and Ribbon Lift Service Check 2 2s 66 eee eee oo ee ee ee RE 330 Printhead Drive Service Check 2 1 2 a ls 333 Pint Quality Checks so ew aae e eae Bee Eee e a eS ee e Eo ee ae eee s 338 Removals Replacements quod mee ee o x cw o eR o POR GRON ue EO OU eee WO He ee FOX So od de es 346 OVEINIOW uu uw MuR hub ek er BREE Eee koe eee Ee o UR EE No EUR Hou dese o Eod 346 Printer COWS e s s ec cece eee AGRO RES SAE a SAGER ECA oe oe Be AS a 347 RIDDOM uc xx eae a eee ee eS NOS oue ew E S Ww ERE ee E NOB X ee Ree ee 353 Operator Panel s c e e seg s E dene med EURO he do dee E HORE exa a e a RSE SE UR a a RE dea aE 355 ginn c e ee a ee Bae ee TUTUP 356 Model 003 Attachment Cards Serial Twinax LAN Coax 0 2 0 0 000000 2 ae 359 Attachment Card Guide Assembly with the Interposer Connector Model 003 364 Logic Board Model 003 uae em oom p ERO miedo RR URS e RC 9 3 RC ROS wo EEE TR Ar S s 366 Logic Board Model A0O lt 6 4 lt c2 485 OR ue X RE MRD Ao ROSE GR X cm mue Wc OX WX BED 370 EMI Filter Model A00 Early Level Logic Board Only 0 000 eee eee 377 Logic Board Models 001 and 002 aoaaa ox Rok 3 ox x E Roo E Dee E Rx 36 x Ox xc ES RO ES 378 Logic Board Component Inspection Reference 0002 llle 385 Serial Attachment Card Model A00 2 4 4 44 02 oso Roo ERE RERO RR EER OK xS E ee 390 Coax Attachment Card Models
242. k 3 4 ISCR56 CRE K g m so ugg 5 4L d o c i 3 gt g Boo RSII20 of DU100 eL21ce9 BA C70 DIa 5 c88 uso CRS208Le la lolol E52 p RS 2 le C206 S U34 RsT2L e je oe x RS222 d T is E z amp j b RS223 C97 o x x x x b 7 D 5 RS75 Ce RUE T99 Hj EE paita cose EeRs18 o c94 E lel R5103 a 2 Rees LI u58 zana U28 Ce DE RST02 e do Eso SETS inp C235 z FH 6161 N RS2960 0235 peice a U1 8 U49 La RS 39C3 WZ cR52 Kd cei R Rs as 2 RSI41 2 Sige o ia n elo elal zins Sl Sls 5 L 4 easel lale Se less ass zg RA4 RAG RAT ek CR45 Sle ole S Ss 8 BSleS s Ss 5 S Lil 13 ax se S xx ve xc ele x 5 ely RAS RAS OO Ra us U C108 o S55 m RA13 Sz ee 36 i U26 U33 U32 Ei SEJ Be Ed o o i o RST95 zu Og C RS197 RST98 alla slo x sla o x lelg lk CR44 S ei x SL S SS Ls s 5222555 SB BI SEIRRIS S S go zB au Bo 5T x 9 x SR IO zl D Unt 2 C167 z RS49 oiia 3 o BRSSO eer E Bees U25 U29 U31 o S r fe lo lo RS52 RS21B d x a e fo Jo RS74 Loe 63 2 x RR RRR Sus U11 a Le 4 5 v 2 i olg a s Del olaf tele lel uU U o ecios E zol Sisi Eo EE ens e ens i38 Jo c122 Sle 25555 Slglolg s 55 e RSE E x x 9jx x x 9 fe x o_ices U35 cr er ifs U U3 i E ss ge 27 1 3 c 2 pRS47 ze op RS48 2 5 s o Ul m d 5 RS170 neo RS107 o E 8 U 8 RS106 m n UL 2 RST6
243. k the rollers should be Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 323 Pinch Roller 4 Gear Open E Gear Closed open If the rollers are not open run n TaD in single test mode Pinch Roller e90atd1 Figure 77 Platen Pinch Roller Gear Viewed From Left Side 1 Install a tractor assembly in the rear push position and install fanfold forms in the tractors See Figure 81 on page 328 2 Press the Path key to select the rear push forms path 3 Press Load Form Feed key and observe the following oocmp D The carriage will move past the normal left margin The bellcrank the mechanism that rotates the platen gear toward the platen is driven by the carriage The platen gear is engaged with the pinch roller gear The paper feed motor turns the platen gear and the pinch roller gear until the pinch rollers are closed raised and the rollers touch the platen The carriage moves to the right allowing the bellcrank to move away from the platen and platen gear to return to the left or home position The paper feeds forward 1 form Ensure the gear washer spring and retaining clip are present Press the Load Form Feed key again to verify that the rollers restore to open not touching the platen To repeat this service check press the Park key twice and go to step al Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 324 Figure 78 Platen Gear and Bellcrank 4 If this vr d fails inspect the pinch roller parts
244. l NLQ mode The second line prints a less than symbol draft mode tilde NLQ mode and a greater than symbol draft mode m m Install a new logic board For Model A00 see page For Model AO sec page agia Board For Models Logic Board 4 Install new printhead cables Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 340 Table 49 Print Quality Tests and Actions Fanfold continued Line Description Action if failure 10 Printhead drive test Prints 19 lines The left margin should be even 11 Print wire test Look for light or missing dots or ink smearing 12 Continuous straight line 13 See Line 5 above 14 Skew test in draft mode The line should print parallel to the edge of paper Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 341 EEEEEE e M EEEEEE o EAR AQ USER TEST 03 ZONTROLLER 78404265 Rel 1 41 GENERATOR 78404244 Rel 1 4 m mu EC Bi Mi Go m pu Hr mNi KB E ER ma rs _ EE m m NEN m REC m mE ao ae m i OFA DLA CSA 064 07A OBA OFA 0iB 028 Q3B O4B 058 DoR 07E OBB OFB go eM uui nm eS Ld JA IJITIIIIILIIPLIPJ d IIT SELH i HI nU LEETE ae Se ER ANEAOMRUR EROR ARRRRAERKM 1 4 XS Ov WH SOLE OO iA US 0122154789 C
245. l sheet feed to run the printer demonstration 3 Power on the printer 4 Press the Stop key to make the printer Not Ready only the Power LED is lighted 5 Press the Test key The message 4247 OPERATOR TESTS appears 6 Press the Micro key until the Firmware Information test is displayed below 4247 OPERATOR TESTS 7 Press the Enter key and wait for the firmware part number Controller Code U54 Generator Code U02 and Attachment Code S1 versions to print 8 Press the Cancel Print key to exit test mode Chapter 2 Diagnostics 197 How to Print the Printer Configuration and the Custom Sets It is possible to store up to 8 custom configurations The current printer configuration is shown on the operator panel display in the upper right corner as lt X gt 1 Load the printer with at least 22 in 55 9 cm of blank fanfold forms in the same tractor the customer is using Note If there are no blank fanfold forms available obtain two sheets of blank letter or legal size paper from the customer Use the manual sheet feed to print the configuration Press the Stop key to make the printer Not Ready only the Power and Online LED s are lighted Press the Test key The message 4247 OPERATOR TESTS appears and the Online LED goes out Press the Micro 4 key until the Printer Configuration test is displayed below 4247 OPERATOR TESTS Press the Enter key and wait for the configuration to print To print a custom s
246. ler Sensor Tune Ribbon Feed and Lift Motors Note Ensure that there is no paper in any paper path This test does the paper path sensor tuning but does not tune the tractor jam sensors as these sensors are not adjustable 1 Display T amp D11 Pinch Roller Sensor Tune Ribbon RUN TEST YES END NO 2 Press the Line Feed key Chapter 2 Diagnostics 208 3 Display T amp D11 Pinch Roller Sensor Tune Ribbon STORED PINCH XXXXX PRESS A KEY 4 The status of the platen pinch rollers stored in microcode KXXXX OPEN OR CLOSED must match the position of the rollers r Important In the next step ensure you do not power off the printer when removing the left side cover to look at the platen pinch roller gear 5 Remove the left side cover and look at the platen pinch roller gear on the left side to determine if the rollers are closed touching platen or open not touching platen EU eh Qo Pinch Roller EA Gear Open E Gear Closed Pinch Roller e90atd1 Figure 21 Pinch Roller Gear Viewed From Left Side 6 Press any key and get this to display T amp D11 Pinch Roller Sensor Tune Ribbon MECHANICAL PINCH OPEN CLOSE 7 Compare the position of the gear with the display in step cj Attention Machine damage can result if the wrong pinch roller position is stored 8 Press the Line Feed key if the gear is OPEN or the Start key if the gear is CLOSED Chapter 2 Diagnostics 209
247. level with the top of the socket Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 393 Screws po Microcode Module S1 Screws Screws p Cable Connector S ZA Bevel Corner Cut Off e Figure 128 Coax Attachment Short Card Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 394 Replacement Follow the removal steps in reverse order To connect the coax attachment card to the logic board 1 Position the card over the logic board with one hand 2 Plug the attachment card cable into the logic card connector with the other hand Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 395 Twinax Attachment Card Models 001 and 002 Removal Attention The electronic parts of this printer can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Ensure that ESD protection devices and procedures including a static discharge wrist strap are used while working on the printer A DANGER To prevent serious personal injury from electrical shock when connecting or disconnecting the interface cable set the printer power switch to O Off and unplug the power cord A DANGER Do not connect or disconnect any communication port teleport attachment connector or power cord during an electrical storm Disconnect the host cable Put the covers in the service position See Remove the screws Slide the card away from the opening in the attachment plate and lift it up enough to disconnect the attachment cable from the logic b
248. lia 13 6952338 e Japan Locking 14 13F9979 1 Greece Turkey 15 14F0015 1 Pakistan e PARTS KITS 16 08H7351 1e Parts Kit 1 Mechanical 17 08H7352 1 Parts Kit 2 Mechanical 18 08H7353 e Parts Kit 3 Plastic Parts 20 08H7355 e e Parts Kit 5 Metric Screws 21 08H7356 1 Parts Kit 6 Self Tapping Screws 22 63H6001 e Parts Kit 7 Nuts Washers and Retaining Clips 23 02N7555 e e Parts Kit 8 Printhead mounting Screws and Washers 5 sets 27P9654 e Parts Kit 9 Carriage Motor Mounting screws and grommets 3 sets 24 08H7358 1 Kit Relocation Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 481 Assembly 10 continued Asm Part Index Number Units Description e TOOLS 25 08H7268 1 Connector Loop Back Serial RS232 26 08H7259 1 Connector Loop Back Serial RS422 27 08H7269 1 Connector Loop Back Parallel 28 08H7270 1 Connector Loop Back Stacker ASF 29 08H7271 e Knob Paper Feed 30 7335523 1 Extractor Microcode Module See ELECTRONICS Il 31 10G3902 1 Extractor Microcode Module See ELECTRONICS Il COMMUNICATION CABLES 32 38F8254 1 Cable Twinax Self Terminating Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 482 Chapter 7 Preventative Maintenance There are no Preventative Maintenance Procedures for the IBM 4247 Printer Copyright IBM Corp 1995 2001 483 Appendix A Printer Configur
249. ller code release level 2 04 T amp D21 provides information on the operation of the front fanfold presence sensor rear fanfold presence sensor and manual cutsheet presence sensor Use the test to verify correct sensor operation Verify sensor operation by inserting and removing a form from a forms path and checking for correct changes in the display status given in step 5 1 Display T amp D21 Sensor Test RUN TEST YES END NO 2 Press the Line Feed key The printer displays the following which gives you the option of performing a sensor tune at this time T amp D21 Sensor Test SENSOR TUNE YES NO 3 To perform a sensor tune press the Line Feed key If this is selected follow the steps in T amp D11 Return to here after the sensors are tuned Press the Start key to skip to step 4 without performing a Sensor Tune 4 The following displays T amp D21 Sensor Test PATH STATUS YES NO 5 Press the Line Feed key to display sensor status Press the Start key to skip to step Chapter 2 Diagnostics 224 The current path status displays T amp D21 Sensor Test C x F x R x P yy PRESS A KEY 6 where C is status of the cutsheet sensor F is status of the front fanfold sensor R is status of the rear fanfold sensor x Will be B or F to indicate PATH BLOCKED or PATH FREE P yy will be P OP or P CL to indicate the position of the lower rollers OPEN of CLOSED The display is
250. loor i Input Output Top of Stack Lower than Printer 2 Shelf Shelf 381mm g 15 in 8 Input Output Floor 8 Floor Appendix B Supplies Forms Paths amp Environmental Considerations 544 Automatic Sheet Feeder Paper Path The next figure shows the dual push forms path along with the automatic sheet feeder ASF If using any of the available forms paths along with the ASF ensure the input and output stacks that are in the rear of the printer are placed far enough away from the ASF bins so that the bins do not interfere with the movement of the forms Output P D Input Input Floor E Forms Stacking With the 4247 Printer Stand E p Output Output e Quipu zm E Outpu dett z SS lt u Input naue Rear Rear Input Input e90aas3 Ez fay Dual Push Path Dual Push Path with ASF Note If the printer is set up for dual push paths and you are using only 1 path use the front input for the front push rear pull or push pull forms paths Use the rear input for the rear push forms path Appendix B Supplies Forms Paths amp Environmental Considerations 545 Environmental Requirements The printer operates correctly in environments that are typical
251. ly See 7 Remove the manual sheet feed tray See Ma a 8 Remove the manual sheet feed paper presence sensor screw behind the foam Note the location of the cable to aid installation To prevent damage to the sensor cable move the sensor cable outside of the left printer frame Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 453 e90ams3 Figure 190 Manual Sheet Feed Paper Presence Sensor Viewed From Left 9 Remove the right side mounting screw and loosen the bottom carriage shaft retainer screw far enough to allow the plastic shield support assembly to be removed Bottom Retainer e Screw Right Side Mounting Screw Figure 191 Plastic Shield Support Assembly Screws Viewed From Right Side 10 Remove the left side mounting screw Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 454 Attention Ensure that the left side carriage shaft retainer is installed as shown The AFTA adjustment can not be made if the retainer is installed wrong Left Side Carriage Shaft Retainer 4 MIL Left Side Mounting Screw Figure 192 Carriage Shaft Retainer Viewed From Left Side 11 Remove the lower plastic shield Attention Do not damage the sensor cable Installation Two Piece Version after removal of the one piece version Follow the one piece removal steps in reverse order Ensure that the end of the carriage shaft with the screw hole is on nthe left side ae oe NS Perform the bidirectional adjus
252. ly has 2 hook latches and each fits into 1 of 2 slots on the rear printer frame directly behind the platen You can disengage the hook latches For detailed ASF installation instructions see IBM IBM 4247 Printer Automatic Sheet Feeder Guide or IBM 4247 Printer Models 001 002 User s Guide Or the IBM 4247 Printer Model 003 User s Guide Ensure the paper load bin lever on each ASF bin is closed The load lever is located on the right side of each bin when viewed from the rear of the printer See The lever is closed when it is pushed as far toward the front of the printer as possible Ensure that the paper guide on each side of each bin is correctly adjusted e Standing behind the printer set the inside edge of the right paper guide to the scribe mark and use the paper guide locking lever to lock the position See SETTE e Set the left paper guide to touch the left edge of the forms in the bin Use the left paper guide locking lever to lock the position On bin 1 only ensure that the left and right forms selectors are set correctly Bin 2 and bin 3 always have corner bucklers only feed single sheet paper from these bins Slide both selectors away from the printer to feed a single sheet and engage the corner bucklers Slide both selectors toward the printer to feed envelopes or card stock See Figure 74 on page 321 Note Some multiple part forms may feed better with the forms selectors set toward the printer Test forms in this p
253. mbly Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 353 e90arb10 Figure 104 Moving the Carriage to Center Close up 5 Pull the ribbon cartridge upwards until both ends snap free from the cartridge supports 6 Lift the ribbon cartridge from the printer Installation 1 Before installing turn the ribbon advance knob in order to maintain fabric tension If the ribbon does not move replace the ribbon cartridge 2 Move the print head to center 3 Push the ribbon cartridge downwards until both ends snap into the cartridge supports 4 Insert the ribbon guide between the ribbon mask and the print head Position the white snap arm on to the ribbon lift assembly with the tab pointing upwards Push the snap arm downwards until it snaps If it does not snap repair or replace the ribbon cartridge Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 354 Operator Panel Removal 1 Power off O the printer 2 Open the top cover 3 Press on the latch under the top center of the operator panel and pull forward approximately 10 mm 0 393 in 4 Lift the operator panel and disconnect the connector ji is ji Figure 105 Operator Panel Hemoval Replacement Follow the removal steps in reverse order Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 355 Printhead AN CAUTION The printhead may be hot Wait for it to cool down Removal OS s Ca 9 Power off O the printer Open the top cove
254. n 053 MACHINE CHECK ERR 41X 053 MACHINE CHECK ERR 43X Firmware error detected during initialization of printhead home sensor Power off and power on the printer If message remains 1 Ensure no paper or debris is blocking the sensor 2 Ensure all logic board connectors are connected 055 MACHINE CHECK AFTA failure 056 MACHINE CHECK The printhead home sensor has detected an error in the location or motion of the printhead carriage 065 NO ATTACHMENT CARD MODELS 001 002 Printer cannot detect coax twinax attachment card 066 PRINTER BOARD FAILURE MODELS 001 002 068 DATA CLEARED PRESS STOP THEN START Twinax interface only Printer cannot communicate with coax twinax attachment card Clear command received when the printer was not ready Press Stop then Start 069 DATA LOST PRESS CANCEL PRINT Twinax interface only Data lost Press Stop to clear the loss Press Stop Cancel Print then Start Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 141 Table 18 Error Messages for Models 001 002 and 003 continued Message Description Action 070 PRINTER BOARD CHANGED VERIFY CONFIGURATION SETTINGS Occurs when printer logic board or microcode version has been replaced Verify printer configuration settings and Custom Sets 087 STACKER ERROR INSTALL STACKER The printer has failed to sense that an ASF stacker is installed 1 Power off the
255. n continued Default Downloaded High Low Computer Selected High Low Computer Selected Alarm Control Enabled Disabled Overide Host Model 003 only Paper Source Disabled Paper Source Enabled Programmed Symbols When enabled See sub menu in able 82 on page 510 Table 81 Printer Compatibility Sub Menu Screen Buffer Size 1 Carriage Return at MPP 1 2 New Line at MPP 1 960 1920 2560 3440 3564 Standard Alternate Standard Alternate 3 Form Feed Followed by Data 4 Form Feed is Last Character in Order 5 Null Suppression Standard Alternate Standard Alternate Standard Alternate 6 Form Feed Command Position 7 Automatic Function After End of Print Buffer 8 Automatic Function After OILC Job Appendix A Printer Configuration 509 Table 81 Printer Compatibility Sub Menu continued Standard Standard Standard Alternate Alternate Alternate 9 Suppress Time out of Early Print Complete 12 Automatic Function Before No Data Loss Intervention Required Start of OILC Job Standard Disabled Standard Alternate Enabled Alternate FF Suppression Programmed Symbols Disabled See sub menu in Table 82l Enabled Table 82 Programmed Symbols Sub Menu Plane Selection Full Page On Skip Suppress PS Print Direction 3 Single 1 Triple Stand
256. n Alignment Bin amp Paper Load Position 7 Bin 3 AFTA Bin 3 Left Margin Alignment ASF Bin 3 Paper Load Position Manual Feed AFTA Manual Feed Left Margin Alignment Manual Feed Paper Load Position Display Language Display Language Vital Product Data Serial Number Device Specific Information Front Bin 1 Paper Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Mat Active in Ready State Disabled Disabled immediate Eject Disabled Enabled Top of Form Unidirectional Unidirectional Disabled 10 O00 English 0000000 oo0G0000000000000 Press Stop The printer becomes not ready 2 Press Menu to display the CONFIGURATION MENU on the operator panel display E90AX006 Appendix A Printer Configuration 504 Press Scroll t or Scroll Downs until you find the Category you want Press Enter to select that Category Press Scroll t or Scroll Downs until you find the Parameter you want Press Enter to select that Parameter Press Scroll t or Scroll Downs until you find the Value you want Press Enter to select a new Value An asterisk appears to indicate the new current Value To return to the CONFIGURATION MENU press Return to return to the Parameter level and then press Return again To save changes to a Custom Set return to the CONFIGURATION MENU Select Configuration Storage Select Save Current Values Select a Custom Set To return the printer to ready from any level press Start Appendix A Printer Config
257. n cycles DP DP text and NLQ characters Number quantity of barcodes Number quantity of pages with graphics or images Printing Error Logs and Print Usage Metrics Use the following procedure to print or clear the error log or to print usage metrics jn 2 oe X DP UT IS amp Select the paper path from which you are going to print the error log or usage metrics Load the printer with at least 22 in 55 9 cm of blank fanfold forms in the same tractor the customer is using or if there are no blank fanfold forms available obtain two sheets of letter or legal size paper from the customer Use the manual sheet feed to print the error log or usage metrics Load forms in the selected path Press the Stop key to make the printer Not Ready only the Power LED is lighted Press and hold the Test key While holding the Test key press the Quiet key Release both keys the operator panel display message Press STOP NOT READY appears Do not press the Stop key Press the Menu key 4247 OPERATOR TESTS is displayed on line one and a test name on line two Press the Micro 4 key to scroll through the menu to Print Error Log Clear Error Log or Print Usage Metrics e At the Print Error Log display press the Enter key wait for the error log to print At the Clear Error Log display press the Enter key e At the YES display press the Enter key The message Error Log Cleared displays At the Pr
258. n is to keep the output path separate from the rear input path Continue with a TETE Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 108 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 11 Is the rear cabinet ASF cover installed on the printer Go to step 12 on page 110 Install the rear cabinet ASF cover If it is missing the forms for the rear push path are often loaded incorrectly Continue with step L2 on page 110 Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 109 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 12 for pull mode and push mode See step for details on configuring the tractor Check that the rear tractor is installed correctly and the rear tractor paper door is open or removed The following figure shows the positions of the rear tractor Tractor in Pull Mode Rear Paper__ Door Tractor in Push Mode e90aff12 Are the rear tractor and the rear paper door OK Go to step La Go to step 16 on page 112 13 or Form Feed operation Are the forms jamming into the platen during a Load Go to step 14 an page 111l Go to step 17 on page 112 Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 110 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 14 Check that the bellcrank is correctly moving the lower Go to step h5 Repair
259. n the Model 001 and 002 and the flash memory module on the Model 003 Display T amp D32 Adapter Board EPROM Test RUN TEST YES END NO Note The message TEST RUNNING will display during the test If an error message is displayed go to The test completed successfully if the display advances to the next test number T amp D33 Adapter Board Dynamic RAM Test This test checks the attachment card DRAM Display T amp D33 Adapter Board Dynamic RAM Test RUN TEST YES END NO Note The message TEST RUNNING will display during the test If an error message is displayed go to The test completed successfully if the display advances to the next test number T amp D34 Adapter Board Static RAM Test This test checks the attachment card SRAM Display T amp D34 Adapter Board Static RAM Test RUN TEST YES END NO Chapter 2 Diagnostics 228 Note The message TEST RUNNING will display during the test If an error message is displayed go to The test completed successfully if the display advances to m next test number T amp D35 Adapter Board Shared RAM Test This test checks the attachment card shared RAM Display T amp D35 Adapter Board Shared RAM Test RUN TEST YES END NO Note The message TEST RUNNING will display during the test If an error message is displayed go to The test completed successfully if the display advances to the next test number T amp
260. n the printer A DANGER To prevent serious personal injury from electrical shock when connecting or disconnecting the interface cable set the printer power switch to O Off and unplug the power cord Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 370 DANGER Do not connect or disconnect any communication port teleport attachment connector or power cord during an electrical storm Note Print or obtain from the operator a printout of the current Power on Configuration Setup and the Program Setup for this printer Learn how to print these by reviewing the information in How To Print the Print Test To Print the Print Test bn page 160 Remove the attachment card See Remove the power supply cover Remove the board fan support pP Board Fan Support Figure 113 Board Fan Support 5 Disconnect all connectors from the logic board 6 Remove the jumper for use on the new board See Figure 118 on page 377 Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 371 Notes a To remove printhead cables hold the cable just above the connector and pull the cable out of the connector These are not locking connectors b Some connectors have retaining clips The sensor connector can be disconnected after the logic board is partially removed Use and as reference for the connector locations and cable paths to aid installation e Each connector is unique in size and shape a0 Operator Tractors Pa
261. nabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Parallel Interface Select In Signal AutoFeed XT See Sub Menu in Table 84l Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Table 84 Parallel Interface Sub Menu Interface Type Input Buffer Size PC Parallel 1284 Parallel 256 2K 12K 32K 64K Table 85 Printer Compatibility Sub Menu 3 Automatic LF on CR t 4 Automatic CR on LF 5 Form Feed Suppression Appendix A Printer Configuration 512 Table 85 Printer Compatibility Sub Menu continued Enabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled 6 Init T 7 Condensed Print 8 Slashed Zero t Enabled Disabled 15 Enabled 16 7 Disabled 17 1 9 20 CPI Enabled Disabled PRINTER SETUP Table 86 Printer Setup ASF Default Bin ASF Bin 1 Media Paper Source ASF installed ASF installed Front Rear Bin 1 with ASF Bin 2 with ASF Bin 3 with ASF Manual Bin 1 Bin 2 Bin 3 Paper Envelope ASF Bin Linking ASF installed Front Forms Backup Rear Forms Backup Disabled Bin 1 2 Bin 14243 Bin 243 Enabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Appendix A Printer Configuration 513 Table 86 Printer Setup continued Continuous Forms Linking Form Feed Mode Automatic Eject Enabled Disabled Not Act
262. nd cap d Run T amp D14 Model A00 or Firmware Information Models 001 002 003 to determine the microcode levels in the printer Replace if not at or above the levels indicated in Run T amp D11 to run the sensor tuning algorithm on the new platen surface 37 Run T amp D 11 to tune the sensors Go to step B8 on page 1261 You have completed this l procedure Run T amp D 21 to verify correct sensor operation Does running T amp D 11 correct the problem only for a brief time Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 125 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 38 Replace the upper feed roller Replace the platen Verify that the bail assembly has 2 blue dots on the right side Replace it if it does not Run T amp D 11 to reset the sensor thresholds Is the problem resolved You have completed this Go to step 35 on page 124 procedure 39 Install the newest level microcode Be sure you follow the directions in the Microcode Installation Instructions so that the customers configuration is not lost Run T amp D 11 to run the new sensor tuning algorithms Is the surface of the platen damaged APRES the p Go to step Go to step B5 on page 124 Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 126 MAP 0200 55 AFTA Errors Symptom Explanation Suspected FRUs Causes 55 AFTA ERROR 055 MACHINE CHECK The AFTA sensor circuit did not detect that
263. nd lower 3 Load forms into one of the push tractors The top of the forms should be near the square drive shaft of the tractor Do not push the forms into the printer This would block the paper presence sensor 4 Press the Load key The first form moves into the print area Note If the forms move into the print area but the top of the forms move past the printhead and the 01 001 END OF FORMS message returns to the display perform T amp D11 The paper presence sensor in that forms path did not sense the forms Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 297 5 Of f If it appears you have paper loaded into a path press the Path key If an operator panel light changes to a different path Model A00 or the Path message Models 001 002 003 changes to a different path perform T amp D11 The paper presence sensor in that path does not recognize that forms are present If your printer displays a 02 099 FORMS JAM message when a paper load is attempted using the Load key or under host command you may have paper already in one of these paths e Front Rear e Manual sheet feed Remove the paper look for debris or chad A shiny platen may be producing a false indication of paper in the rear path a Remove all paper debris from the rear path sensor area b Perform T amp D11 to reset the rear path sensor threshold level This should remove the 02 099 FORMS JAM message Notes 1 If the printer is using only the front p
264. ndix B Supplies Forms Paths amp Environmental Considerations 536 Notes Continuous Forms 1 Test forms less than 152 4 mm 6 in in length or width for satisfactory stacking These forms may require additional operator attention For optimum performance restrict the printable area to be within 6 4 mm 0 25 in from all edges holes or folds on the forms Some multiple part forms such as mailers or forms with thick heavy perforations may cause problems when using the Park function Try the forms first To minimize parking problems discuss your needs with your forms supplier when selecting forms IBM does not recommend continuous forms with adhesive labels Model A00 To prevent the separation of labels from continuous forms when using the Tear or Park keys set FRONT TEAR NO or REAR TEAR NO in the Power On Configuration menu Making this configuration change does the following e Disables the Tear key and tear off function e Modifies how the Park key works for forms in the front push and rear push forms paths You cannot back up the forms to park them Break the forms at a perforation before they enter the printer Press Park twice and the forms will move forward until ejected from the printer Model 001 or 002 To prevent labels on labeled continuous forms from detaching when using the Park key set Front Forms Backup to DISABLED and Rear Forms Backup to DISABLED in the printer setup section of the configuration m
265. nds Repair as needed Printhead carriage e Printhead mask mounted on carriage between ribbon and platen Ribbon mounting brackets 6 Ensure that the lift motor mounting screws are tight 7 Ensure that the lift motor connector is connected to the printhead assembly 8 Ensure there are no breaks in the ribbon lift motor cable Ribbon Lift Motor Screws Printhead Printhead Cable Ribbon Lift Motor Connector E90ARB4 Figure 86 Original Motor Viewed From Top Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 332 Ribbon Lift Motor Screws Printhead Ribbon Lift Motor Connector E90ARB12 Figure 87 New Motor Viewed From Top 9 Ensure that the printhead cables are connected at both ends correctly 10 Install the ribbon cartridge 11 Perform T amp D11 Verify that the ribbon is driven up and down by the ribbon lift motor and pulled to the left by the ribbon feed motor Note If the ribbon lift motor lifts and lowers the ribbon during T amp D11 but not during printing replace the logic board 12 Return to the step that sent you here Printhead Drive Service Check Note In any steps in this procedure replace any parts you find to be broken or irreparably loose 1 Power off O the printer 2 Locate and remove from the forms paths torn pieces of paper or other foreign material that can cause forms jams Also inspect the printhead movement area 3 Inspect the pri
266. nel Sensors N Em Print Head and Carriage Ribbon Ribbon Lift Motor Motor Motor AFTA e90alb1 Figure 114 Model A00 Early Level Logic Board Connector Locations Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 372 Stacker Operator Tractors Sensors Panel Power Supply Paper Feed Motor Ribbon Print Head and Carriage AFTA Motor Ribbon Lift Motor Motor e90alb5 Figure 115 Model A00 Late Level Logic Board Connector Locations 7 Remove the mounting screws Note the type and location of each screw A Threaded Screw Self tapping B Screw WM a lt A ZAR A e Nonmetal Washer Figure 116 Logic Board Screw Type Locations 8 Lift the rear of the board and pull to remove 9 Transfer the attachment bezel and screws from the old board to the new board as needed Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 373 10 Verify that the new logic board has microcode modules installed If not you must transfer the modules from the logic board you are replacing to the new board Use Module Extractor PN 73G5523 for modules on all levels of the logic board or PN 10G3902 for Model A00 late level and Models 001 and 002 logic board and attachment card microcode modules Verify that the microcode modules are properly oriented and plugged into the socket Attention When using mod
267. next test number T amp D15 First Printing Line Adjustment Test This test allows you to adjust the first print line for the front fanfold forms path and the rear fanfold forms path from the operator panel The value set by this test becomes the first print line position when the configuration menu item Paper Load Position is set to O Note If you adjust this value you also must run T amp D17 1 Display T amp D15 First Printing Line Adjustment Test RUN TEST YES END NO 2 Press the Line Feed key If the MES message displays go to T amp D15 First Printing Line Adjustment Test STORED PINCH XXXXX PRESS A KEY Return here after the sensors are tuned Continue with the next step when the printer displays T amp D15 First Printing Line Adjustment Test FANFOLD FRONT ADJ YES NO 3 To adjust the first print line for the front tractor feed press the Line Feed key The test will automatically advance to the rear first print line adjustment after you complete the front 4 f you want to advance to the rear first print line adjustment now press the Start key The procedure to adjust either front or rear first print line is the same Chapter 2 Diagnostics 215 5 If fanfold paper is not loaded display T amp D15 First Printing Line Adjustment Test LOAD PAPER 6 re 8 Install fanfold paper in the front tractor assembly Press the Load Eject key The following message will be displaye
268. ng and wiping process until all of the adhesive is gone Install the new replacement ribbon mask a Peel off the protective layer from the new ribbon mask exposing the adhesive layer b Carefully align the lower edge of the mask into the carriage casting and press into contact c Verify that the mask is smooth with the casting surface Carefully align the upper section along the crease of the lower section and in the casting Note If the mask is NOT smooth with the casting surface it will catch the edges of the paper Pull the mask off and install another new mask Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 433 10 Reassemble the printer a Rotate the carriage toward the platen Position the bronze bushing into the carriage assembly and flex the left side of the frame to position the shaft in the side frame Install the screw with the ground strap and thick washer Verify the position of the adjustor with the mark on the right side of the frame and tighten the screws b Raise the aluminum profile up and install the back screw in the left side of the frame c Install the small screw for the sensor block and the front screw and washer for the aluminum profile d Replace the cabinet sections operator panel bail assembly and ribbon Carriage Platen Side P Mask Figure 169 Printhead Mask Installation 1 Install the new printhead mask into the recess of the carriage a Remove the backing from the mask b O
269. ns See Appendix B Supplies Forms Paths and Environmental Considerations on page Make a quick visual inspection for problems loose or broken parts disconnected connectors or forms jams This check may quickly identify problem areas The normal place to start a service call in these MAPs is at MAP 0100 START OF CALL on page ba This MAP sends you to a Field Replaceable Unit FRU or to another MAP that is indicated by the symptoms If you bypass MAP 0100 START OF CALL and start the service with another MAP you may be using the wrong MAP The questions in that MAP may not refer to your symptom and may send you to the wrong resolution These MAPs are an aid in solving most problems If you misunderstand instructions or questions a MAP may lead you to an incorrect resolution Start again in the MAPs and read each step carefully If after going through the MAPs a second time you still have no solution to the problem the printer may have two interrelated problems or an intermittent problem Use other diagnostic techniques or call IBM Support for aid Read carefully The MAPs will aid you in resolving the situation only if you follow every instruction and answer each question accurately Copyright IBM Corp 1995 2001 20 Follow the sequence Always do one question at a time When a procedure precedes the question do all of the steps in the procedure before answering the question Some steps have additional information t
270. nterface Sub Menu continued 9600 19200 38400 300 600 1200 2400 4800 None Odd Even Mark Space OTR XON XOFF Connection Type Local Remote Appendix A Printer Configuration 530 Appendix B Supplies Forms Paths amp Environmental Considerations Overview This section outlines some of the information that IBM provides to the customer in the 4247 Model A00 User s Guide Supplies Ribbon cartridges and paper are the only supplies you need for your printer At the time this information was printed the correct IBM part number for a ribbon cartridge was 1053685 Contact your place of purchase or call Lexmark at 1 800 438 2468 to order ribbon cartridges Choosing a Forms Path for Your Needs Note IBM recommends that whenever possible you use the front push forms path for all your printing needs You ae select a forms s based on specific operating needs Use Table 108 when you are selecting a path See for information about acceptable paper size weight and thickness O Copyright IBM Corp 1995 2001 531 Table 106 Considerations For Choosing a Path Function Front Rear Rear Pull Push Manual Sheet Comments Push Push Pull Feed Autoload X X Document on Demand X X DOD Tear Off Tear Off Adjustment X X Dual Path Forms Input X X Requires 2 tractors IBM recommends optional printer stand Park X X Requires manual tear off Quiet Key
271. nthead home sensor for cleanliness damage or a loose mounting Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 333 Left Ribbon Print Head Bracket Home Sensor N Figure 88 Printhead Home Sensor Viewed From Top 4 Inspect the carriage motor and pulley for wear damage binds or looseness Ensure that the 4 screws and grommets that support the carriage motor are not damaged Verify that the cooling fan is installed correctly To inspect the carriage motor remove the printhead and loosen the belt clamp to free the belt Move the belt to rotate the motor pulley and the idler pulley If the rotation indicates bearing damage replace the idler pulley or the carriage motor The later version of screws has a yellow tinted finish an upgrade Mechanical Parts Kit 9 is available to replace screws and grommets see A Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 334 Carriage Motor Pulley 4 DA Figure 89 Carriage Motor Viewed From Right Side 5 Inspect the following parts associated with the carriage drive belt for wear damage binds and correct adjustment and installation e Carriage drive belt idler pulley must be free turning Slide the carriage throughout the full travel and ensure that the pulley turns Carriage drive belt clamp must properly mesh with the belt teeth and be fastened tightly Replace the clamp
272. nts on continuous forms and cut sheet paper Before ordering volumes of forms test and evaluate all forms in the anticipated physical environment Consider the affects of such factors as temperature and humidity on forms handling print registration and print quality The forms you select should meet the following specifications Note With the addition of the optional Automatic Sheet Feeder you can print on individual sheets of cut sheet xerographic paper and on envelopes Refer to the 4247 Printer Automatic Sheet Feeder Guide for information Forms and Paper Specifications The 4247 Printer prints on continuous forms and cut sheet forms and paper The customer should test and evaluate all forms in the anticipated physical environment and should consider the affects of such factors as temperature and humidity on forms handling print registration and print quality before ordering large quantities of forms Table 108 on page 535l lists various paper and forms specifications The customer s forms should meet the following specifications Note With the addition of the optional ASF the 4247 can print on individual sheets of cut sheet xerographic paper and on envelopes Refer to the 4247 Printer Automatic Sheet Feeder Guide for paper information Appendix B Supplies Forms Paths amp Environmental Considerations 534 Table 108 Forms and Paper Specifications Paper Criteria Characteristics Forms Paths Continuous Forms
273. number that begins to give DARK printed characters a b Setup Install the front tractor the bail assembly and a new or nearly new ribbon Verify that the value in T amp D 12 is set to 0 and SAVE Test Print Samples on blank 1 part paper at settings of FIXED 1 2 3 and 4 Record the actual Wheel position number along side the FIXED X print sample On Models 001 002 and 003 use the TEST key and Printer Adjustments Front AFTA pattern On the Model A00 use the Menu key Print Out Yes and change using the Adjustments category AFTA Estimate B is defined as the Wheel position number that is small enough to begin to make DARK printed characters Refer to the chart below You should see the darkness of the characters change as the FIXED value increases If you get Example 1 or 2 use the Wheel position where DARK begins and proceed to step 6 If you get Example 3 change the T amp D 12 value from 0 to 4 to decrease the gap Repeat the Print Samples Table 45 Character Print Quality and Result Menu Setting Wheel Position Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Fixed 1 A DARK DARK LIGHT Fixed 2 LIGHT DARK Very Light Fixed 3 Fixed 4 B C Very Light DARK D LIGHT Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 284 Table 45 continued Character Print Quality and Result Menu Setting Wheel Position Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Fixed 5 E Very Light Result Use Wheel A Use
274. o PINCH XXXXX Note XXXXX is CLOSE or OPEN Return here after the sensors are tuned Continue with the next step when the following message displays YES T FR ADJ NO Note T FR ADJ is Tear Off line FRont tractor ADJustment 1 To select the front fanfold tear off adjustment press the Micro key and go to step Bi Chapter 2 Diagnostics 180 To advance to the rear fanfold first line adjustment press the Load Form Feed key See step 11 an LOAD PAPER ae Install fanfold paper in the front tractor assembly Press the Load Form Feed key A row of Xs will be printed on the first print line The paper will feed to the tear off area The Xs should be completely on the paper The top of the Xs should be approximately 1 mm 0 04 in below the perforation If this condition does not exist perform T amp istmenti Rest on page 173 and retum here The following message will display T FR XXX Note XXX can be any number between 128 and 127 ECE aS FOU the correct position of the perforation for a clean tear off Chapter 2 Diagnostics 181 Form Perforation Line e61a0900 Tear Edge of Cover L Figure 16 Tear Off Position Only the earlier models had a serrated tear edge as shown If the tear off needs to be adjusted press the Micro t key to move t
275. o key to store the first print line position Continue with step or If the first print line adjustment is not correct press the Load Form Feed key to view the next display F RE XXX 19 To move the first print line closer to the top of the paper press the Load Form Feed key To move the first print line down away from the top of the paper press the Micro key The range is 128 to 127 Each unit is approximately 0 2 mm 20 Press the Micro 4 key to print using the new adjustment value See step Ha 21 If an error message is displayed go to T8 Jes and 22 The test completed successfully if the display advances to the next test number T amp D16 Bidirectional Adjustment Test This test allows you to make the bidirectional adjustment from the operator panel PINCH XXXXX Note XXXXX is CLOSE or OPEN Return here after the sensors are tuned Chapter 2 Diagnostics 178 Continue with the next step when the following message displays LOAD PAPER 1 Install fanfold paper on the tractor assembly and press the Load Form Feed key VERT X 2 Six blocks of the Hs will be printed with a number in the middle and a line of Hs and Is printed on one line Next the paper will feed to a position for viewing Note the vertical alignment of the Is on the Hs in the last line Use an H and an l in the center of the line for this check and adjustment uid AERE aa Use
276. oa aa a a a a ll a a a 59 MAP 0130 No Paper Movement 2 aoaaa REE SSE eee E XE OE BEER ESS Ee npe woke 62 MAP 0131 Paper Path Sensor sum bom Em E Dee BR EUR 3 UR Dew ETA SE eM Se OPS ee ee eed 66 MAP 0140 Printhead Drive 2 26 sc bee oca oo o ew ee won s 70 MAP 0150 POWer JOUDDIV e245 ELE ow Whe eee eee RES RU Be OER EAE KE OE EES KEES a 75 MAP 0160 Ribbon Feed and Ribbon Lit uou baw m Ek ER mE SE X 3 SE wee ES E E ES 89 O Copyright IBM Corp 1995 2001 3 MAP 0170 ASF Stacker ag ete ee be ER x Ee RE RHE OSES eS we Re mo ORE eee ESS 94 MAP 0180 Top Cover Interlock uiua doom deka OSE Re ES PE Re EAE EE BE SRR GH 98 MAP 0190 Form Feed PIODIGITIS u uo ap s kee eee eee ee EER X Cw X 9 E RE PERE EES SED 101 MAP 0200 55 AFTA Errors 2s2 lt 4 i e440 ewe ED de cx do n ROSE bee eee deu o Ee ee eee a ws 127 MAP 0210 Intermittent Failures 2 2 ce ee ee es 130 MAPS Reference Tables 40m ok ow Eoor ERR eee wee ESE SHAW EEE w SS ES 133 Reference Table 1 Model A00 Error Messages 2 2 a 133 Reference Table 2 Models 001 002 and 003 Error Messages a a a a a a len 136 Reference Table 3 No Printed Characters o aoao a a a a a a a a a a a a 146 Reference Table 4 Print Quality Failures oaoa aa ccr 146 Reference Table 5 Operator Panel and Miscellaneous Problems aoa oaoa a aa a ll lll 149 Reference Table 6 LED and Test Page Problems NPS and LAN Attachment Card 152 Reference T
277. oard Disconnect the cable from the logic board and lift the card out of the printer Verify that the new attachment card has a microcode module installed If not you must transfer the module from the attachment card you are replacing to the new card POI gt om Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 396 For an SCS only printer An SCS only printer is identified by a label on the microcode module S1 that reads KxTSAvvv If you are installing a new level short attachment card 182 mm 7 2 in long which is at an attachment microcode level below 4 03 that is the label on microcode module S1 reads KxTSA402 or lower you must install a complete new microcode kit This kit includes modules U2 and U54 on the main logic board and module S1 on the attachment card Attention When using module extractor PN 7365523 follow these steps to avoid cracking or damaging the plastic sockets a Insert the C shaped end of the tool into one of the module socket extraction slots b Hold the tool perpendicular to the module and pull upward to loosen it from the socket c Repeat the previous 2 steps using the extraction slot in the opposite corner until the module lifts out of the socket When re installing verify that the microcode module S1 is properly oriented and plugged into the socket Use Figure 129 on mem 308 as a guide or For the Level 2 short attachment card use the orientation marks to help you position the microc
278. ock Step Questions Actions Yes No 1 Is the top cover for the ASF stacker assembly Go to step P on page 99l Go to step B on page 100 installed Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 98 Table 14 MAP 0180 Top Cover Interlock continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 2 Inspect the following parts for wear damage or binds Install a new ASF stacker Repair as needed Top cover assembly or Run T amp D in automatic mode to Top cover magnet Located near the right end of the nstall a new logic board For verify correct printer operation stacker assembly when the cover is closed E Model AO00 see How Id Note When the ASF Stacker top cover is installed there must not be a magnet in the cover near the operator panel Ensure the ASF stacker assembly is installed correctly Both sides must be positively latched and the cable must be positively clicked in place Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation Are the parts OK For Mode A00 see For mE 001 002 or 003 see Hades 001 002 OS Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 99 Table 14 MAP 0180 Top Cover Interlock continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 2 Inspect the following parts for wear damage or binds Top cover magnet Located near the left side of the operator panel when the cover is closed Operator panel cable and connectors Are the p
279. ode module S1 in the module socket See Figure 130 on page 394 Attention Incorrect orientation will damage the attachment module and can damage the card Note Some module sockets are deeper than the module To ensure proper contact insert the module into the socket only until it is flush level with the top of the socket Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 397 Screws pe Microcode Module S1 Screws e90atwin Microcode Module S1 Screws e90atwi2 Figure 130 Twinax Attachment Short Card Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 398 Replacement Follow the removal steps in reverse order To connect the twinax attachment card to the logic board 1 Position the card over the logic board with one hand 2 Plug the attachment card cable into the logic card connector with the other hand Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 399 Power Supply Removal Attention The electronic parts of this printer can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Ensure that ESD protection devices and procedures including a static discharge wrist strap are used while working on the printer A DANGER To prevent serious personal injury from electrical shock when connecting or disconnecting the interface cable set the printer power switch to O Off and unplug the power cord A DANGER Primary power is present on the power supply when the power cord is connected even when the power switch is set to
280. ode modules on the attachment card and logic board A DANGER To prevent serious personal injury from electrical shock when connecting or disconnecting the interface cable set the printer power switch to O Off and unplug the power cable A DANGER Do not connect or disconnect any communication port teleport attachment connector or power cord during an electrical storm Power off O the printer Unplug the printer and disconnect the cable Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 50 Figure d and Figure 3 on page 52 show you how to use the feature resistors to identify the attachment card Models 001 002 Use the figure that matches your attachment card To correctly view the resistors Level 1 Long Card Hold the attachment card with the cable toward you or Level 2 Short Card Hold the attachment card with the cable to the right Attention Level 2 coax attachment card Do not bend or crease the metal shield Gently lift the metal shield from the back of the card to locate the feature resistors Bottom View of the Attachment Card Showing the Feature Resistors Feature Resistors Feature Resistors as Shown in Table e90act11 Figure 2 Models 001 and 002 attachment card Feature Resistors Level 1 Long Card Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 51 Bottom View of the Attachment Card Showing the Feature Resistors
281. odel A00 see uou o Run Remove and re install the tractor assembly making sure that the electrical connector tab is fully seated in the connector Check if the red LED is now lighted If the red LED is still not lighted check that the small flat ribbon cable in the tractor is fully connected to the tractor motor Check if the red LED is now lighted If the red LED is still not lighted install a new tractor assembly cable Check if the red LED is now lighted Replace the tractor assembly and check if the red LED is now lighted If the red LED is still not lighted install a new tractor assembly cable Check if the red LED is now lighted If the red LED is still not lighted install a new logic board Run T amp D in automatic test mode to verify correct printer operation For Model A00 see How To Bur Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 105 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 6 Check for damage to the inner forms guide surface or to the hinges on the inner forms guide Is the inner forms guide OK Go to step Zon page 107 Repair as needed Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Moge A00 see Fio To Run Continue with step E onl Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 106 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 7 An incorrect metal
282. of these parts NS Not Shown in the Asm Index column indicates that the part is procurable but not shown on the associated art The description identifies the part e R Restricted in the Units column indicates that the part has a restricted availability INDENTURE The indenture is marked by a series of dots located before the parts description The indenture indicates the relationship of a part to the next higher assembly For example Indenture Relationship of Parts No dot MAIN ASSEMBLY One dot Detail parts of a main assembly One dot Subassembly of the main Copyright IBM Corp 1995 2001 457 Indenture Relationship of Parts assembly Two dot Detail part of a one dot subassembly Two dot Subassembly of a one dot subassembly Three dot e Detail part of a two dot subassembly Table 55 Example Assembly Asm Part Units Description Index Number E 5373637 1 Cover Asm Rear Red 5356589 1 Cover Asm Rear White For next higher assembly see 1 2 2 5942568 1 Seal Top 3 1842563 2 eClip Retaining 53789523 R eFinger Stock Asm 5 53568711 NR Channel Finger Stock 6 AR Seal Bottom 7 41695289 2 Clip Retaining 5 NP Cover Rear Without Paint 2 Screw Panel PP Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 458 Assemblies Covers and Operator Panel 2 2 a 46 ea cR monu wmm eee xoc RO vd d HED Em E m Poo m RR A E SR s 460 Electronics the cena t
283. of most business offices Attention Damage to the printer can result if you power on the printer immediately after the printer has been moved from an environment that does not meet the following operating requirements If the printer has been in such a location ensure you move the printer to the recommended operating environment at least 24 hours before you power on the printer Operating Environment The following tables show the operating environment requirements for the printer Without Automatic Sheet Feeder Environment Requirement Temperature range 10 to 40 6 C 50 to 105 F Relative humidity range 8 to 80 Maximum wet bulb temperature 26 7 G 80 F Note The best conditions for feeding and stacking are within a temperature range of 15 6 to 32 2 C 60 to 90 F and a relative humidity range of 26 to 62 With Automatic Sheet Feeder Environment Requirement Temperature range 15 6 to 32 2 C 60 to 90 F Relative humidity range 8 to 80 Maximum wet bulb temperature 228 C 73 R Appendix B Supplies Forms Paths amp Environmental Considerations 546 Nonoperating Environment The following tables show the nonoperating environment requirements for the printer Without Automatic Sheet Feeder Environment Requirement Temperature range 10 to 51 7 C 50 to 125 F Relative humidity range 8 to 80 Maximum wet bulb temperature 26 7
284. of the Model 001 early level and the Model 002 logic board controller microcode module U54 Corner Cut Off U54 L 1 e90act06 Figure 8 U54 Microcode Module Label Early Level Eigure 9 shows the location and orientation of the Model 001 early level and Model 002 logic board generator microcode module U2 Corner Cut Off U2 e90act07 Figure 9 U2 Microcode Module Label Early Level Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 56 Figure 10 shows the location and orientation of the Model 001 late level logic board generator microcode modules U54 and U2 U2 LL us4 Corner Cut Off e90act09 Figure 10 U54 and U2 Microcode Modules Label Late Level 8 to verify that the information on the U54 and U2 module pena matches your host connection feature Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 57 Feature Name Module U54 Label Module U2 Label Coax IPDS KxCXCvvv U54 CRC KxCXGvvv U02 CRC Coax SCS Twinax IPDS KxCXCvvv U54 CRC KxCXGvvv U02 CRC KxTXCvvv U54 CRC KxTXGvvv U02 CRC Twinax SCS Figure 11 Models 001 and 002 Microcode Module Locations on Logic Board KxTXCvvv U54 CRC KxTXGvvv U02 CRC E90X001 K2 x22 is the module designation for Model 001 K5 x 5 is the module designation for
285. om the Main Board The ACGA is in a tight spot so when it comes free it will be necessary to move the ACGA carefully to the right in order to completely remove it from the printer 6 If you wish to remove the Interposer Card remove the 2 M3x4 screws securing the Interposer Card and the ground strap to the ACGA Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 365 Replacement Follow the removal steps in reverse order Logic Board Model 003 r Logic Board Component Inspection During the logic board removal procedure it is necessary to visually inspect the logic board modules and components for burns cracks discolorations or other indications of damage If damage is found use Figure 124 eferencel to identify the damaged driver circuit Replace the cable and component related to the damaged circuit in addition to the logic board For example if you discovered a burned area around the U38 module you would replace the AFTA motor and the AFTA cable as well as the logic board Attention The electronic parts of this printer can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Use ESD protection devices and procedures including a static discharge wrist strap while working on the printer A DANGER To prevent serious personal injury from electrical shock when connecting or disconnecting the interface cable set the printer power switch to O Off and unplug the power cord Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 366 AX DANGER
286. on Inform the customer that forms must be torn off at the tear bar before he confirms the Park operation The 02 or 099 message occurred because the printer could not completely back the forms up onto the tractor Go to step Bd Go to step bol Go to step 31 on page 124 tractors so that they block the paper presence sensor Is the sensor blocked by the forms that the leading edge of the forms is near the square drive shaft on the tractor assembly Show the customer that this is the correct way to mount the forms The 02 or 099 message occurred because the printer sensors were already sensing forms in the path when the customer tried to load forms og Was the customer just loading forms on the front or rear tractor 30 Check the forms to see if they were loaded beyond the Remove and reload the forms so Go to step 31 on page 121l Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 120 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 31 32 Examine the sensors and the area around the sensors for pieces of paper or chad which the printer will sense as forms On Model A00 the flashing path light on the operator panel is an indication of which path detected the paper Is there chad Is there a rear tractor in use Vacuum or blow out all the chad Wipe the sensor with antistatic liquid IBM P N 2200118 If you judge the amoun
287. on of the feature requires the attachment card to be replaced with an identical card SCS or ae 1 2 3 On the bottom side you will find the part number of the attachment card 4 Figure 108 on page 362 shows the location of the module socket used to enable the IPDS feature e f there is no module in this socket the card is an SCS card f there is a module in the socket the card is an IPDS card The module must not be removed or transferred to another attachment card The IPDS module is not available as a spare part Replace the attachment card when required Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 361 Coax Twinax IPDS IPDS Module Module E90APC14 Figure 108 Location of IPDS modules on coax and twinax attachment cards Model 003 Serial Card Jumper Locations The Model 003 can also connect to a host using the serial attachment feature shows the location of the jumpers that are mounted on to the serial card These must be in the correct location for the proper operation of the serial interface Do not move these jumpers Replace the card if required Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 362 oof heef 0000 oooga Figure 109 Jumper locations on the Model 003 serial card
288. or Install a new EMI filter assembly used only with Model A00 early level logic operator panel cable assembly Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer e For Model A00 see Power off O the printer Install a new carriage motor fan Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Model A00 see uu cam Run ue lest andl Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 79 Table 11 MAP 0150 Power Supply continued Questions Actions Yes No 7 a Power off O the printer b Remove the attachment card For Model A00 see Serial Attachment Card 4 a Models eh and 002 see aoe c Disconnect all connectors from the logic board except the power supply connector Remove all tractor assemblies If installed remove the stacker and ASF assembly f Power on the printer Does the power supply fan run OK Go to step B on page 81 Power off O the printer Install a new logic board For Model Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer EET For Model A00 see Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 80 Table 11 MAP 0150 Power Supply continued Questions Actions Yes No 8 a Power off O the printer c Power on the printer Does the power supply fan run OK b Connect the operator panel cable connector Go to step D on page 82 Power off O the printer
289. or and install the RS 422 loop back connector 90 The test completed If a loop back connector is not installed an error message will be displayed To bypass this message press the Micro key twice to advance to the next test Display T amp D 09 USER INSERT 422 LOOP 1 Remove the RS 232 connector install the RS 422 connector and press the Micro Y key 2 If an error message is displayed go to T8 Jes a 10 3 The test completed successfully if the display advances to the next test number T amp D10 Stacker ASF Test Note The stacker ASF loop back connector needs to be installed for this test This connector tests the stacker and ASF circuits Chapter 2 Diagnostics 167 Stacker Loop back Connector Figure 13 Stacker ASF Loop back Connector Viewed From Right Side If the loop back connector is not installed an error message will be displayed To bypass this message press the Micro Y key twice to advance to the next test Display T amp D FRU O 01 If an error message is displayed go to 90 The test completed successfully if the display advances to the next test number T amp D11 Pinch Roller Status Sensor Tuning Ribbon Feed and Lift Motors Note Ensure there is no paper in any paper path This test does the paper path sensor tuning but does not tune the tractor jam sensors as these sensors are not adjustable 1 The next display will be PINCH OPEN
290. or Assembly 6 08H7306 1 Motor Carriage Includes Motor and Cable 7 08H7289 1 Motor Paper Feed Includes Motor and Cable 8 08H7324 1 Motor Ribbon Includes Motor and Cable Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 479 Assembly 9 continued Asm Part Index Number WUnits Description 9 08H7320 1 Motor AFTA Includes Motor and Cable 10 08H7258 1 Fan Board Includes Fan and Cable 11 08H7252 1 Fan Carriage Motor Includes Fan and Cable 12 08H7246 1 Printhead Assembly 18 Wire 4247 A00 001 003 12 90H0024 1 Printhead Assembly 9 Wire 4247 Model 002 13 63H6349 1 Bracket Frame with M4x6 flathead screw 14 1 Screw Bracket PP 08H7355 15 2 Screw Printhead Mounting PP 02N7555 16 4 Washer 2 Star 2 flat Printhead Mounting PP 02N7555 17 08H7253 1 Bracket Printhead 18 1 Screw Bracket M4x6 flathead PP 08H7355 Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 480 Assembly 10 Power Cords Parts Kits and Tools Asm Part Index Number Units Description 10 e POWER CORDS 1 14F0033 1 UK amp Singapore 9 FT 2 14F0015 1 South Africa 9 FT 3 13F9997 1 Denmark 9 FT 4 13F9979 1 Europe 9 FT 5 14F0087 1 Israel 9 FT 6 14F0069 1 Italy 9 FT 7 14F0051 1 Switzerland 9 FT 8 6952300 1 US Mexico 110 V 9 FT 9 6952301 1 e US 110 V 6 FT 10 1838574 1e S America 11 36L8880 1 Argentina 12 13F9940 1 Austra
291. osition if results were not satisfactory with the forms selectors set away from the printer Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 320 Left Paper Guide Locking Lever Left Paper Guide Paper Load Lever Figure 74 Bin 1 Automatic Sheet Feeder Viewed From Top Rear 10 Remove the stacker assembly a Open the top cover b Press the stacker release buttons and pull up c Disconnect the ASF cable connector 11 Remove the ASF assembly a Open the paper guide to reveal the ASF latches that hang the ASF on the printer rear frame b Lift the ASF assembly up and out of the printer 12 Ensure that the bins are connected correctly Remove the board cover located on bin 1 Twist the cover to release the tabs Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 321 Je Bin 2 f Installed Bin 3 If L Installed Figure 75 Automatic Sheet Feeder Connectors Viewed From Right Side 13 Locate and remove from the forms path torn pieces of paper or other foreign material that can cause forms 14 Perform the jams 15 Return to the step that sent you here ASF Stacker Service Check jr 2 3 Power off O the printer Ensure that the stacker is installed correctly Spring loaded latches hold the stacker to pins on the printer frame You can perfo
292. ound the needles with a dry cloth or toothbrush 3 Check that the print head is installed squarely against both mount blocks in the carriage It is not necessary to overtighten the socket head screws 4 First determine Estimate A by finding the AFTA Wheel position number that lets 1 part paper slide between the carriage and platen a Setup Remove the front tractor and the bail assembly Using the AFTA Wheel open to the full open gap position Using the upper feed rollers rotate until the WHITE dot on the left end of the platen is aligned with the frame WHITE mark Slide the carriage assembly to the AFTA position near the left end of the platen Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 283 b C Test Slide a sheet of 1 part paper up past the carriage Using the AFTA Wheel close to a very small gap The paper should be pinched by the carriage it will NOT slide when pulled backwards As you continue to pull on the paper begin to rotate the AFTA Wheel in small increments to open the gap Notice the Wheel position number where you can begin to pull the paper backwards Close the gap again and repeat this a few times until you agree on the Wheel position number where paper begins to slide with constant friction This Wheel position number is the minimum carriage to platen gap required for 1 part Paper Sliding Estimate A is defined by adding 0 5 to this Paper Sliding number 5 Second determine Estimate B by finding the AFTA Wheel position
293. p Cover Interlock Test If the top cover is open when this test starts the following messages will alternately display T amp D19 Top Cover Interlock Test COVER IS OPEN T amp D19 Top Cover Interlock Test PLEASE CLOSE IT 1 Close the top cover if open The following message will display T amp D19 Top Cover Interlock Test RUN TEST YES END NO 2 Press the Line Feed key The following message will display T amp D19 Top Cover Interlock Test OPEN COVER 3 Open the top cover If you do not open the cover in approximately 10 seconds the following message will display T amp D19 Top Cover Interlock Test CLOSE COVER 4 Close the cover Note If the cover is not closed in approximatel 10 seconds an error message will be displayed 5 f an error message is displayed go to 6 The test completed successfully if the display advances to the next test number T amp D20 NLQ Printhead Mode Models 001 and 003 Only Use this test only for Models 001 and 003 Use this test to select how the printhead prints in Near Letter Quality NLQ mode The default setting is NLQ 18 WIRE Chapter 2 Diagnostics 222 r Important This setting should be changed only if instructed by Plant Engineering The following message will display T amp D20 NLQ Printhead Mode Test RUN TEST YES END NO Display T amp D20 NLQ Printhead Mode Test NLQ 18 WIRE YES NO 1
294. ppendix A Printer Configuration 525 DISPLAY LANGUAGE Table 100 Display Language 000 English NY 010 Suomi VITAL PRODUCT DATA Table 101 Vital Product Data Device Specific Information XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Serial Number XXXXXXX Manufacturing Default T When Emulation Mode is set to 4247 4202 III XL or 2381 Personal Printer When Emulation Mode is set to Epson FX t When Emulation Mode is set to Epson FX only Compatibility Options 3 6 and 8 are available Appendix A Printer Configuration 526 Model 003 Parallel and Serial Configuration Table 102 Parallel and Serial Configuration Characters Per Inch CPI 10 12 15 16 7 17 1 20 Lines Per Inch LPI Maximum Print Position MPP Maximum Page Length MPL 6 8 136 066 001 136 at 10 CPI 001 660 at 6 LPI 163 at 12 CPI 880 at 8 LPI 204 at 15 CPI 227 at 16 7 CPI 233 at 17 1 CPI 272 at 20 CPI Perforation Skipping Emulation Mode Print Language 0 to 659 4247 2381 Personal Printer 4202 Proprinter Ill XL Epson FX 437 PC i 1251 Oyrillic Windows Print Language Print Quality Print Quality 0 USA NM 1251 Cyrillic Windows DP Quality DP Text Quality Near Letter Quality OCR A OCR B DP Quality Courier Gothic OCR A OCR B Appendix A Printer Configuration 527 Table 102 Parallel and Serial Configuration cont
295. printer goes off line and the message PRINT OUT NO displays To print the settings press the Pitch key The message PRINT OUT YES displays and the Program Setup Printout is printed How To Run the Test and Diagnostic T amp D Programs The T amp D program can be run in two modes Single Test Mode or Automatic Test Mode The Single Test Mode is used to run individual tests for example to perform an adjustment or print a print test The Automatic Test Mode which runs all the tests sequentially is used to verify that the printer operates correctly 1 e 3 Power off O the printer Remove all paper from the paper paths Tests T amp D11 through T amp D18 and T amp D21 can perform paper path sensor and tuning If sensors are tuned with paper in the path paper will not feed correctly If a stacker assembly is installed disconnect the ASF connector and remove the ASF stacker assembly Note The following 3 steps refer to loop back connectors needed for T amp DO6 09 and 10 If the connectors are not available the tests can be bypassed as described in 18 Attention Power off O the printer before installing or removing the parallel or stacker ASF options loop back connectors If you are here to run T amp D in Automatic Mode or to run T amp D6 Parallel Attachment Test in Single Mode a loop back connector needs to be installed Install the parallel loop back connector PN 08H7269 on the attachment bezel If you are here
296. printer is identified by a label on the microcode module S1 that reads KxCSAvvv If you are installing a new level short attachment card 182 mm 7 2 in long which is at an attachment microcode level below 4 06 that is the label on microcode module S1 reads KxCSA405 or lower you must install a complete new microcode kit This kit includes modules U2 and U54 on the main logic board and module S1 on the attachment card Attention When using module extractor PN 7365523 follow these steps to avoid cracking or damaging the plastic sockets a Insert the C shaped end of the tool into one of the module socket extraction slots b Hold the tool perpendicular to the module and pull upward to loosen it from the socket c Repeat the previous 2 steps using the extraction slot in the opposite corner until the module lifts out of the socket 7 When re installing verify that the microcode module S1 is properly oriented and plugged into the socket For the Level 1 long attachment card use Figure 127 on page 394 as a guide or For the Level 2 short attachment card use the orientation marks to help you position the microcode module S1 in the module socket See Figure 128 on page 394 Attention Incorrect orientation of the module will damage the module and can damage the attachment card Use as a guide Note Some module sockets are deeper than the module To ensure proper contact insert the module into the socket only until it is flush
297. r Figure 1 ASF Paper Load Levers Paper Guides and Forms Selectors The length of this attachment card is approximately 248 mm 9 7 in 5 Ensure that the paper guide on each side of each bin is correctly adjusted e Standing behind the printer set the inside edge of paper guide locking lever to lock the position See the Ta paper guide to the scribe mark and use the e Set the left paper guide to touch the left edge of the forms in the bin Use the left paper guide locking lever to lock the position 6 On bin 1 only ensure that the left and right forms selector levers are set correctly Slide both selectors toward the printer to feed envelopes or card stock See Slide both selectors away from the printer to feed single sheets of paper Note Some multiple part forms may feed better with the forms selector levers set toward the printer You must test the forms in both positions Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 27 Table 2 MAP 0110 Automatic Sheet Feeder Step Questions Actions Yes No jJ Are you here due to a 02 or 099 display message Go to step 2 Go to step B on page ad Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 28 Table 2 MAP 0110 Automatic Sheet Feeder continued Step Questions Actions Yes No Do forms feed into the stacker without jamming 2 Check for paper or debris in the path The 02 or 099 display message is false Run T amp D11 to
298. r Remove the ribbon see Ribbon on page 353 Move the printhead to the center of the printer Remove the cable clamp screw and cable clamp Remove the 2 printhead screws Disconnect the ribbon lift connector Because there have been 2 versions of the ribbon lift motor the location of the wire going into the ribbon lift connector may vary The following 2 drawings show the possibilities Attention Do not pull the wires out of the connector Note To remove a printhead cable hold the cable just above the connector and pull the cable out of the connector These are not locking connectors Disconnect the printhead cables Remove the printhead Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 356 Print Head Screws fa Cable Clamp Screw e90aph1 Figure 106 Original Ribbon Lift Motor Viewed From Top Ribbon Lift Motor Screws Printhead Ribbon Lift Motor Connector E90ARB12 Figure 107 New Ribbon Lift Motor Viewed From Top Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 357 Replacement 1 Follow the removal steps in reverse order 2 When you reinstall the printhead Push the printhead toward the platen with equal pressure on both sides of the printhead e Tighten the printhead mounting screws while continuing to p the printhead toward the platen 3 Perform the AFTA service check See Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 358 Model 003 Attachment Cards Serial Twinax LA
299. r e ASF metal to metal mounting to the printer at the 2 hooks that attach to the printer frame e ASF bins ground spring between bins e ASF stacker assembly metal to metal mounting to the printer at the 2 latches Attachment Ensure that the printer is not operated with loop back connectors installed Refer to the signal cable ordering information in the BM 4247 Printer Model AOO User s Guide SA24 4404 or the IBM 4247 Printer Models 001 002 User s Guide SA24 4408 or the IBM 4247 Printer Model 003 User s Guide 544 5780 for attachment cable configurations Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 131 Environmental Requirements Miscellaneous Check for lost screws under the power supply or under the logic board Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 132 MAPs Reference Tables Reference Table 1 Model A00 Error Messages Table 17 Model A00 Error Messages Message Description Action 01 END OF FORMS Forms do not load when Load Form Feed key is pressed No forms movement 01 END OF FORMS Forms are visible between the printhead and the platen Forms path sensor cannot sense paper 02 FORMS JAM CHECK PATH ASF paper path LED flashes A forms jam was detected by one of the forms sensors 02 FORMS JAM CHECK PATH Any paper path LED except ASF flashes 11 LOAD BIN 1 2 or 3 False message A forms jam was detected by one of the forms sensors Paper begins to feed from any bin but stop
300. r JAM SENSORS categories Table 65 Program Configuration Menu CATEGORIES Tear Position Adjustment Page 494 Paper Path s Setup Page loa Paper Paths Page los Store Mode Page M97 Perforation Safety Page Los Adjustments Page 94 Form Setting Page Lash Another Paper Path Page 197 Exit To Power On Configuration Menu Page 497 Hexadecimal Printing Page 497 TEAR POSITION ADJUSTMENT Table 66 Tear Position Adjustment Front Path Rear Path 0 24 to 24 0 24 to 24 Appendix A Printer Configuration 494 PAPER PATH S SETUP Table 67 Paper Path s Setup One Form Per Path One Form Only PAPER PATHS Table 68 Paper Paths Front Push Manual Feed Rear Push Rear Pull Push Pull ASF1 ASF2 3 PERFORATION SAFETY Table 69 Perforation Safety No Yes ADJUSTMENTS Table 70 Adjustments Automatic Forms Thickness AFTA Horizontal Vertical 0 5 to 3 10 0 Fixed O to 8 1 to 60 24 to 24 FORM SETTING Appendix A Printer Configuration 495 Table 71 Form Setting Line Spacing Line Spacing Lock Page Length 6 LPI 8 LPI No 66 12 LPI Yes 1 to 660 3L 30MM AS 4L 30MM A4 6L 30MM A3 8L 30MM A2 12L 30MM LGL Legal LTR Letter Top of Form Perforation Spacing Font 0 0 to 660 B DP 0 to 660 DP Text Courier Gothic OCR A OCR B Pitch Pit
301. r from a coax configuration or when upgrading for a customer problem The logic board has been reconfigured to facilitate the new attachment card hardware and the flash memory modules The power supply is now auto ranging capable of supporting any input voltage from 100 V to 240 V All of the Model 003 printers have identical labels displaying all of the agency certifications There are also several other minor differences in the Model 003 which include new power on display messages new test and diagnostics tests and new error display messages Other new features or changes will be noted in the relevant sections Copyright IBM Corp 1995 2001 19 Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems Maintenance Analysis Procedures MAPs Defining The Problem These Maintenance Analysis Procedures MAPs are designed to aid in diagnosing printer problems The MAPs use a sequential plan for isolating the possible causes of printer problems and point you to the part needing adjustment repair or exchange Suggestions for Using the MAPs Discuss the printer symptoms with the operator Verify that the current configuration is correct See Appendix A Printer Configuration on page 484 or the IBM 4247 Printer Model A00 User s Guide SA24 4404 Or the IBM 4247 Printer Models 001 002 User s Guide SA24 4408 Or the IBM 4247 Printer Model 003 User s Guide S544 5780 e Verify that the environment the paper and the forms used are within specificatio
302. r set to the number noted in step P on page 4071 3 If the platen pinch roller gear was moved perform the pinch s status test Run T amp D11 Platen Pinch Roller Recembls Removal 1 Remove the printer covers See 2 Remove the retaining clip called e clip in Eig pivot the bellcrank out the way to remove the gear and spring washer gear and spring You will need to Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 411 e90aas1 Remove the platen assembly See Remove the rear paper presence sensor before removing the roller assembly located second from the left To remove the Daten ii roller shaft remove the printer mechanical assembly See From the printer mechanical assembly remove the retaining clip called Ring Clip in Figure 147 washers and platen pinch roller shaft Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 412 Platen Pinch Rollers Platen Pinch Roller Shaft e90apr1 Figure 147 Platen Pinch Rollers Viewed From Left Side Replacement Follow the removal steps in reverse order Notes 1 The bellcrank is installed between the washer and the gear see Figure 55 on page 297 Check for broken teeth on the platen gear and the pinch roller gear 2 You must pivot the bellcrank out of the way to correctly install the spring and gear After installing the spring and gear pivot the bellcrank back into place before installing the washer and retaining clip Attention Failure
303. ram will stop Power off the 4247 and reseat or replace the cable Return to step 3 If the parallel cable connection is good the download of the code will proceed Messages on your computer and on the 4247 will change to give the status of the code download Appendix C Flashing the Memory of the Model 003 552 Table 110 Code Download Messages Computer Screen 4247 Display Explanation Downloading Base Code XX Completed See Detail Note Al WRITING xxx BASE CODE See Detail Note Cl if an error appears Code is downloading into 4247 flash memory Checking Base Code See Detail Note B CHECKING xxx BASE CODE See Detail Note Cl if an error appears Downloading is complete and CRC is being checked Verify that the CODE LOADED message is on 4247 display Power off printer xxx BASE CODE LOADED CRC is verified The 4247 may be powered OFF Xxx ASCII TWINAX or COAX Appendix C Flashing the Memory of the Model 003 553 r Detail Note A XX will increase from 0 to 100 If XX stops increasing the message will change to Downloading Base Code XX Completed Printer doesn t respond check connection This might indicate that the connection through the parallel cable or that the power to the printer has been interrupted Power off the printer and reseat or replace the parallel cable and the power cord Power on the printer The 4247 display should automatically show this messa
304. ration Perform one of the following Restart job Cancel job Select another source and restart the job e Run the job with current source Refer to a 4247 User s Guide for more detail 015 COMMUNICATIONS CHECK CHECK CABLE Twinax interface only No line sync detected on the twinax interface Error automatically resets when line sync is detected 017 COMMUNICATIONS CHECK Twinax interface only Line parity error detected CLA c 00 on page 411 Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 137 Table 18 Error Messages for Models 001 002 and 003 continued Message Description Action 020 FORMS JAMMED REAR TRACTOR CLEAR JAM AND RELOAD FORMS Jam detected at the rear tractor sensor 022 UNIT ADDRESS NOT RECEIVED CHECK PRINTER ADDRESS Twinax interface only Printer address not received from host or invalid host Coax Atlacnmen 003 on page 41l 027 COMMUNICATIONS CHECK CALL SYSTEM OPERATOR Coax interface only Enable Poll timeout Printer not enabled in 60 seconds 028 COMMUNICATIONS CHECK CALL SYSTEM OPERATOR Coax interface only Poll timeout Printer not polled in 60 seconds 031 END OF FORMS TIMEOUT LOAD FORMS BIN Coax interface only False 001 END OF FORMS condition exceeded 60 seconds Forms are visible between the printhead and the platen Forms path sensor cannot sense paper 031 END OF
305. rcuit Diagrams 262 Table 41 RS 422C Connector Pin Assignments Pin Signal Name Description 15 RXD Receive Data M RXD Receive Data 19 TXD Transmit Data 25 TXD Transmit Data Table 42 Parallel Connector Pin Assignments Pin Signal Name Description 1 STROBE Strobe 2 9 Data Eight Data Lines 10 ACKNLG Acknowledge 11 BUSY Busy 12 PE Out of Paper 13 SLCT Printer Selected 14 AUTO FEED XT A Automatic Line Feed on EOL 15 Unused 16 LOGIC GROUND _ Logic Ground 17 CHASSIS Chassis Ground GROUND 18 5 V DC NPS 540 P N 30H4052 Power 19 30 GROUND Ground 31 INIT Initialize Printer Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams 263 Table 42 Parallel Connector Pin Assignments continued Pin Signal Name Description 32 ERROR Printer Error 33 GROUND Ground 34 35 Unused 36 SLCT IN Make Printer Selected Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams 264 Chapter 4 Locations Attention The electronic parts of this printer can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Ensure that ESD protection devices and procedures including a static discharge wrist strap are used while working on this printer Use microcode module extractor PN 73G5523 to remove modules U1 U2 U54 and S1 Attention When using module extractor PN 73G5523 follow these steps to avoid cracking or damaging the plastic sockets 1 Insert the C
306. re Copyright IBM Corp 1995 2001 240 Figure 24 Main Input Power Supply Ground 241 Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams 18 Wire Printhead Wiring Models A00 001 and 003 The printhead is electromagnetic and has two columns which contain 9 wires The left column viewed from the platen or paper side is the B side with wire 1B at the top The right column is the A side with wire 1A at the top The A side is raised and lowered by an electromagnet to increase print quality Needle 5B is used for AFTA paper thickness measurements The printhead is connected to the logic board by a 22 pin cable and a 26 pin cable 18 Wire Printhead 22 Pin Connector ep Not Ribbon Lift Used Connector Pini Pini 26 Pin Connector Figure 25 18 Wire Printhead Wiring Models A00 and 001 RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS Note Allow the printhead to cool before taking resistance measurements Table 29 18 Wire Printhead Resistance Measurements Part Resistance Temperature Print Wire Coil 5 Ohm 10 20 C 68 F Chapter 3 Circuit Diagrams 242 Table 29 18 Wire Printhead Resistance Measurements continued Part Resistance Temperature Column A Shifter Coil 11 7 Ohm 5 20 C 68 F Thermal Sensor 1000 Ohm 6 25 C 77 F Example To measure the resistance of the coil for print wire 1A measure between pins 1 and 2 of the 22 pin cable connector
307. re 112 Logic Board Screw Type Locations 8 Remove the board by pulling the back edge up and out Note how the front edge is inserted between the metal tabs on the frame shield Replacement 1 Follow the removal steps in reverse order Note Be certain the front edge of the logic board is inserted between the metal tabs on the frame 2 Run the T amp D program in automatic mode See How Ensure that T amp D12 T amp D15 T amp D16 and T amp D17 are adjusted if indicated 3 Use the printer configuration printout to verify configuration settings See BM 4247 Printer Model 003 User s Guide S544 5780 Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 369 Logic Board Model A00 r Logic Board Component Inspection Later Model A00 During the logic board removal procedure it is necessary to visually inspect the logic board modules and components for burns cracks discolorations or m ME of damage If damage is found use Figure 125 eferencel to identify the damaged driver circuit Replace the cable and component fated to the FEDT circuit in addition to the logic board For example if you discovered a burned area around the U38 module you would replace the AFTA motor and the AFTA cable as well as the logic board Removal Attention The electronic parts of this printer can be damaged by electrostatic discharge ESD Ensure that ESD protection devices and procedures including a static discharge wrist strap are used while working o
308. rear tractor only Push Pull front and rear tractor TWINAX CONFIGURATION Appendix A Printer Configuration 518 Table 95 Twinax Configuration Characters Per Inch Lines Per Inch LPI 10 12 6 15 8 16 7 Maximum Print Position MPP Maximum Page Length MPL Emulation Mode 132 001 136 at 10 CPI 066 4247 163 at 12 CPI 001 660 at 6 LPI 4224 IPDS Only 204 at 15 CPI 880 at 8 LPI 4230 227 at 16 7 CPI 4214 SCS Only Print Quality Print Language Printer Address DP Quality DP Text Quality Near Letter Quality 37 USA Canada l 500 International 5 Belgian New l 1122 Estonian 000 006 Data Stream Media Size Priority Bar Code Mode IPDS Installed IPDS Only IPDS Only IPDS Standard High SCS Alternate Low Computer Selected Appendix A Printer Configuration 519 Table 95 Twinax Configuration continued Graphics Mode Alarm Control IPDS Only High Low Enabled Computer Selected Disabled PARALLEL CONFIGURATION with twinax card installed This section covers Models 001 and 002 using parallel with the twinax attachment installed Model 003 using parallel with LAN twinax or no attachment card installed and twinax base code Table 96 Parallel Configuration Characters Per Inch CPI 272 at 20 CPI 10 12 15 16 7 17 1 20 Lines Per Inch LPI
309. remove install AFTA motor 407 carriage assembly 437 remove install continued carriage drive belt 420 carriage drive motor 415 coax attachment card 392 EMI filter 377 logic board Model A00 370 Models 001 and 002 378 lower feed roller assembly 435 lower plastic shield support 451 manual sheet feed tray 425 operator panel 355 paper bail assembly 422 paper feed drive belt 448 paper feed motor 447 platen assembly 429 platen pinch roller assembly 411 power supply 400 printer covers 347 printer mechanical assembly 444 printhead 356 printhead mask 432 ribbon 353 ribbon drive assembly 403 ribbon lift motor 405 sensor cable assembly 441 serial interface card 390 support shaft 439 twinax attachment card 396 upper feed roller shaft assembly 426 Replacements 346 requirements environmental 546 paper 534 safety 13 Index 564 ribbon feed MAP 89 remove install 403 service check 330 wiring 252 lift MAP 89 remove install 405 service check 330 wiring 253 S safety electrical 13 general 11 notices 9 pre service inspection 15 sensors adjustment 208 296 remove install 441 service checks 296 wiring 259 serial attachment MAP 33 41 remove install 390 392 396 test T amp DO9 167 wiring 262 service checks AFTA 282 ASF bins 319 stacker 322 carriage drive belt 279 carriage support shaft 280 service checks continued paper feed belt 281 paper paths front push 310 listing of 301 main drive
310. remove the 2 screws holding the aluminum profile through the rubber mounts Note that the metal spacer sleeves are through both rubber mounts and that a star and flat washer are on the front screw b Rotate the ground strap upwards and use a small P1 Phillips screwdriver tip to remove the one small screw holding the location of the black plastic sensor block c Drop the left end of this profile toward the Cut Sheet paper door surface Loosen the left end of the small diameter carriage support shaft a Remove the left end screw ground strap and washer from the shaft b If there is an adjustor on the right end of the small shaft mark the position of the adjustor to the side frame Loosen the screw on the right end of the small shaft do NOT remove c Flex the left side frame to allow dropping the left end of shaft and taking the bronze bushing from the carriage Position the carriage assembly just to the left of the cable clamp on the aluminum profile Rotate the carriage downwards to move the ribbon mask away from the platen Use the small shaft to hold the carriage downwards to gain good access to the front of the carriage Remove the old ribbon mask a Pull off the damaged ribbon mask b Weta cloth with Isopropyl alcohol and wet the adhesive This will soften the adhesive Use a flat blade to scrape the softened adhesive Note Do NOT scratch the aluminum casting c Wipe the remaining adhesive with the solvent Repeat the scrapi
311. rew M3x8 PP 08H7355 2 1 Screw M3x4 PP 08H7355 3 08H7329 1 Housing Packaged 5 Per Pack 4 08H7395 1 Bracket Carriage Motor 5 2 Spacer PP 08H7352 6 2 Screw M3x6 PP 08H7355 7 08H7319 1 Gear AFTA Idler Packaged 19 Per Pack 8 1 Clip Retaining PP 63H6001 9 08H7320 1 Motor Assembly AFTA 10 4 Screw PP 08H7355 11 2 Retainer Cable PP 08H7352 12 01P7165 1 Bail Assembly Paper Includes Bail Coil Spring and Upper Plastic Shield 12A 01P7164 1 Kit Bail Assembly Upper Plastic Shield Coil Spring and right end cap 13 02N7006 1 Drive Kit Left Ribbon Includes support and drive shaft 16 08H7324 1 Motor Assembly Ribbon 17 3 Screw M3x14 PP 08H7355 18 4 Screw PP 08H7356 19 08H7325 1 Support Right Ribbon Packaged 5 Per Pack 20 08H7326 1 Indicator AFTA Packaged 5 Per Pack 21 08H7328 1 Cover Front Tractor Gear Packaged 5 Per Pack 22 2 Screw M3x8 PP 08H7355 23 1 Washer PP 63H6001 24 08H7248 1 Cable Tractor Assembly 25 08H7250 1 Cable Stacker Assembly Packaged 3 Per Pack 26 08H7360 2 Housing Tractor Cable Connector 27 1 Screw M3x10 PP 08H7355 Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 474 Assembly 7 Electronics DETAIL A CR N oo e N o OQ 19deoee Chapter 6 Parts Catalog 475 Assembly 7 continued Asm Part Index Number Units Description 7 1 08H
312. ridge Checking Printhead to Platen Gap 1 Rotate the platen to locate a white dot on the left end of the platen shaft If you can locate the white dot you will use a 0 25 mm 0 010 in feeler gauge in the next step or If you cannot locate the white dot you will use a 0 3 mm 0 012 in feeler gauge in the next step 2 Check the gap between the printhead needles and the platen using one of the feeler gauges 3 Ifthe resistance is slight proceed to Checking Carriage Casting To Platen Gap If the resistance is a the is too small because the needles are worn Replace the printhead and return to Power Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 293 Checking Carriage Casting To Platen Gap 1 If installed remove the front tractor 2 Slide a single sheet of 20 Ib 80 g m paper through the gap between the carriage casting and the surface of the platen The paper should slide through the gap with the slightest resistance If the gap is acceptable adjust the wheel position to get the pointer to point to 1 on the wheel Note Now that this adjustment has been made consider marking the gap full open position for future reference or if the wheel needs to be removed again OF If the a is not acceptable the needles are worn Replace the printhead and return to Power On Check on First Line Printing This adjustment uses T amp D15 to locate the first print line using the operator panel Service Check The Vert and Load value
313. rient the mask to the recess on the carriage Ensure that the cut off corner of the mask is aligned with the corresponding corner in the recess on the carriage Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 434 c Begin applying the bottom edge of the mask against the bottom side of the recess in the carriage Press the remainder of the mask on from the bottom to top No part of the mask may extend over the sides of the recess of the carriage 2 Replace all parts that were removed by following the removal steps in reverse order Lower Feed Roller Assembly Removal 1 Remove the printer covers See 2 3 Remove the AFTA assembly See Au 4 Perform the following a Remove the drive belt from the carriage motor pulley See b Remove the 4 carriage motor support screws from the right side of the ae ane assembly Carriage Drive Belt Figure 170 Platen Bearing Viewed From Right Side 5 Loosen the paper feed drive belt tension screws through the access holes in the frame Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 435 Remove the lower feed roller retaining clip called C clip in Figure 171 and the lower feed roller gear Access Holes for Tension Screws Lower Feed Roller Gear and C clip Figure 171 Lower Feed Roller Drive Pulley 6 Perform the following a Remove the 2 screws on each end that hold the manual sheet feed tray frame and remove the frame b Remove the retaining clip call
314. rinthead Home Sense Failure 1 See Printhead Drive Servic Check on page 333 2 Replace the logic board 3 Replace the sensor cable assembly TD FRU3 14 AFTA Failure i 2 3 See TD FRU315 AFTA Failure 1 2 3 EU E the AFTA motor d See automatic Forms Thickness Chapter 2 Diagnostics 194 Table 27 T amp D Error Messages and Action continued Error Message Description Action TD FRU 3 16 Front Tractor Sense 1 Clear front feed paper jam Failure 2 See Flracior Assembly Senvicd Repl 4 Replace the tractor cable assembly TD FRU 3 17 Rear Tractor Sense Failure 1 Clear rear feed paper jam 2 Sea PAEO Aceembly Sai 3 Replace the logic board page 370 4 Replace the tractor cable assembly TD FRU 3 26 OF TD FRU 3 27 Carriage Movement Failure 1 See Printhead Drive Service 2 Replace the logic board page 370 3 Replace the sensor cable assembly TD X FRU 4 20 40 T amp D Error Error in T amp D Procedure 1 Power off O the printer and start the T amp D procedure again 2 Replace the logic board Chapter 2 Diagnostics 195 Table 27 T amp D Error Messages and Action continued Error Message Description Action Notes X Can be any number This error message will display if a loop back connector is not installed Press the M
315. rm Is the problem corrected For sl 001 002 or 003 see Hodes 001 002 or 008 Table 7 MAP 0122 Network Print Server Attachment Step Questions Actions Yes No 1 Tests with the Communication Line Disconnected Run T amp D in Automatic Mode to Go to step P on page 61l verify correct printer operation n we A00 see How Ta Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 60 Table 7 MAP 0122 Network Print Server Attachment continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 2 Tests with the Communication Line Connected Run T amp D in Automatic Mode to Refer to the Administrator s verify correct printer operation Guide for your NPS unit Work with each symptom in Reference Tabie 7 For v AOO see How Id S246 0111 for Ethernet attachment a or 246 0112 for Token Ring ee ee before going to the next item Is the problem corrected Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 61 MAP 0130 No Paper Movement Symptom Explanation Suspected FRUs Causes Paper Load and Feed Failures Paper feed motor D Paper Movement Printer logic board 099 Condition Persists g Mechanical parts Table 8 MAP 0130 No Paper Movement Step Questions Actions Yes No 1 Perform the main paper drive service check and the Go to step P on page amp 3l Repair as needed Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Model A00 see
316. rm a trial fit with the inner tractor cover in the up position Ensure that the stacker is connected to the stacker connector in the printer The connector may become bent preventing electrical contact Locate and remove from the forms path torn pieces of paper or other foreign material that can cause forms jams Ensure that the paper bail is in the down position touching the feed roller assembly see Figure 157 on page 423 and that the metal deflector is down open Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 322 6 Inspect the following parts for wear damage or binds Repair as needed Use knob PN 08H7271 if available to hand cycle the paper feed mechanism to observe the parts The knob installs on the left end of the platen shaft Upper feed roller gear Stacker Gear e Stacker Feed Rollers Stacker Assembl T Paper Bail Upper Feed Roller Gear Figure 76 Stacker Viewed From Left Side 7 Return to the step that sent you here Platen Pinch Roller Assembly Service Check Note The platen pinch roller assembly opens for fanfold paper only These rollers are always closed when the ASF is operating The platen pinch roller assembly is used to open lower and close raise the platen pinch rollers The rollers are normally open not touching the platen When the rear push configuration is used the rollers are closed touching the platen to assist loading the first sheet of fanfold paper To begin this service chec
317. rocode 2 Move to or keep the value 0 3 Exit with STORE YES The requirement for calibrating is described in Adjust the print gap 1 Adjust the print gap in 0 25 mm 0 001 in increments to achieve acceptable print darkness 2 Initiate T amp D12 see 3 Use STORE NO 4 o After adjusting the gap to me the print quality exit with STORE YES eT the gap between the printhead needles and the platen as described in Standard AFTA Service Check D Chapter 2 Diagnostics 211 7 ae the gap between the carriage casting and the platen as described in Standard AFTA Service Check and 055 AFTA Errors f your printer is getting a 055 AFTA ERROR message that is caused by a bad 5B printhead needle the printer will display these messages During normal operation With the AFTA 0 mode you perform a paper load operation but get a 055 AFTA ERROR message Or During T amp D12 With the AFTA 0 or the FIXED 1 mode you begin the AFTA Calibration portion of T amp D12 but get the message TD12 FRU 3 14 PRESS A KEY To determine if the cause of the 055 AFTA ERROR message is a bad 5B printhead needle follow these steps 1 Power off O the printer and remove all paper from the printer 2 Power on the printer and enter the operator menu to change to FIXED 1 mode 3 Load 1 part paper and print some characters 4 Examine the DP characters such as an uppercase H looking for missing dots Count down 5 dots f
318. rom the top of the character 5 Inspect the printhead cable for damage and a poor connection at the printhead Replace the cable if indicated 6 If the cable is OK replace the printhead Running T amp D12 e Press the Micro key to run the test e Press the Micro Y key to skip the test Press the Load Form key to end the test If T amp D11 Sensor Tuning was not completed before beginning T amp D12 the following message displays PINCH XXXXX Chapter 2 Diagnostics 212 Where XXXXX OPEN or CLOSED SS PATH FF Ensure the paper bail and a ribbon cartridge are installed Mount 20 Ib 80 g m paper into the front tractor FF or manual sheet feed tray SS Press the Load Form key to select FF or Press the Micro key to select SS The printer will now load the paper and perform the AFTA operation The following 2 messages display sequentially AFTA X YES STORE NO Verifying AFTA Calibration Using T amp D12 To verify the calibration o ND g A Set the operator menu to AFTA 0 Load a single sheet of paper into the print area Note the wheel position Park the paper Set the operator menu to FIXED 1 Load a single sheet of paper into the print area Note the wheel position The wheel position should be the same for AFTA 0 and FIXED 1 within 0 25 The wheel should be pointing to 1 0 25 Verify printer operation by printing T amp D14 on singl
319. rom the paper paths Tests T amp D11 through T amp D18 and T amp D21 can perform paper path sensor tuning If sensors are tuned with paper in the path paper will not feed correctly If an ASF stacker assembly is installed disconnect the ASF connector Remove the ASF stacker assembly Note The following steps refer to loop back connectors needed for T amp DO6 and 10 If the connectors are not available the tests can be bypassed as described in 18 Attention Power off O the printer before installing or removing the parallel or stacker ASF options loop back connectors If you are here to run T amp D in Automatic Mode or to run T amp D6 Parallel Attachment Test in Single Mode a loop back connector needs to be installed Install the parallel loop back connector PN 08H7269 on the attachment bezel If you are here to run T amp D in Automatic Mode or to run T amp D10 Stacker ASF Test a loop back connector needs to be installed Install the stacker ASF loop back connector PN 08H7270 on the stacker connector Note The stacker ASF loop back connector tests the stacker and ASF circuits Hold the Stop and Test keys at the same time Power on the printer When the display is BOOT RAM TEST USER release the Stop and Test keys Chapter 2 Diagnostics 201 9 The following message will be displayed TEST AND DIAGNOSTIC STARTUP SINGLE YES NO r If the T amp D does not run If the operator panel
320. rrors Go to step 118 on OO oa on page 231 to find the message Perform the action indicated Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 46 Table 6 MAP 0121 Attachment Models 001 002 or 003 continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 11 Models 001 002 Go to step hd Repair as needed Run T amp D in Automatic Mode to verify correct printer operation See T o Run return here Do the attachment card feature resistors and S1 module match the host connection feature Model 003 d then proceed to sop Ison nace da 12 Models 001 002 Go to step 13 Repair as needed Run T amp D in 5 Automatic Mode to B EET Is the S1 module correctly oriented printer operation See 13 Models 001 002 Go to step h4 on Replace with the correct code kit bage 48 Run T amp D in automatic mode to The S1 microcode module used on the Level 2 short attachment card must be at the following code version level shown as vvv in or higher Coax SCS vvv2406 Twinax SCS vvv 403 Is the S1 module at the correct code level verify correct printer operation Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 47 Table 6 MAP 0121 Attachment Models 001 002 or 003 continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 14 Models 001 002 Go to step ka Repair as needed Run T amp D in Automatic Mode to verify correct printer operation See How To Bud return here Do the logic board microco
321. s Rear under platen path sensor cannot sense paper 20 DSR ERROR CHECK INTF Host DATA SET READY signal not sensed by the serial interface Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 133 Table 17 Model A00 Error Messages continued Message Description Action 21 OVFL ERROR Host attachment buffer overflow error on 1 Press Online to clear the display CHECK INTF the serial interface message 2 n Power On Configuration increase the BUFFER size and or change the PACING protocol XON XOFF value 3 Restart the job 55 AFTA ERROR 56 PRINT ERROR AFTA failure The printhead home sensor has detected an error Power off and power on the printer If message remains install a new Logic 70 SW ERR XXX Firmware error in supervisor code Power off and power on the printer If message remains install a new Logic Board See z 71 SW ERR XXX Firmware error in interpreter code Power off and power on the printer If message remains install a new Logic Board See E 72 SW ERR XXX Firmware error in print manager code Power off and power on the printer If message remains install a new Logic Board See Logic B 73 SW ERR 2XX Firmware error in engine code Power off and power on the printer If message remains install a new Logic Board See p Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 134 Table 17 Model A00 Error Messages continued
322. s a If needed loosen the idler pulley to install the belt on the motor pulley b The logic board connector is keyed Ensure that the connector is installed correctly 2 Install new cable ties 3 Perform the carriage belt tension service check See Ca 4 Perform the bidirectional printing service check See Bidire Carriage Drive Belt Removal Remove the printer covers See Remove the printhead cable clamp Remove the printhead screws oRWND I O lt D ce 2 D O 2 gt D D Q O 2 D O o amp gt f D lt s O h 2 D Oq Z D s Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 420 The cables do not need to be disconnected Place the printhead beside the carriage Print Head Screws Screw Figure 155 Printhead Viewed From Top e90aph1 6 Remove the drive belt from the motor pulley 7 Loosen the belt clamp screw Carriage Drive Belt Idler Pulley Figure 156 Carriage Drive Belt Clamp Viewed From Top 8 Remove the idler pulley and the drive belt Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 421 poo een Follow the removal steps in reverse order Note Ensure that the front edge of the belt is flush with the front oe of the belt e Paper Bail Assembly Note To install a new plastic shield and improved coil spring perform these steps 1 Perform the paper bail assembly R
323. s and hold the Test key While holding the Test key press the Quiet key 3 Release both keys The printer displays PRESS STOP gt NOT READY 4 Do not press the Stop key Press Hex Print The configuration menu lock will toggle from locked to unlocked or from unlocked to locked How To Print the Printer Configuration and the Custom Sets Load the printer with at least 22 in 55 9 cm of blank fanfold forms in the same tractor the customer is using Note If there are no blank fanfold forms available obtain two sheets of blank letter or legal size paper from the customer Use the manual sheet feed to print the configuration Press the Stop key to make the printer Not Ready only the Power and Online LED s are lighted Press the Test key The message 4247 OPERATOR TESTS appears and the Online LED goes out Press the Micro 4 key until the Printer Configuration test is displayed below 4247 OPERATOR TESTS Press the Enter key and wait for the configuration to print To print a custom set on the Model 003 and later Models of the 001 and 002 a Press the Micro key until Print Custom Sets is displayed b Press the Enter key and wait To print a custom set on earlier Models 001 and 002 a Use the Printer Configuration Test to print each of the custom sets being used by the customer Press the Menu key until you see Configuration Storage 2 m Appendix A Printer Configuration 499 b When the lt X gt on the
324. s should be zero and the first line on the print test should be below the perforation Adjustment 1 Run the T amp D program in single test mode 2 Scroll to T amp D15 Bidirectional Printing This procedure uses T amp D16 and T amp D14 to perform bidirectional adjustment from the operator panel Run the T amp D program in single test mode For Model A00 see Hov R Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 294 e For Models 001 002 and 003 see How Service Check Use T amp D14 to print NLQ characters If the vertical bars on the characters are not aligned perform the adjustment As an aid in evaluating the print see Figure 95 on page 345 ee Scroll to T amp D16 Run the Bidirectional Printing test and make adjustments as needed see 002 and 003 3 Scroll to T amp D14 Run the Fanfold Form Printout test and check vertical alignment on ne T of the 5 Repeat the adjustment steps until you have obtained the best alignment of vertical lines on the T amp D14 printout Tear Off Line Use T amp D17 to adjust the tear off line using the operator panel Service Check 1 Load forms into the tractors 2 Press Load Form Feed then Eject Tear This advances the forms to the tear position 3 Compare the alignment of the perforations on the forms to the tear edge of the printer cover Perform the Adjustment if indicated Adjustment 1 Run the T amp D program in singe tesi mode For Model A00 se
325. salz E E RS115 Jac Lo RS168 2 RS42 ele L3 4 IM 19 oH 36 BIS Fn je C36 ele 1 18 U38 5 U37 b U20 rusrrus SAM sl 1 c ols I5 9 e ES RSEN 3i U22 v x els r1 gl2 lo Si 3 lo 2 Sos b RS45 RS40 E n Bley exo c1 17C ere ge sse d esee 8 aea U44 00 Routt agg UU eL RE asz0 E U10 iiit to EQ 3E Oec ua Bel al te 2 ULE B oss MUS 22 gn i K z Jaa Rs185 r1 33 eri 2 persa pCR5g K RS97 o S os 0 8 pus F S i s U45 K R579 ERS4g S 8S AS gp Ce sa
326. see page 258 to r measure the resistance of En 5 end to end and pin 6 end to end these pins are the same for both an 18 wire and a 9 wire printhead Is the resistance 5 ohms or less for both pins Re install the printhead Carefully follow the EUH procedure Install a new carriage motor See Or or Install a new sensor cable includes the S home un See Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Model A00 pee inu Io m the Test T MOG 001 and OO On e OQ Board Model 00 Install new printhead cables Re install the printhead Carefully follow the d procedure fPrinthead Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Model d see How TB Bun ue ee andl Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 74 MAP 0150 Power Supply Models A00 001 and 002 use a low voltage or high voltage power supply depending on the country in which the printer is found The Model 003 has a auto ranging universal power supply WARNING Do not install a power supply with a different part number Symptom Explanation Display blank and keys do not operate Power failure Suspected FRUs Causes Power supply Power cord Logic board Operator panel Sensors Motors Attachment card Tractor assembly Stacker assembly ASF assembly Cables Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 75 A DANGER Primary power
327. serious personal injury from electrical shock when connecting or disconnecting the interface cable set the printer power switch to O Off and unplug the power cable A DANGER Do not connect or disconnect any communication port teleport attachment connector or power cord during an electrical storm Accessing Rear Components Remove these covers to gain access to components at the rear of the printer such as Attachment card Logic board Power supply Forms path components 1 Disconnect the power cord from the rear of the printer Copyright IBM Corp 1995 2001 275 2 Disconnect the attachment cable from the rear of the printer For Model 001 or 002 twinax attached printer disconnect the self terminating T connector from the printer attachment card Do not disconnect the host communication cable from the printer T connector Remove forms Remove the ASF stacker option if installed Open the top cover and remove the side cover screws 1 on each side Remove the side covers i a Figure 48 Side Covers Top Cover Removed for Clarity 6 Close the top cover and remove the ASF cover by releasing the 2 latches Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 276 Figure 49 ASF Cover Top Cover Removed for Clarity 7 Remove the 4 main cover mounting screws from the rear 2 places and sides 1 on each side of the printer E90ACV9 Figure 50 Rear Main Co
328. shaped end of the tool into one of the module socket extraction slots 2 Hold the tool perpendicular to the module and pull upward to loosen it from the socket 3 Repeat the previous two steps using the extraction slot in the opposite corner until the module lifts out of the socket Attention When removing module U57 do not use PN 73G5523 instead follow these steps 1 Insert a small flat bladed screwdriver under the module 2 Pry up under the module to free the module from the socket O Copyright IBM Corp 1995 2001 265 Locations and Orientations Logic Board Microcode Module Locations and Orientation Model A00 Chapter 4 Locations 266 Microcode Module U1 i Microcode A a Module U2 Bevel Corner Cut Off 4247 A00 Level 1 Logic Board Microcode Module U2 Corner oe Microcode Ff Bevel Module U54 4247 A00 Level 2 Logic Board Microcode Module U57 Microcode Ps Corner Module U2 Se Off Microcode Bevel Module U54 4247 A00 Level 3 Logic Board Microcode Module U57 Microcode Module U2 Microcode LT Module U54 Bevel Corner Cut Off 4247 A00 Level 4 Logic Board e90aloc5 Figure 38 Rear View of Logic Board Microcode Module Locations and Orientation Model A00 Chapter 4 Locations 267 Logic Board Microcode Module Locations and Orientation Models 001
329. so must run T amp D17 PINCH XXXXX Note XXXXX is CLOSE or OPEN Return here after the sensors are tuned Continue with the next step when the printer displays YES F FR ADJ NO Chapter 2 Diagnostics 175 Note F FR ADJ is First print line FRont tractor ADJustment Front Fanfold Forms Path To select the test for the front fanfold first line adjustment press the Micro key then go to step hl OF Rear Fanfold Forms Path To advance to the rear fanfold first line adjustment press the Load Form Feed key Go to step LOAD PAPER 1 Install fanfold paper in the front tractor assembly 2 Press the Micro key 3 The following message will display F FR XXX 4 Ablock of Es will be printed on the first print line The paper will feed to a position for viewing Note the position of the first print line on the paper The Es should be completely on the paper The top of the Es should be approximately 1 mm 0 04 in below the perforation 5 The following message will display PRESS A KEY 6 Press any key to feed the paper back into the printer The following message will display YES lt STORE gt NO If the first print line adjustment is correct press the Micro key to store the first print line position Continue with step dl or Chapter 2 Diagnostics 176 If the first print line adjustment is not correct press the Load Form
330. st Model 003 with the Serial Card Installed The serial loop back connector needs to be installed for this test There are 2 serial loop back connectors the RS 232 and RS 422 The RS 232 connector is installed first The display will prompt you to remove the RS 232 connector and install the RS 422 loop back connector If a loop back connector is not installed an error message will be displayed T amp D09 Serial Attachment Test RUN TEST YES END NO Install RS 232 connector Press Line Feed key When prompted remove the RS 232 connector and install the RS 422 connector Press the Line Feed key If an error message is displayed go to EP I E 6 The test completed successfully if the display advances to the next test number Chapter 2 Diagnostics 207 T amp D10 Mechanical Option Test The stacker ASF loop back connector needs to be installed for this test This connector tests the stacker and ASF circuits Stacker Loop back Connector Figure 20 Stacker ASF Loop back Connector Viewed From Right Side Note If the loop back connector is not installed an error message will be displayed To bypass this message press any key then the Form Feed key to advance to the next test Display T amp D10 Mechanical Option Test RUN TEST YES END NO If an error message is displayed go to The test completed successfully if the display advances to the next test number T amp D11 Pinch Rol
331. stacker Power on the printer Feed forms from a push or pull tractor configuration then feed paper from the ASF or the manual sheet feed tray and observe the stacker vane Stacker Vane In ASF Single Sheet Feed Mode Down Position 2to3mm Between Vane and Approximately 14 mm Between M AEN Pin Vane and Pin 7 N LZ Stacker Vane In Fanfold Feed Mode Up Position Does the vane transfer OK Go to step 4 on page 98 Install a new stacker or Install a new logic board For Or Install a new stacker cable Feed forms alternately from a continuous and a cut sheet path and observe the stacker vane Run T amp D in Automatic Test Mode to verify correct printer ou Ta For Model A00 see page 161 For Models 001 002 or 003 see How To Bun thd Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 95 Table 13 MAP 0170 ASF Stacker continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 4 BHO ing main paper drive service check See l Mainl Go to step El Repair as needed Is the main paper drive service check OK 5 Coro me Stacker Service Check See l ASE Stacked Go to step El Repair as needed Is the Stacker Service Check OK 6 Do you have the stacker ASF loop back connector Go to step Zon page 971 Install a new stacker assembly PN 08H7271 or Install a new logic board For or Install a new stacker cable Run T amp D in Au
332. successfully if the display advances to the next test number Chapter 2 Diagnostics 216 T amp D16 Bidirectional Adjustment Test Note This test allows the bidirectional adjustment to be made from the operator panel 1 Display T amp D16 Bidirectional Adjustment Test RUN TEST YES END NO 2 Press the Line Feed key If the erry message displays go to T amp D16 Bidirectional Adjustment Test STORED PINCH XXXXX PRESS A KEY Return here after the sensors are tuned 3 If fanfold paper is not loaded display T amp D16 Bidirectional Adjustment Test LOAD PAPER 4 Install fanfold paper on the tractor assembly and press the Load Eject key 5 Six blocks of Hs will be printed with a number in the middle and a line of Hs and Is printed on one line Next the paper will feed to a position for viewing Note the vertical alignment of the Is on the Hs in the last line Use an H and an I in the center of the line for this check and adjustment iid ABRIR UE HHEHBHHEH 0 HEH Use Center Characters Figure 22 Bidirectional Adjustment Printout The alignment is correct if the x a 1 for Model 001 and Model 003 or a 2 for Model 002 appears in the center of the Hs Chapter 2 Diagnostics 217 6 The following message will be displayed T amp D16 Bidirectional Adjustment Test PRESS A KEY 7 Press any key to feed the paper back into the printer The following message will display
333. t 1 Press stop to clear the message 2 Increase the buffer size and or 3 Check the SERIAL PACING PROTOCOL value set in the printer configuration against the hosts pacing protocol 4 Restart the print job A89 A8C or A97 Application errors Press Stop then Start JUMPER AND KEYS Manufacturing use only 1 Remove the jumper from the bottom of the operator panel 2 Install a a i operator panel See 3 TATUM a new operator panel cable 4 Install a new logic board See Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 145 Reference Table 3 No Printed Characters Failure No printed characters appear Action No print from any source host or print test If there is no carnage motion If there is carriage motion 1 Check that the ribbon is S seated correctly Models A00 003 no print from serial parallel or both attachments but print test is OK For all models no print from parallel with coax twinax or parallel attachments but printer demonstration is OK For all models no print from network print server attachment but printer demonstration is OK Print test starts to print one line then printer hangs Reference Table 4 Print Quality Failures Print Quality Failures Darkness Location Quality Action Print density varies or is too light or too dark Note Impact Strength may not be available on your printer 1 I
334. t of chad to be excessive advise the customer to Frequently clean out the chad Ask the forms supplier to reduce the chad Go to step B3 on page 1221 Go to step Bal Go to step 35 on page 124 Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 121 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 33 Check that the bellcrank is correctly moving the lower pinch rollers up and down Check the parts at the left end of the platen The bellcrank must be positioned between the platen gear and the washer Platen Gear Bellcrank QQ ES ns d Q Washer 8 Is the bellcrank installed correctly and functioning correctly Go to step B4 on page 123l Repair as needed Run T amp D 11 to perform a correct calibration of the rear path sensor Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 122 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 34 As a platen becomes worn from use the surface can become shiny and more reflective This shine can be interpreted by the sensors as paper present on the platen Check the platen for a shiny surface and for cuts and bruises Is the platen surface OK Go to step B5 on page 124 p Install a new platen b If the upper feed roller has not been replaced recently you should replace it C Also replace the bail assembly if it does NOT hav
335. tain from the operator a printout of the current printer configuration See How To Run the Test 1 2 Put the covers in the service position See 3 Remove the attachment card Remove the power supply cover Remove the board fan support m Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 379 Figure 119 Board Fan Support 6 Disconnect all connectors from the logic board and remove the jumper for use on the new board See Notes a To remove printhead cables hold the cable just above the connector and pull the cable out of the connector These are not locking connectors b Some connectors have retaining clips The sensor connector can be disconnected after the logic board is partially removed Note the connector locations and cable paths to aid installation a9 Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 380 Stacker Operator Tractors Sensors Panel Power Supply Paper Feed Motor Ribbon Print Head and Carriage AFTA Motor Ribbon Lift Motor Motor e90alb5 Figure 120 Models 001 and 002 Logic Board Connector Locations Model 001 has connectors A and B Model 002 has only connector B 7 Remove the mounting screws and standoffs Note the type and location of each screw A Threaded crew Self tapping B Screw Figure 121 Logic Board Screw Type Locations 8 Lift the rear of the board and pull to
336. tall 407 wiring 250 carriage remove install 415 wiring 246 paper feed remove install 447 wiring 248 ribbon drive remove install 403 wiring 252 ribbon lift remove install 405 Index 563 motors continued wiring 253 stacker remove install 347 wiring 255 N Network Print Server Attachment Powering the 273 Network Server Problems 156 No Printed Characters 146 O operator panel cable wiring 259 lock and unlock 142 499 remove install 355 Operator Panel and Miscellaneous Problems 149 P paper feed motor drive belt 448 remove install 447 wiring 248 Paper Paths 158 paper specifications 534 Parallel Connector 273 Parts Catalog 457 Paths 531 Pin 18 5V Jumper Locations 273 position covers service 275 power cord 481 power supply MAP 75 power supply continued remove install 400 Print Quality Failures 146 print quality service check fanfold printout 338 manual sheet feed printout 343 print test how to print Model A00 160 Models 001 002 197 Printer Configuration 484 printhead MAP 70 mask 432 remove install 356 wiring 242 244 printing Model A00 firmware P N amp level 160 microcode level 299 power on configuration 160 print test 160 program setup configuration 161 Models 001 002 error log 198 firmware P N amp level 197 microcode level 299 printer configuration 198 printer demonstration 197 push pull path service check 313 R Removals and Adjustments 275 Removals and Replacements 346
337. tent failures Ask the operator to run the failing job for you to observe if possible Model A00 does not log printer errors Models 001 002 and 003 generate Error Logs and Usage Metrics Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 130 Intermittent problems may be caused by out of range voltages Check the voltages by following the procedures in Powe Dn on page Electrostatic Discharge ESD Intermittent problems can also be caused by build up of electrostatic charge on the forms or bad electrostatic ground ESD connections If you suspect the forms contact level 2 support for guidance If you suspect the problem is caused by a bad ground perform the following check Power off O the printer and unplug the power cord from the customer s power outlet Set the meter to the lowest resistance scale and measure for 0 1 ohms or less between the ground pin of the power cord and the following parts Green yellow wire near power switch at the ground symbol See Figure 24 on page 241l Metal plate behind the attachment cables Power supply through one threaded mounting screw to the left of the ASF grounding plate Logic board through the threaded mounting screws at the center of the board Printer mechanical assembly through the metal strips at each end Carriage motor through the copper leaf spring between the motor and the plate above the motor pulley Any metal part of the tractor assemblies with the tractor mounted in the printe
338. ter 2 Diagnostics 171 1 Adjust the print gap in 0 25 mm 0 001 in increments to achieve acceptable print darkness 2 Initiate T amp D12 see S 3 Use STORE NO 4 5 After adjusting the gap to optimize the print saii exit with STORE YES 6 A the gap between the printhead needles and the platen as described in IStandard AFTA Service Check 7A rete the ii between the carriage casting and the platen as described in Standard AFTA Service Check and 55 AFTA Errors f your printer is getting a 55 AFTA ERROR message that is caused by a bad 5B printhead needle the printer will display these messages During normal operation With the AFTA 0 mode you perform a paper load operation but get a 55 AFTA ERROR message Of During T amp D12 With the AFTA 0 or the FIXED 1 mode you begin the AFTA Calibration portion of T amp D12 but get the message TD12 FRU 3 14 To determine if the cause of the AFTA ERROR message is a bad 5B printhead needle follow these steps 1 Power off the printer and remove all paper from the printer 2 Power on the printer and enter the operator menu to change to FIXED 1 mode 3 Load 1 part paper and print some characters 4 Examine the DP characters such as an uppercase H looking for missing dots Count down 5 dots from the top of the character to verify that the 5B needle is printing characters correctly 5 Inspect the printhead cable for damage and a poor connection at the printhead
339. ter Set Printer Compatibility 3 Auto LF on CR 4 Auto CR on LF 5 FF Suppression 6 Init 7 Condensed Print 8 Slashed Zero 9 20 CPI Alarm Control Interface Type Input Buffer Size Select In AutoFeed XT Figure 196 Coax Configuration Printout Part 1 of 2 Push 10 Single 132 066 4B47 DP Quality 37 USA Canada Canadian Bilingual Dual Right to Left E Alternate 1920 Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Disabled Standard Disabled High High Enabled Disabled 3 Single 1 Triple Standard Unidirectional 10 6 134 066 4947 437 PC DP Quality Courier PCi Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled 17 1 CPI Disabled Enabled Enabled PC Parallel SEK Enabled Disabled E90AX003 Appendix A Printer Configuration 501 Printer Setup Paper Source Front ASF Default Bin Bin 1 ASF Bin 1 Media Paper ASF Bin Linking Disabled Front Forms Backup Enabied Rear Forms Backup Enabled Continuous Forms Linking Disabled Form Feed Mode Automatic Eject Not Active in Ready State Disabled Automatic Restore Disabled Continuous Forms Eject Mode Immediate Eject Manual Paper Overlay Disabled Automatic Manual Load Enabled Manual Feed Eject Mode Bar Code Print Direction Graphics Print Direction Display Language Display Language Vital Product Data Serial Mumber Device Specific Information Top of Form Unidirectional
340. the Did T amp D09 run without errors suggested action 5 Install the loop back connector on the host end of the Install a new serial attachment Install a new host cable cable and run T amp D09 See Did T amp D09 run without errors Run T amp D in Automatic Mode to verify correct printer operation see a Io a the Tes and i Seek correct Fun operation Run T amp D in Automatic Mode to Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 39 Table 4 MAP 0120 Attachment Model A00 continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 6 Do you have the parallel loop back connector PN Go to step i Install a new logic board See 08H7269 for this printer or Install a new host cable Run T amp D in automatic mode to A correct Bunt operaron see 7 Install the loop back connector Install a new host parallel cable Did T amp DO6 run without errors Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation c Mode A00 see How Tal For ete 001 002 or 003 see How To Run the Test and Record the display message and go SYLT for Model 003 and padon the suggested action Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 40 MAP 0121 Parallel with Twinax or Coax Attachments Models 001 002 or 003 Table 5 Symptom Explanation 015 COMMUNICATIONS CHECK 017 COMMUNICATIONS CHECK 027 COMMUNICATIONS CHECK 028 COMMUNICATIONS CHECK 065 NO AT
341. the power supply cable to the logic board Plug the power cord to the printer then to the power source Power on the printer Measure the power supply connector voltages Measure between a connector ground pin and the for pins and voltages Are the voltage measurements OK Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 77 Table 11 MAP 0150 Power Supply continued Questions Actions Yes No 4 a Power off O the printer b Connect the power supply fan to the power supply board c Power on the printer Does the power supply fan run OK Go to step Bl Power off O the printer Install a new power supply fan Or Install a new di supply See EPower Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer ROSE For Model A00 see a Is 001 002 or 003 5 a Power off O the printer b Connect the power supply cable to the logic board c Power on the printer Does the power supply fan run OK Go to step B on page 7d Go to step I on page 8d Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 78 Table 11 MAP 0150 Power Supply continued Questions Actions Yes No 6 a Power off O the printer b Connect the carriage motor fan to the power supply board c Power on the printer Does the power supply fan run Power off O the printer and install a new operator panel assembly See Operator Panall TEES
342. thead If the error occurs again Disconnect the 22 conductor printhead cable from continue with the logic board and from the printhead Check the continuity of conductors 11 and 12 from end to end d If the printer is a Model 002 9 needle printhead Disconnect the 26 conductor printhead cable from the logic board and from the printhead Check the continuity of conductors 19 and 20 from end to end Inspect the contacts at the ends of the cable for delamination and other damage Are the cables OK 3 Install a new printhead See Install a new logic board For Return the printer to service Load and park forms several times Did the error occur again Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 129 MAP 0210 Intermittent Failures Symptom Explanation Suspected FRUs Causes Intermittent Failures Loose connectors ESD grounds Damaged wires General Information All possible indications and symptoms should be recorded to aid you in using this MAP System error logs when available aid in identifying intermittent problems Obtain all information concerning the failure from operator system aids and information Error Status codes displayed on operator panel System error log host system information Online problem operator identified System identified problem Power on failure cold start Long run time failures hot overheated An online program can be used to find intermit
343. tion Model A00 How To Print the Print Test 1 Load forms Power off O the printer Press and hold the Online key while powering on the printer Press and hold the Online key until the printer has stopped all motion approximately 20 seconds Release the Online key and the message PRINT TEST displays The Print Test will start printing To stop the Print Test at any time press the Online key OL Te Note This test will print using the currently selected font To change the font see the BM 4247 Printer Model A00 User s Guide SA24 4404 How To Print Firmware Part Number and Version Levels 1 Print the Print Test See How To Print the Print Test 2 Line 3 of the printout shows the printer firmware part number Code module U54 and generator module U02 version levels follow the part number How To Print the Power On Configuration Load forms Power off O the printer Press and hold the Menu Enter key while powering on the printer Press and hold the Menu Enter key until the printer has stopped all motion approximately 20 seconds Release the Menu Enter key and the message PRINT OUT NO will display To print the current settings press the Pitch key The message PRINT OUT YES will display and the Configuration Setup Printout is printed An RW Copyright IBM Corp 1995 2001 160 How To Print the Program Setup Configuration EP IE Power on the printer Load forms Press the Menu Enter key The
344. tment See Bidire Removal Two Piece Version 1 Remove the left side cover 2 Open the cover and remove the ribbon carriage See FRibbon on page 353 3 Remove the screw on each end of the plastic shield assembly Move the plastic shield assembly up to disengage it then move it to the left through the side of the printer cabinet Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 455 Shield e90alocg Figure 193 Lower Plastic Shield Assembly Replacement Two Piece Version Follow the removal steps in reverse order Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 456 Chapter 6 Parts Catalog How To Use This Parts Catalog SIMILAR ASSEMBLIES f two assemblies contain a majority of identical parts they are broken down on the same list Common parts are shown by one index number Parts peculiar to one or the other of the assemblies are listed separately and identified by description e AR As Required in the Units column indicates that the quantity is not the same for all machines NP Non Procurable in the Units column indicates that the part is non procurable and that the individual parts or the next higher assembly should be ordered NR Not Recommended in the Units column indicates that the part is procurable but not recommended for field replacement and that the next higher assembly should be ordered PP Parts Packet This entry in the Description column indicates that a parts packet contains one or more
345. to MAP 0190 to check the forms path or f you do not find damaged forms in the tractor 1 Look for paper chad inside the tractor sensor If you find chad a Usea lint free cloth to wipe the sensor As a preventative measure apply anti static liquid IBM P N 2200118 to the sensor using a lint free cloth Consider occasional treatment if problem recurs b If you find chad and judge it to be excessive advise the customer to Frequently clean out the chad Ask the forms supplier to reduce the chad Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 300 2 With the printer powered on look at the back of the tractor sensor In a darkened room you should be able to see the red dot of the light emitting diode LED If the LED is not lighted verify that the tractor is plugged correctly into the electrical socket If you determine the mechanical connection is adequate but the LED is not lighted replace the tractor assembly Verify the sensor can read the tractor holes in the forms a Mount forms onto the tractor pins While holding the paper in place advance the forms by hand cycling the upper feed roller Ensure the sensor is positioned so the LED light passes through the tractor holes If adjustment is indicated loosen and retighten the sensor If adjusting the sensor does not correct the condition replace the tractor assembly 7295 Paper Path Service Checks Main Paper Drive Check and Adjustment Ihe 2 Power off
346. to properly install the bellcrank and platen gear can result in damage to the gears Be certain the retaining clip called e clip in Figure 148 is seated in the groove on the platen shaft and the parts are in the correct order Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 413 Q Groove for e clip D e90aas2 Figure 148 Detail of Retaining Clip on the Platen Shaft The retaining clip shown as e clip is installed in the shallow groove next to the V groove in the shaft Note Figure 148 shows the bellcrank removed for clarity Rotate the bellcrank only to remove or install the gear and spring Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 414 Carriage Drive Motor Assembly AN CAUTION The carriage motor may be hot Wait for it to cool down Removal 1 Remove the printer covers See Printer Covers on page 3471 2 Disconnect the carriage motor connector from the logic board Note the location of the connector the cable path and the cable ties to aid installation Note If the motor is being removed only to access other parts do not disconnect the connector Carriage Motor Figure 149 Carriage Motor Connector Location Model A00 Early Level Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 415 Figure 150 Carriage Motor Connector Location Model A00 Late Level and Models 001 002 and 00
347. to run T amp D in Automatic Mode or to run T amp D9 Serial Attachment Test in Single Mode a loop back connector needs to be installed Install the serial RS 232 PN 08H7268 connector on the attachment bezel You will be prompted by the display to install the RS 422 PN 08H7259 connector during the test If you are here to run T amp D in Automatic Mode or to run T amp D10 Stacker ASF Test a loop back connector needs to be installed Install the stacker ASF loop back connector PN 08H7270 on the stacker connector Chapter 2 Diagnostics 161 Note The stacker ASF loop back connector tests the stacker and ASF circuits 7 Press and hold the Menu Enter and Line Feed keys at the same time 8 Power on the printer 9 When the printer displays BOOT RAM TEST US release the Menu Enter and Line Feed keys 10 The following three messages will be displayed in sequence STARTING UP T amp D START UP YES SINGLE NO 11 To run all the tests sequentially go to Automatic Test Mode step 113 on page 163 To run specific tests go to the Single Test Mode in the next step 12 Single Test Mode YES SINGLE NO Note This program allows forward scrolling only a Press the Micro key to select YES The following message will display T amp D01 YES NO END b Press the Micro key to scroll to the desired test c Press the Micro key to run the currently displayed test For a descript
348. tomatic Test Mode to verify correct printer Hou ia For Model esl and see pade iF For ME 001 002 or 003 see How To Bun thd Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 96 Table 13 MAP 0170 ASF Stacker continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 7 1 Remove the stacker assembly Remove the stacker ASF Remove the stacker ASF loop back connector loop back connector 2 Install the stacker ASF loop back connector in the stacker connector Install a new stacker assembly Install a new logic board For 3 Run T amp D10 in Single Test Mode to test the stacker circuits For Model A00 see ATTE Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Mode A00 see How Tal Does T amp D10 run without errors For VET 001 D or 003 see How To Run the Test and or Install a new stacker cable Run T amp D in Automatic Test Mode to verify correct printer TTEN For Model esl and see page 161l For Yee 001 002 or 003 see How To Bun the Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 97 MAP 0180 Top Cover Interlock Symptom Explanation Suspected FRUs Causes 96 COVER OPEN Top cover 90 CLOSE COVER 096 NOT READY COVER OPEN sop cover magnel T amp D19 TOP COVER INTERLOCK TEST FAILURE Operator panel Printer logic board Operator panel cable ASF stacker assembly ASF stacker assembly cable Table 14 MAP 0180 Top Cover Interl
349. ts Save Current Values Yes Custom Set A Custom Set E Custom Set B Custom Set F Custom Set C Custom Set G Custom Set D Custom Set H ATTACHMENT Table 78 Attachment Coax Parallel REAR TRACTOR USE e ifa rear tractor is installed Choices vary if the front tractor is also installed Table 79 Rear Tractor Use Push rear or front and rear tractor Pull rear tractor only Push Pull front and rear tractors COAX CONFIGURATION Appendix A Printer Configuration 507 Table 80 Coax Configuration Characters Per Inch Lines Per Inch LPI Single Double Space 10 42 6 Single 15 8 Double 16 7 Maximum Print Position MPP Maximum Page Length MPL Emulation Mode 132 001 136 at 10 CPI 066 4247 163 at 12 CPI 001 660 at 6 LPI 4224 204 at 15 CPI 880 at 8 LPI 4230 227 at 16 7 CPI 3287 3268 Print Quality Print Language Mono Dual Case Print Language Dependent DP Quality 37 USA Canada Canadian Bilingual Dual DP Text Quality Mono Near Letter Quality 1097 Farsi Print Text Direction Media Size Priority Printer Compatibility Print Language Dependent IPDS Only Right to Left See Sub Menu in able 81 Left to Right Standard Alternate Translate Table Model 003 only Bar Code Mode IPDS Only Graphics Mode IPDS Only Appendix A Printer Configuration 508 Table 80 Coax Configuratio
350. uble thickness of forms After performing a Load the wheel should repeatedly go to a numeral that is 1 greater 0 25 on the wheel than the number A you recorded at the end of step Fon nage 289 of Verify AFTA operation using single part forms Based on the results you get e If the number is not increasing perform T amp D12 then return to Verify AFTA calibration using single part forms or e If the number is increasing remove the wheel and align the pointer to 2 Return to Verify AFTA calibration using single part forms here to complete this procedure Set the T amp D12 value to 0 and STORE After running T amp D12 go to Verify AFTA calibration using single part forms Verify AFTA calibration using single part forms 1 2 3 4 Set the operator panel menu item FIXED 1 Load single part 20 Ib 80 g m forms into the printer using the Load key Note the wheel position If the wheel position for FIXED 1 is different than the number you noted at A during the procedure entitled Verify AFTA operation using single part forms run T amp D12 Set the adjustment value to 0 and STORE To verify that the wheel position is now correct repeat the Load operation using single part forms with the settings AFTA 0 and FIXED 1 The wheel must go to the same position Verify printhead needles To verify that all the bones needles are functioning run T amp D14 The use of the Printhead Wire Test pattern is shown in
351. ule extractor PN 7365523 follow these steps to avoid cracking or damaging the plastic sockets 11 a b C d Insert the C shaped end of the tool into one of the module socket extraction slots Hold the tool perpendicular to the module and pull upward to loosen it from the socket Repeat the previous 2 steps using the extraction slot in the opposite corner until the module lifts out of the socket Visually inspect module leads for alignment Correct any mis alignment before reinstalling into new board socket Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 374 Microcode Module U1 i Microcode A a Module U2 Bevel Corner Cut Off 4247 A00 Level 1 Logic Board Microcode Module U2 Corner oe Microcode Ff Bevel Module U54 4247 A00 Level 2 Logic Board Microcode Module U57 Microcode Ps Corner Module U2 Se Off Microcode Bevel Module U54 4247 A00 Level 3 Logic Board Microcode Module U57 Microcode Module U2 Microcode LT Module U54 Bevel Corner Cut Off 4247 A00 Level 4 Logic Board e90aloc5 Figure 117 Model A00 Rear View of Microcode Module Locations and Orientation Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 375 Replacement 1 Follow the removal steps in reverse order r Important If you replace an early level logic board with a late level logic board th
352. ults Ju shows the factory default settings for the Power On Configuration for a Model A00 printer Appendix A Printer Configuration 485 Configuration Setup Printout PULL NO JAM SENSORS YES BIDI ADJUST 0 PARALLEL INTF INTF CX PARALLEL SERIAL INTERFACE INTF RS 232C SELECT IN HOST BAUD 9600 DATA BITS 8 DATA BITS 8 BUFFER 32K PARITY NONE NATIVE 4247 PACING DTR CHAR SET PC2 CONNECT LOCAL LANG CP437 BUFFER 32K AUTO CR NO NATIVE 4247 AUTO LF NO CHAR SET PCZ 20 CPI NO LANG CP437 NLQ COURIER AUTO CR NO AUTO LF NO 20 CPI NO NLQ COURIER FUNCTIONS FRONT TEAR NORM REAR TEAR NORM PAPER OVERLY NO SEQUENCE NONE ALARM YES AUTOLOAD YES MENU ENGLISH Figure 194 Model A00 Power On Configuration Printout The following information is from the 4247 Printer Model A00 Quick Reference Guide SA24 4405 Changing a Value In the Power On Configuration Menu 1 Ensure the printer is powered off O 2 Press and hold the Menu Enter key while powering on the printer The message STARTING UP will display Appendix A Printer Configuration 486 3 After start up is complete release Menu Enter The message PRINT OUT NO displays 4 f you want to print the current settings on the printer press gt The message PRINT OUT YES displays and the Power On Configuration Setup Printout is printed Or 5 If you want to change a Category press until you find the Category you want 6 Depending on which Category you want to change press
353. uration 505 Coax Attachment Configuration Configurations to which this menu applies Using the coax base code with the coax attachment card for the Model 003 Using the coax attachment with the Model 001 and 002 Table 76 Coax Configuration Menu CATEGORIES Attachment See Coax Configuration See Parallel Configuration See Printer Setup See Printer Adjustment See page 514 Power On Reset Yes Press Enter to execute Display Language See FD Send Buffer Reprint Code See ESEND BUFFER REPRINT Vital Product Data See Quit From Menu Restore previous values Press Enter to execute Manufacturing Default did When Emulation Mode is set to 4247 4202 IIl XL or 2381 Personal Printer When Emulation Mode is set to Epson FX t When Emulation Mode is set to Epson FX only Compatibility Options 3 6 and 8 are available CONFIGURATION STORAGE Table 77 Configuration Storage Recall Custom Set Values Power On Custom Set Power On Paper Source Appendix A Printer Configuration 506 Table 77 Configuration Storage continued Custom Set A Custom Set E Custom Set B Custom Set F Last Used Front Bin 3 Custom Set C Custom Set G Custom Set A Custom Set E Rear Manual Custom Set D Custom Set H Custom Set B Custom Set F Bin 1 Last Used Custom Set C Custom Set G Bin 2 Custom Set D Custom Set H Recall Factory Defaul
354. utomatic mode to verify problems correct printer operation For Model Perform the AFTA service check See A00 see bow To Bun the Test and Is the AFTA service check OK 5 Put the covers in the service position Go to step l amp on page 73 Disconnect the carriage motor connector from the logic board See to measure 3 the resistance of the motor windings Is the measurement correct for each winding Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer operation For Model ACO see thaw TB Bun the i and Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 72 Table 10 MAP 0140 Printhead Drive continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 6 An open printhead thermal sensor can Go to step Z on page 74 cause the printhead drive to stop Remove the poe See Printhead nineaa Wiring to measure the resistance of the thermal sensor Measure between pins 5 and 6 on the printhead 26 pin connector these pins are the same for both an 18 wire and a 9 wire printhead Is the resistance 1000 ohms 6 60 ohms Install a new printhead Carefully follow the UEM procedure Printhead Run T amp D in automatic mode to verify correct printer m For Model A00 see D 2 or 003 Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 73 Table 10 MAP 0140 Printhead Drive continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 7 Disconnect the 26 conductor printhead cable from the logic board
355. ver Screws Top Cover Removed for Clarity 8 Tilt the rear main cover set toward the rear of the printer Lift off and remove the rear cover set from the printer Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 277 Accessing Front Components Remove the main front cover to gain access to components at the front of the printer such as Ribbon drive motor Feed motor Carriage motor AFTA mechanism Remove the front tractor Remove the operator panel Remove the front main cover screws 2 Lift out the two tabs one on each side to release the two pins and release the front cover from the base assembly 5 Tilt the front cover forward and lift it away from the printer Pec Installing Covers 1 To install follow the removal steps in reverse order 2 Perform the tear off line adjustment See Chapter 5 Removals and Adjustments 278 Service Checks and Adjustments Carriage Drive Belt Service Check Power off O the printer Remove the ribbon cartridge See FRibbon on page 3531 Move the printhead to the right side stop Using a push pull scale such as IBM P N 460870 to check the belt tension apply pressure to the upper half of the belt at a point midway between the printhead and the left side frame until it begins to touch the bottom half of the belt To accurately measure the tension it is critical for the raised surfaces of the teeth to align as shown in The correct force required to bring the top of the belt into cont
356. ward the flat surface with your thumbs 1 until the tractor locks in the fully extended position 2 yn ae C Rear Tractor Push Mode straight Rear Tractor Pull Mode bent To configure the tractor for rear pull mode Place the tractor face down on a flat surface with the electrical connector tab on the right side pointing toward you Pull the bottom release levers toward you with your finger tips and pull the movable edge of the tractor up away from the flat surface with your thumbs 1 until the tractor locks in the angled position 2 The following figure shows the Rear Tractor in Pull Mode Retry the failing print job You have completed this MAP Are the forms sticking together or sticking to the Static electricity is present in the Go to step 18 on page 113 plastic covers forms Contact Level 2 Support for ex a Go to step Chapter 1 Diagnosing Problems 112 Table 15 MAP 0190 Forms Feed Problems continued Step Questions Actions Yes No 18 Make the following checks a Forms input and output stacking follows the E in fEonms Stacking b Input oe are aligned to feed straight into the printer c Input forms are not catching on the edge of the forms carton d Printer is properly positioned on the work surface front edge of the printer at the front edge of the work surface to provide unrestricted forms feed for front push push pull and r

IBM 4247 Printer Maintenance Information

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents